PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External

PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Part A – Preliminaries and Preambles

Part B – Particular Specification

B1 General
B2 Codes and Regulations
B3 System Description
1 Description Work Area
2 Description of System
B4 Scope of Works
B5 Abbreviations
Part C – Standard Specification – Electrical Installation
C1 Main, Sub-main Distribution, Distribution Board and MCC Equipment
C2 LV Distribution Cabling
C3 Small Power and Electrical Equipment
C4 General Lighting
C5 Lighting Control System Devices
C6 Earthing System
C7 Lightning Protection System
C8 Particular Requirement on Testing and Commissioning
C9 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
C10 ‘As Built ‘Drawings
C11 Standby Diesel Generator Set
C12 Fixing to Building Fabric
C13 Identification
C14 Seismic Control and Vibrations
C15 Emergency Lighting – Addressable Central Monitoring System
C16 Uninterruptible Power Supply
Part C – Standard Specification – IT/ELV Installation
C17 Structured Cabling System
C18 Video Surveillance
C19 Video Management System
C20 Access Control System
C22 SMATV System (Not Applicable)
C23 Audio Intercom System (Not Applicable)
C24 Automatic Gate Barrier System

Part C – Standard Specification – Fire Services Installation

C25 Fire Detection and Alarm System Equipment
PART D – MEP APPROVED MANUFACTURERS’ LIST
D1 General Requirements

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 1 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Part A – Preliminaries and Preambles

Refer to Main Contract

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 2 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART B - PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

B1 GENERAL

a) The electrical systems installations are to be executed completely by a specialist Electrical

Firm, and the entire installation shall comply with all the statutory regulations and
requirements whether indicated herein or on the Tender Drawings

b) The Electrical Contractor shall include for the supply of the whole of the materials in
accordance with the specifications as per approved list of make and the whole of the work of
fixing necessary for the complete installations as set down in their specifications with
accompanying drawings and schedules, commencing from supply authorities’ terminals

c) The entire Electrical Installations shall conform to the relevant British Standards and Local
Government requirements.

d) The work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of and in accordance with the rules,
regulations, and requirements of the supply authority. Where none exist, the work shall be
carried out in accordance with the "Current Regulation for the Electrical Equipment of
Building " issued by the Institute of electrical Engineers (United Kingdom).

e) The electrical contractor shall serve all notices on the supply authority for testing, pay all
fees in connection therewith, and should any additional charges be made for re-testing, they
shall be paid by the electrical Contractor.

f) The consulting engineer shall have full power to require any material or work to be tested at
the electrical contractor’s expenses to prove their soundness and efficiency.

g) The cable, conduit and sheaths shall be tested for insulation and continuity as the work
proceeds before any connections are made to the switch and distribution board terminals.
In case any materials or work shall, with or without being tested, be considered defective,
such work shall forth with be amended in a proper and satisfactory manner on being notified
by the Consulting engineer. Where certificates are required from manufactures of
specialized equipment, before handing over the Electrical Contractor will pay all charges
incurred on obtaining these certificates.

h) The position of all points and equipment shown on the accompanying plans shall be
assumed correct for the purpose of tender, but it is the Electrical Contractors responsibility
to check the positions with the drawings which will be available on site. Any variation of
position or height may be allowed without extra charge, unless such alterations are made
after conduits, cables etc. are fixed.

i) Circuit list shall be provided inside all distribution board etc, clearly marked.

j) The Electrical Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing all details and samples of
Electrical Accessories as required by Consulting Engineer and shall be approved before
starting work at site.

k) This specification covers the manufacture, supply, installation, testing, commissioning, and
maintenance of the Electrical Installation as described herein and shown on the Drawings.
The intent of this Contract is to provide for the construction and completion in every detail of
the Works. This Contractor shall furnish all labour, superintendence, materials, tools,
equipment storage, certificates, drawings, temporary work, inspection, testing and
incidentals necessary to complete the works in a proper, through and skillful manner.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 3 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

l) This document shall be read in conjunction with the Contract conditions and the Tender
Drawings.

m) This section applies to all Electrical Services Specifications Sections

B2 CODES AND REGULATIONS

a) The standards, codes, and specifications referenced below and elsewhere in this
Specification shall be of the latest editions.

b) Unless otherwise specified, the Electrical Installation shall comply with the latest editions,
issued from time to time, of the following documents:

i) IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

ii) DEWA Regulations for Electrical Installations
iii) DEWA Distribution Substation Guideline
iv) DCD UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice
v) Dubai Municipality Al Sa’fat: Dubai Green Building Evaluation System
vi) BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations. IET Wiring Regulations
vii) BS EN 61439-1 Low-voltage switchgear and Control gear assemblies. Part 1. General
rules
viii) BS EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
ix) BS 7432 Code of practice for protective earthing of electrical installations
x) BS EN 62305 Protection against lightning
xi) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
xii) NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
xiii) NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
xiv) NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems
xv) Etisalat / Du / TRA Regulations
xvi) SIRA regulations for Surveillance and security
xvii) CIBSE/SLL Lighting guides
xviii) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
xix) UL Underwriters Laboratories
xx) NFPA National Fire Protection Association 20, 70, 72, 101, 110, 780
xxi) ASHRAE American Society for Heating Refrigeration Air-conditioning Engineers
xxii) OSHA Occupation Safety & Health Administration

c) It is this Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the various authorities are satisfied with
the codes adopted by this Contractor in these works. This Contractor shall also be
responsible for all costs for submission to various authorities including all shop drawings,
samples, and the like to meet with the statutory requirements and obtain approval.

d) Wherever there are conflicts between different codes above, the more stringent code shall
apply.

e) All works shall conform to this specification and to the best principles of modern Engineering
practice and be carried out by full competent tradesmen of appropriate grades.

f) All electrical equipment shall be of first grade quality with regards to design, manufacture
and installation and shall be complete for satisfactory operation, control, maintenance, and
safety under all conditions of service.

g) All contractor design and installation works shall be in accordance with the requirements of
Green Building Guidelines.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 4 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

B3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. Description of Work Area

The PREMISE is an industrial development comprise of warehouse, an admin building with

associated energy center and a room for driver. The project is located at DIC, Dubai.

2. Description of Systems

a) Main Incoming Supply

i) Power to the building shall be provided via DEWA HV. 11kV Cables.
ii) The contractor shall be responsible for liaising with DEWA to arrange the 11kV
supply. (Load NOC shall be obtained by consultant and handed over to the
contractor).
iii) 1x1500kVA ONAN 11/0.4kV transformers shall be provided at the substation by
DEWA and have space to accommodate 2 more transformers for future expansion.
iv) The MV panel, transformer and the LV switchgear will be in a dedicated room. The
substation shall be designed in accordance with the DEWA regulations and IEC
standards. Adequate ventilation, fire protection and cable raceways shall be provided.
v) The substation shall also be provided with earthing facilities comprising copper
earthing cables from all transformers and switchgear, within the cable trenches and
shall terminate on an Earthing grid externally with sufficient components to achieve
maximum impedance from the system to Mass Earth of less than 1 Ohm. The number
of earth electrodes required shall be ascertained by the contractor by soil resistivity
tests and calculation at the early stages of the contract.
vi) Test bars with disconnecting links shall be installed in the substation and in the LV
rooms.
vii) The substation LV room shall be provided with a cable trench to allow easy
installation of cables.
viii) The substation LV room shall be equipped with the heavy-duty Galvanized steel
chequered plate covering all the trenches.
ix) Provision of secondary steel structure for support of checker plates and LV panels
complete with the checker plates shall be provided by the MEP contractor.
x) The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all trenching, manholes, ducts,
cables etc. for the complete installation of works.
xi) Manholes shall be equipped with heavy duty covers. Contractor to ensure the water-
proofing of manholes in & out. It is contractor’s responsibility to seal all the extra or
unnecessary opening inside the manholes with approved waterproof / fire resistant
sealant.

b) Site wide LV Distribution

i) The power distribution system will be 3 phase, 4 wire, and 400V/230V, 50Hz with
DEWA’s standard system fluctuations, power factor correction and fault levels.
ii) Electrical Switchboards shall conform to the requirements of IEC/ EN / BSEN 61439-
1&2 Standards and assemblies shall be design verified by ASTA/DEKRA or
equivalent independent certifying bodies. Design verification certificates shall be
provided to ensure compliance.
iii) The main LV switchboard shall be of Form 4, Type 6, and IP 54 construction. The
board shall be fully rated to operate at 50 degrees C and shall be tested for internal
arc withstand as per IEC 1641 for 50kA for 3s (min.).
iv) Main distribution boards and ACB panel cubicles shall be of minimum 1.5mm thick
electro-galvanized sheet steel and with electrostatic epoxy powder coated. Approval

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 5 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

shall be obtained from the Engineer for the shade requirement. The paint shade shall
be normally RAL 7035.
v) All panels shall be of modular cubicles pattern provided with front hinged doors and
rear bolted covers/panels, floor mounted, front access, air insulated, totally enclosed,
fully interlocked and shall have an earth braid/wire connected to the frame.
vi) All Sub main distribution boards shall be of Form 2b, Type 2 construction.
vii) Reactive power compensation shall be provided via dedicated multi step power factor
correction units with capacitor banks for the LV panel.
viii) All Main Distribution Boards (MDB), Sub Main Distribution Boards (SMDB) and
Distribution Boards (DB), External DBs shall be supplied by DEWA approved supplier
and will be in accordance with DEWA standards.
ix) All non-critical sub-main circuits shall be wired with appropriate cables/wires as
indicated in the schematics & load distribution schedules. All circuits shall be installed
within the containment systems indicated on the drawings.
x) The contractor shall be responsible for providing discrimination protection settings
based on the load demands for all the incoming & outgoing breakers on the LV panel,
DBs & all SMDBs. The settings shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval prior to
commissioning.

c) Standby Generator

i) Contractor shall design, supply, install, test & commission complete system including
containment such as Generator, ATS panel, conduits, trunking, junction boxes, pull
wires, control and power cables required for the complete System as per the drawing
and as required by consultant / client in addition to the fuel oil tank. Contractor shall
submit shop drawing to consultant/ Client and approval to be obtained prior to
commencement of work at site.
ii) A standby diesel generator set shall be provided for providing backup power for
essential loads and as stipulated in the drawings/schedules.
iii) A complete functioning system shall be delivered, installed, commissioned including
all necessary ancillary systems for air supply, combustion, cooling, and exhaust air,
engine exhaust, built in fuel storage, power delivery, controls, and protection.
iv) In general, the standby generator shall feed IT loads, a percentage of lighting, security
systems, essential pumps, and Smoke Management System.

d) Cable Trenches

i) In general cables throughout the site will be installed in ducts with burying depth and
detail as per standard DEWA specifications
ii) Cable trenches shall generally follow the route as indicated on the design drawings.
Wherever a diversion is required from the indicated route due to clashes with other
utilities or other unforeseen site conditions, the contractor shall propose an alternate
route or diversion and submit for engineer’s approval.
iii) Detailed section drawings will also be produced for all areas where cables cross over
other utilities.
iv) All ducts shall be slopped minimum (1:50) falling away from the building to minimize
the likelihood of water entering the building.
v) Where cable ducts enter the building, they shall each be provided with an approved
waterproof seal and gland arrangement to prevent water entering the building inside
the duct and in addition a puddle flange on the outside of each duct.
vi) Cable trench shall also be provided in the transformer room to house the DEWA HV
cables. The trench shall be built in accordance with DEWA specifications.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 6 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

e) Incoming Supply and Distribution for Buildings

i) Main incoming supply to the building shall be 3 phase, 4 wire, 400V / 230V, 50Hz with
DEWA’s standard system fluctuations, power factor correction and fault and supplied
from the substation LV Panel.
ii) Dedicated SMDBs shall be provided for Landlord Services, Essential Services with
integrated change over mechanism (if required).
iii) Mechanical Plant
1) Main mechanical plant on the facility includes:

 Portable water pumps

 Fire pumps
 Fans
 Air Handling Units
 Condensing Units and Fan Coil Units

2) Supplies shall be provided for the above based as indicated on the LV schematics
and layouts.
3) Power supplies to items of mechanical equipment shall be to the dedicated MCC
panels of the plant which shall be supplied with the respective equipment. The
supply, installation, commissioning and testing of these MCC panels shall be
under contractor’s scope of work.
4) All MCC panels as a minimum shall have:

 Short circuit and over current protection relays based on the equipment
manufacturer’s recommendation or as indicated in the drawings
 Earth Leakage Relays
 Under voltage Trip and Time Delay Relays.
 Adequate starters to limit starting and in rush currents − Provisions for BMS
interface
 Indication lamps indicating “On” and “Trip” status
 Voltmeter/ Ammeter with phase selection switch
 EPO switches for shutting down the plant in case of emergency
 Any additional requirement mentioned in the drawings

5) To avoid large in-rush currents, where the LV panel feeds large mechanical loads,
under voltage relay and a time delay contactor circuit shall be installed. On loss of
mains power, the under-voltage relays shall cause the normally closed contactor
to open and stay open until power is restored. Once power is restored, the
contactor shall then close after the preset time delay. This control mechanism
shall either be included in the MCC panel for the equipment or on the LV panel in
case the equipment is directly fed.

f) Small Power

i) General
1) This Contractor shall provide a complete system of conduit, trunking wiring for the
lighting and power final circuits comprising conduits and accessories, trunking,
PVC/LSF insulated cables (except where otherwise specified), luminaries,

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 7 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

electrical accessories, flexible cords, lamps etc. to complete the installation as

shown on the drawings. All conduits shall be concealed unless otherwise
specified.

2) This Contractor shall be deemed to have considered the positions of luminaries,

trunking, cable runs and all fittings with lamps, sockets, plugs, switches,
contactors, and all necessary accessories to complete the installation.
3) Except where otherwise specified, all power sockets shall be mounted at 300mm
above finished floor level (to the bottom) and all electrical accessories other than
metal clad accessories shall be ivory or white in colour (prior approval from
Engineers required).
4) Surface conduit wiring inside false ceiling and plant rooms shall be provided, but
this Contractor shall ascertain that the conduit run inside the false ceiling will not
conflict with other services, e.g., fan coil units, air ducts and pipes. No conduit
shall be fixed onto the framework of the false ceiling. In such a case, all the
surface conduits shall be of GI material.
5) All surface conduit not recessed in the building structure shall be of heavy-duty
hot dip galvanized steel type.
6) All wiring accessories in the front of house areas inside the buildings shall have
architectural finishes as per architectural specification or approval. Sockets in
circulation and car park areas shall also be lockable type.
7) Wiring accessories for plant room areas shall be metal clad.
8) Wiring accessories for wet areas or outdoor spaces shall be rated at IP65.
9) Wiring accessories for back of house areas shall be white plastic finish equivalent
to MK logic plus (UK).
10) The contractor shall submit samples and material submittals for the accessories
for consultant and architectural approval prior to installation.
11) General power shall be provided utilizing 13A switched socket outlets (BS1363).
12) All external sockets shall be weatherproof IP65 with an integral 30mA RCD
protection device.
13) 13A fused connection units shall be provided for hand driers, indoor AC units,
interface units and all other items of fixed equipment as indicated on design
drawings. All fused connection units shall be double pole type.
14) DP and TPN+E Isolators shall be provided for final equipment as indicated on the
design drawings.
15) Mounting height and final location of outlets in apartments shall be fully
coordinated with the furniture plan prior to installation.
16) IP 65 isolators with die cast aluminium body shall be provided for all plant
equipment on the roof including but not limited to Pumps, CU’s, AHUs, extract
fans, etc.
17) Socket outlets in wet areas and general outdoor areas will be rated at IP65.
18) Isolators for essential life safety systems shall be fire rated.
19) For installation on roof and other plant areas adequate Unistrut arrangement shall
be provided for isolator and cable mounting.

g) Lighting

i) General
1) The luminaries installed above false ceilings shall be suspended down from the
structural ceiling slab by means of metal strips or galvanized conduits.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 8 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

2) For pendant-mounted luminaries in areas with no false ceiling, the bottom of the
luminaries shall be level with the lowest part of the air duct or pipe work in the
area, or as indicated on the drawings.
3) Lighting installation shall be provided via plug in type ceiling roses with heat
resistant cables. The use of plastic or chocolate blocks will not be permitted.
4) In external and plantroom areas the final connections to luminaries shall be via
rigid, flexible conduit. All luminaries shall be modified, if not already catered for, to
accept conduit termination, without compromising the other requirements as
specified herein.
5) Final locations of all light fittings shall be taken from the Architect’s coordinated
drawings.
6) All the light fitting shall have energy efficient LED source. Material approval is
mandatory prior to use/procure.
7) Light switch finishing shall be as per architectural specifications.
8) External light switches and plant room light switches shall be IP65 weatherproof
type.
9) Light fittings to be used for the project shall be as proposed in the specifications
and drawings. Alternative proposals shall be subject to Engineer’s and Architect’s
approval.
10) If an alternate layout is proposed the contractor shall issue revised coordinated
drawings and lighting calculations for engineer’s approval.
11) The light fitting type i.e., recessed/linear/suspended/recessed shall be as per the
design drawings. Contractor to notify Engineers for any site suitability/conflicts.
12) Lamp types and size shall be generally followed. Alternate lamp types shall only
be accepted if they are proven to perform better than the proposed ones.

h) Lighting Control System

i) The Lighting control system shall cover the control requirements for lighting circuits
based on applications such as manual override switches, presence & movement
detection, central timers, and photocell. Dimmable lighting circuits shall be controlled
via appropriate actuators/gateways.

i) Emergency and Exit Lighting

i) General
1) Emergency lighting shall be provided utilizing addressable central monitoring
system with non-maintained and maintained type LED luminaires complete with 3-
hour backup system.
2) Emergency lighting wiring shall be done utilizing fire rated cables.
3) The emergency lighting circuiting and zoning layout shall be done to ensure that
power loss of the relevant normal lighting power circuit of the corresponding area
automatically switches the lights on.
4) Emergency luminaires to be used for various areas shall be LED.
5) The emergency lighting system design shall be done in compliance with Dubai
Civil Defence Regulations, NFPA 101 and ensure an average lux level of 10.8
during emergency operation with a minimum lux level 1 on the ground level.
6) Proposed emergency lighting system consists of a central monitoring system
which then supplies multiple maintained and non-maintained circuits via fire rated
cables.
7) All emergency lighting and its accessories shall be from one single manufacturer
approved by DCD.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 9 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

j) Central Monitoring System (Addressable Emergency Lighting)

i) General
1) Contractor shall design, supply, install, test & commission complete system
including containment such as monitoring panel, conduits, trunking, junction
boxes, control wires, required for the complete central monitoring emergency
lighting system as per the drawing and as required by Client. Contractor shall
submit shop drawing to consultant/ Client/authority and approval to be obtained
prior to commencement of work at site.

k) Earthing

i) General
1) The contractor shall provide complete earthing systems including bonding of all
exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive parts of the complete
building services installation, supplementary bonding of metal work in the building
and main equipotential bonding of the incoming services at the entry point, metal
fencing, all as described herein and as shown on the drawings.
2) The building main earthing will be provided via giving an earth bus bar in the
electrical room which shall than be wired to a minimum of 3 earth electrodes in the
car park area. The LV panels shall than be wired to the earth bar via at least 2
Nos. earth cables of 150mm 2 PVC.
3) Earth bars shall also be provided in the electrical room on each floor for
equipotential bonding on each floor.
4) The bonding network shall also be extended to all the mechanical plant on the
roof of buildings.
5) Earth pits shall be provided for LV panel and the SMDBs.
6) Separate earth pits shall also be provided for transformer neutral earthing and
shall have an impedance of less than 1 ohm.
7) Type 2 Surge protection devices shall be provided on all the LV panels, SMDBs,
UPS and IT panels / racks.

l) Containment

i) General

1) All cabling installed within the development shall be installed on a proprietary

cable management system. No cable shall be installed visible within public areas.
2) All cables under the road or areas where maintenance access to cables cause
severe disruption shall be laid in PVC sleeves encased with concrete.
3) Appropriate cable markers shall be installed in all areas to indicate buried cable
underneath.
4) All holes and openings made in the structure and through fire rates walls for
containment systems shall be effectively sealed utilizing fire resistant materials.
5) Cables shall be fixed to tray and ladders by cleats on all vertical runs and by
cleats or cable ties on horizontal runs.
Vertical trays and ladders with cable cleats shall be provided for cable runs on
vertical runs.
6) All cable trays exposed to outside e.g., roof shall be covered with a cover to
protect cables from direct sunlight.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 10 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

7) Cable ladder and tray loading calculations and details of support systems shall be
submitted for engineer’s approval prior to installation. The support systems shall
be galvanized steel channels and as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

m) Power

i) General

1) In general power cables laid in the outdoor area shall be buried in sleeves.
2) All buried cables shall be protected with concrete tablets and a detectable cable
marking tape.
3) Sub main cable distribution in the buildings and plant room areas shall be via
heavy duty galvanized steel cable ladders and perforated trays. Spacing on cable
tray shall be such to achieve 2 cable diameters wherever possible and a minimum
of one diameter with the Engineer’s permission.
4) Cable containment on the roof shall ventilated and provided with a sun cover.
5) Galvanized steel trunking / PVC shall be provided for local distribution of power to
sockets and light fittings.
6) All conduits recessed in walls for power outlets shall be PVC type.
7) All external and exposed conduits e.g., in ceiling voids shall be galvanized steel.

n) IT, Telecommunications

i) General

1) The Contractor shall provide for the design, approval, supply, delivery, installation,
testing, commissioning, and rectification of any defects associated with the
complete Telephone/Data communications system including TCP/IP Ethernet
Backbone Network. The Contractor shall also confirm that the installation is fit for
purpose.
2) The contractor will be responsible for providing the entire structured cabling
system and the associated connection to the main optical network unit, fibre optic
cable. Patch panels, network cabinets and containment. Cabling shall be CAT6A.
3) Employ specialist to design the complete Telephone/Data system to client
requirement as well as complying with relevant standards & local authority
regulations including WiFi system (with Heat-map) full coverage is obligatory.
4) Prior to placing order for any equipment, the Contractor shall submit
comprehensive document comprising working drawings, catalogues and
descriptive literature of components, maintenance manuals etc for Engineer’s
study and approval.
5) The Contractor shall be responsible for all submittals of complete design
information to Local Telecom Authority and for obtaining all necessary approval
certificates prior to the commencement of the installation and upon completion.
6) The Contractor shall be required to train and instruct employer's personnel in the
correct use, operation, and supervision of the system, preferably prior to the
handing over of the project.
7) All the equipment included in this system shall be covered by manufacturer’s
warranty for minimum five years.
8) The Contractor shall provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for two
years continuous operation of the system.
9) The complete facilities for Telephone/Data communications system including
TCP/IP Ethernet Backbone Network design shall comply to BS Standards and as
per Manufacturer standards.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 11 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

10) The outline design shown on the drawings shall be developed by the specialist
into a fully detailed design. The Contractor shall also comply to the standard
specification section for structured cabling system.
11) The Contractor shall ensure that the system is interfaced with other building
services as detailed in specifications, drawings, and applicable international
standard
12) Telephone, data, Wi-Fi outlets shall be provided as indicated on the design
drawings.
13) The contractor shall be responsible for the installation of base boxes, conduits,
trunking and cable baskets for the ELV system, including voice, data, CCTV and
Service provider cabling to ONUs.
14) For the site wide distribution for IT, Telecommunications shall be extended from
the main entry boxes to the telecoms room
15) PVC ducts shall also be installed for site wide distribution of ELV systems.
16) PVC ducts shall be installed at a minimum height of 600mm below ground level
for IT, telecommunication & ELV systems cables.
17) Cable duct shall also be provided for Etisalat cable to the main telecom room
(existing).
18) Contractor to submit material submittal for approval prior to procure for both active
and Passive component, devices and equipment.

o) Metering

i) General

1) This Contractor shall provide meter boards, meter tails, conduit, trunking, metering
cables, current transformers chambers etc. as shown on the drawings to cater for
the installation of DEWA metering equipment and the energy sub metering.
2) The contractor shall make provisions for installing the main incoming bulk meter.
All the tariff meters shall be as per DEWA specifications and requirements and
supplied complete with the enclosures.
3) Additional meters shall be installed as indicated on the design drawings for client’s
energy monitoring. Contractor to consider the connections to the solar harvesting
PV system’s panels and metering (future).
4) Each switchboard and control panel shall be provided with all the necessary
sensors, transducers, current transformers, and any other accessories require for
remote monitoring and operation by the local BMS network.
5) The contractor shall ensure that the adequate interface units are provided on the
BMS to connect to enable it to connect to different protocols of the various
components.
6) Adequate space and accessibility shall be provided for the installation of the
above equipment including wiring and terminals sufficient in number and adequate
capacity for field wiring.
7) The following quantities, status and alarms shall be incorporated in the BMS.

LV- Generator PFC

Panels
kW, kVA, PF X X X
MD kW, kVA X X
kWh X X
Hz X X

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 12 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

3 Phase and X X
single-phase
voltage
Harmonic Currents X

Alarms
Tripped/On/Off X X X
Generator Running X

Low Fuel Level X

High coolant X
temperature
Low oil X
pressure
Common X X X
failure alarm
Main supply X X
on/off

8) The above table should not be considered exclusive. Refer to BMS specification
and points schedule for further information on BMS.

p) Integrated Fire Alarm & Voice Evacuation Life Safety System

i) General

1) Contractor shall design, supply, install, connect, test & commission complete
system including containment such as conduits, trunking, junction boxes, pull
wires required for the complete System as per the drawing and as required by
consultant / client / civil defense. Specialist contractor(s) shall submit shop
drawing to consultant/ Client/ authority and approval to be obtained prior to
commencement of work at site.
2) The entire wiring shall be carried out in flexible fire-resistant cables of minimum
cross- sectional area 1.5 mm2 for initiating devices and minimum cross- sectional
area 2.5 mm2 (multi-stranded) for indicating devices. The limit of voltage drop
under full alarm load shall not exceed 1 volt.
3) All fire alarm wiring shall be completely segregated from all other wiring in the
building.

q) Lightning Protection System

i) General

1) Contractor shall design, supply, install, test & commission complete system
including containment such as conduits, trunking, junction boxes, pull wires
required for the complete System as per the drawing and as required by
consultant / client. Contractor shall submit shop drawing to consultant/ Client and
approval to be obtained prior to commencement of work at site.
2) The lightning protection system shall comply with BS 6651 or BS EN 62305 and
IEC 62305-Protection against Lightning. Contractor shall supply and install and all
components and materials to achieve a complete system.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 13 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

r) CCTV Systems

i) General

1) The Contractor shall provide and install complete system with necessary ducts,
conduits, trunking, junction boxes, racks, switches, NVRs, PC, Monitors,
controllers, 5MP cameras, data & power cabling, pull boxes, etc., complete as
required by client / consultant / authority. Contractor to provide ANPR system as
required by authority.

s) SMATV Systems (Not applicable)

i) General

1) The Contractor shall design, supply and install a Satellite Master Antenna
Television reception on the specified channels, with an approved Design capable
of receiving and distributing all present transmissions as listed/as per client’s
requirement with sufficient allowances made to include any future transmissions,
without degradation of the system parameters.
2) The system shall comprise all necessary items required to distribute the required
signals via coaxial cables. The system shall include dishes, channel processors,
power supply system, IF inputs DiSEqC Switchers, amplifiers, couplers, taps,
distributors, cables, and outlets (facia matching with other wiring accessories) and
any other ancillary equipment required to form a complete and independently
working system to the satisfaction of the engineer.
3) All satellite channels shall be converted to a different frequency to avoid
interferences from local transmitters. Conversion to any output channel shall take
place without interference using a standardized intermediated frequency (IF).
4) The systems provided shall include only IF.

t) Access Control Systems

i) Scope of works shall include but not limited to the following:

1) Communication hub (ACS server)
2) Main access control panel
3) Multiple door controllers
4) Alarm input panels
5) Card readers
6) Door contacts
7) Exit push buttons
8) Break Glass
9) Remote Reader
10) Card Link
11) Electric door locks of the various doors
12) Proximity cards (integrated with gate barrier system).
13) Power supplies
14) All related accessories and equipment including network cabling and terminations.

ii) At the time of installation and commissioning the contractor shall provide all additional
components required to eliminate any noise and signal attenuation problems found at
site.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 14 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

iii) System shall be interfaced with the fire alarm system of the building to operate the
door locks automatically in case of fire as per Civil Defense rules.
iv) System shall support full backward compatibility such that future expansion and
upgradation is possible without replacing any of the existing components and making
major changes to the existing system.

u) Audio Intercom Systems (Not applicable)

i) General

1) Main doors providing access to the Residential Tower shall be monitored using
recessed magnetic contacts and shall be monitored by video door entry system.
2) Door locks shall be of failsafe mode to unlock the door in the event of power
failure.
3) Location of, electric latches and external video entrance panels, internal panels
and handsets are to be installed in the locations identified in the layout drawing in
coordination with door hardware supplier.

ii) Door Entry System to Residential building (Not applicable)

1) Audio entrance panel and porter switchboard shall be installed as shown in the
pedestrian entry gates/main lift lobby as per schematic diagram and layout
drawings to facilitate communication between these units and main panel in the
selected areas as shown on drawings.
2) The system shall operate when visitor is called from the entrance and shall be
received on the either of the units inside the apartment / flat with an alarm or ring.
3) Where required a porter switchboard shall be installed in security front desk,
which shall be used for three-way communication between main entrance security
desk and Apartment/ Flat.
4) System shall have an entrance stations as shown in relevant drawings. The main
entrance panels have audio and video capturing (camera) facility.
5) The contractor shall allow for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
an audio entry system complete with, audio entrance panel, door contacts power
supply units, etc.

v) Automatic Gate barrier Systems

i) The contractor shall supply, install and commission an automatic gate barrier for
heavy duty operation as indicated hereunder:

1) Gate barrier: Main entrance and exit.

ii) The motor shall have built-in overload protection and shall be encased in a non-
corrosive welded and bent housing forming a self-supporting chassis, comprising
access door. The motor shall be provided with unlocking device to allow opening the
barrier arm manually in case of power failure.
iii) The same user proximity cards shall be utilized for both gate barriers and access
control system (compatible with existing premises’ access control system).

w) Vertical Transportation (Not applicable)

i) The elevator shall be DESIGNED, supplied, and installed by an approved

manufacturer to consultant approval.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 15 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

ii) The work will be carried out concurrently with the work of the Building Contract and
the Main Contractor will be required to carry out certain work in connection with the
Specialist Sub-contractor.

x) Green Building requirements

i) LED light sources shall be considered for all the common area lighting.
ii) All the light fittings shall have high frequency electronic ballasts.
iii) All the outdoor/external light fittings shall be controlled by timer / photocell with
manual over-ride switches.
iv) Corridors, lobbies and any other common areas shall have motion sensors to control
lighting.
v) Lighting power density shall confirm local authority’s green building regulations.
vi) Interlock between toilet extract fans and light fittings shall be considered for common
toilets and restrooms.
vii) Sub-metering shall be provided for the machine load ≥ 100 kW.

y) Provision of Documentation and Miscellaneous Items

i) This Contractor shall provide Operating and Maintenance Manuals, Spares and Tools,
Submission of Working Drawings and As-built Drawings, Training and Instructing the
Employer’s Staff, Defects Liability Period (DLP), and Free Maintenance.

B4 SCOPE OF WORKS

a) This specification outlines the extent of works required for the electrical installation and shall
be read in conjunction with all other related documents and in particular the tender drawings.
The scope of works given hereunder must not be considered as complete description of
works.
b) The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of the whole of the materials and labour
necessary to form a complete electrical installation as described in this Specification and the
relevant drawings. This contract shall include not only the major items for equipment shown
or specified but also all the incident sundry components necessary for the complete
execution of the works and for the operation of the installation, including necessary labour,
whether these sundry components are mentioned in detail in the drawings and specification.
c) The Contractor shall perform the works in accordance with those codes, ordinances, rules,
regulations, orders and other legal requirements of government bodies and public agencies,
which bear on performance of the works.
d) The Contractor shall execute the works as specified and in accordance with the program.
e) The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all works in accordance with local
authority regulations, obtaining the necessary authority permits and final approvals.
f) The works to be carried out under this contract comprises the furnishing of all labour,
materials, equipment and services for the supply and installation of the following system
and works: -

i) Mains power supply system.

ii) Mains and sub-mains power distribution system.
iii) Lighting and small power final circuits.
iv) Power supply for MVAC Installation.
v) Power supply for Fire Services Installation.
vi) Power supply for ELV systems and equipment.
vii) Earthing system.
viii) Containment system for LV and ELV systems.
ix) All necessary night and out of hours works, as required.
x) Supply of tools and spares.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 16 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

xi) Submission of materials and equipment, working drawings and Record Drawings.
xii) Training and instructing the Employer’s staff.
xiii) Provision of O&M Manuals.
xiv) Provision of 12 months of DLP.
xv) Provision of Maintenance during the DLP.
xvi) Authorities’ submission including applications for utility connections, coordination with
existing site services and obtaining necessary approvals. xvii) Coordinate with the
builder and other services contractors for interfacing works, space requirement,
equipment arrangement, testing &commissioning, timing of installation among
different services.

g) Co-ordination with other contractors:

i) This contractor shall co-ordinate with the other contractors to avoid any conflicts in
equipment layout arrangement and timing of installation among different services.
Any abortive works and cost implication due to lack of coordination shall be borne by
this Contractor.
ii) This Contractor shall co-ordinate with the builder for size and location of all slab and
wall openings.

h) Co-ordination with local authorities:

i) This Contractor shall co-ordinate with local authorities to obtain the power supply for
this project.
ii) This Contractor shall prepare and submit any drawings and forms required to obtain
the power supply.
iii) This Contractor shall co-ordinate with the utility services to verify existing services on
site and obtaining any permits required.
iv) This Contractor shall co-ordinate with the utility services to obtain the required no
objection certificates, approval of drawings and arranging site inspections etc.

i) The Contractor shall be responsible to carry out application of electricity tariff meter to the
power company for the project.

j) This is the Contractor’s responsibility to carry out and certify the installation by a Registered
Electrical Worker. Upon completion of electrical work, Work Completion Certification shall
be issued to the Employer and copies shall be forwarded to the Engineer for record.

k) The Contractor is to submit a commissioning procedure to the consultant for prior approval.
This shall also include a detailed commissioning program.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 17 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

B5 ABBREVIATIONS

a) For this Technical Specification, the abbreviations shall be as follows: -

AC - Alternating Current
A/C - Air-conditioning
ACB - Air Circuit Breaker
ACMV - Air-conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation
AHU - Air Handling Unit
AM - Amplitude Modulation
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASTA - Association of Short-circuit Testing Authorities
ATS - Automatic Transfer Switch
BASEC - British Approvals Service for Electric Cables
BASEEFA - British Approvals Service for Electrical Equipment for use in
Flammable Atmospheres
BS - British Standard
BSCP - British Standard Code of Practice
CCTV - Closed Circuit Television
CIBSE - Chartered Institution of Building Service Engineers (UK)
CIE - International Commission of Illumination
CPU - Central Processing Unit
CSD - Combined Service Drawing
CT - Current Transformer
DC - Direct Current
DLP - Defects Liability Period
DOL - Direct-on-Line
E&M - Electrical and Mechanical
EPD - Environmental Protection Department (Local)
FAT - Factory Acceptance Test
FBA - Factory-Built Assemblies
FCU - Fan Coil Unit
FM - Frequency Modulation
FSD - Fire Services Department (Local)
HRC - High Rupturing Capacity
HV - High Voltage
HVAC - Heating/ Ventilation and Air Conditioning
IDMT - Inverse Definite Minimum Time
IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission (Geneva/ Switzerland)
IEE - Institution of Electrical Engineers (UK)
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (USA)
IP - Index of Protection
LMCP - Local Motor Control Panel
LSHF - Low Smoke/Halogen Free
LV - Low Voltage
MCB - Miniature Circuit Breaker
MCC - Motor Control Centre
MCCB - Moulded Case Circuit Breaker

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 18 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

MDF - Main Distribution Frame

MF - Medium Frequency
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (USA)
O&M - Operating and Maintenance
PAU - Primary Air Unit
PDU - Power Distribution Unit
PVC - Polyvinyl Chloride
RAM - Random Access Memory
ROM - Read-only Memory
SAT - Site Acceptance Test
SCPD - Short-circuit Protective Device
SWA - Steel Wire Armoured
TBE - Telecommunication and Broadcasting Equipment
THD - Total Harmonic Distortion
UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply
VHF - Very High Frequency
XLPE - Cross Linked Polyethylene

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 19 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C1 MAIN AND SUB-MAIN DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT

1 General Requirement
(a) The electrical system shall be 3 phase 4 wire, 400/220V, 50Hz. The main low voltage
switchboard package shall be designed and constructed to withstand the mechanical
and thermal stresses associated with a fault level of 50kA for 3 seconds (as a
minimum).

(b) All outgoing ways shall be Moulded Case Circuit Breakers or Air Circuit Breakers
having an extended range of current setting unless otherwise specified.

(c) All breakers shall be provided with auxiliary features.

(d) All incoming breakers to the LV distribution panel will be Air Circuit Breakers for rating
larger than 1000A three-phrase, as shown on drawings.

(e) All ACBs will be motorized unless otherwise specified.

(f) The bus coupler ACB will be manual operation only unless otherwise specified.

(g) The incoming mains breaker, generator breaker and bus coupler (where applicable)
shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked with a key exchange system
provided for manual changeover.

(h) Main LV switchgear shall be designed to withstand short circuit currents of 50KA for 3
seconds and all equipment used within the main distribution system shall be sized to
withstand this criterion.

2 Switchboard Construction
(a) L.V. switchboards shall be of floor-standing, totally enclosed type, built up from
enclosed units housing the air circuit breakers, and moulded case circuit breakers,
relays, contactors, bus bar and other items of ancillary equipment as shown on the
drawings or as detailed herein.

(b) The L.V. switchboards shall be suitable for indoor service on a 3 phase, 4 wire,
400/220V, 50Hz. The rated short time withstand current shall not be less than 50kA
for 1 second for circuits of 1600A and above, and 40kA for 1 second for circuits below
1600A.

(c) All switchboards and associated equipment (switchgear, busbar assemblies, etc.)
shall be certified for the category of duty specified.

(d) The L.V. switchboards shall comply with IEC 60439 and IEC 60364 with type test
certificates issued by an independent and approved test authority (ASTA or KEMA). In
case of local assembly, provided accepted by client/consultant the authorized
approved assembler shall strictly follow the guidelines and standards laid down by
manufacturer and the type test certificates which is issued.

(e) The test certificates for the following tests shall be submitted as a minimum:
i) Verification of temperature rise limit.
ii) Verification of short circuit strength.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 20 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

iii) Verification of the effectiveness of the protective circuit.

(f) The switchboards shall be constructed to Form 4 type 6. Main busbars and all
sectional busbars fed directly from these main busbars shall be enclosed and
segregated from the remainder of the switchboard by partitions. Vertical partitions
shall also be provided to segregate components within one panel from those in the
adjacent panels. General maintenance, fault finding, changing devices can be carried
out live.

(g) The sheet metal utilised for constructing the switchboards shall be specially selected,
dead flat mild steel not less than 2mm thick. The panels shall be built up on
substantial framing with all necessary stiffeners and supports with no cross struts. The
entire panel shall be vermin proof.

(h) The degree of protection of enclosures shall be to IP41 for indoor use and IP54 for
outdoor use to EN60529 and IEC529 and effectively gasketed, which is subject to
Engineer’s approval.

(i) Front access doors shall be provided, and the panels shall be provided with hinges
and lockable handles to facilitate inspection and maintenance. Non-magnetic
removable gland plates shall be provided at the top and at the bottom of the
switchboards with suitable knock outs or blanked off opening provided for incoming
and outgoing circuits cables.

(j) All doors shall have concealed hinges and where necessary, shall be interlocked with
the switch mechanism. All doors shall be provided with dust excluding gasket of
neoprene or other equal and approved material.

(k) All the doors and panels shall be fixed by non-ferrous captive screws.

(l) Screened ventilating louvres of approved type shall be provided on the sides and rear
panels to comply with IP 31.

(m) All switchboards shall be finished in the manufacturer’s standard colour, except the
essential sections which shall be finished in red.

(n) The L.V. switchboards shall be supplied with an integral channel iron plinth of not less
than 75mm in height. It shall be of substantial strength and shall be painted in black.

(o) Panel construction shall be such that component manufacturer’s clearances are
observed, and adequate ventilation shall be provided for heat dissipation.

(p) The switchboards shall be of uniform height and uniform depth throughout their entire
length.

(q) Cable trays shall be installed at the sides of the cable compartment in the L.V.
switchboards to facilitate the fixing of the incoming and outgoing cables.

(r) On each main L.V. switchboard separate compartments shall be provided for each of
the following:
i) Incoming circuit breaker.
ii) Incoming and outgoing conductors and connections of the incoming circuit
breaker.
iii) Each outgoing functional unit.
iv) Outgoing conductors and connections.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 21 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

v) Protection relays and terminal blocks.

vi) Supply company current transformer chambers.

(s) The compartments for the Supply Company’s current transformers shall also
accommodate, where necessary, the Supply Company’s meters and be complete with
hinged, glazed, doors suitable for the meter rating and support for mounting.

(t) The metering equipment shall be supplied and fixed by the Supply Company on site.
The switchboards shall be fitted with fuses for the meter voltage coil, removable links
for mounting current transformers, and the associated wiring to the meter. With
provision for sealing to prevent unauthorized access.

(u) Copper busbars and connection joints shall be tinned.

(v) Full size neutral bars shall be provided.

(w) The main busbars of the cubicle switchboards shall be run in a horizontal chamber
over the full length of the switchboard (or the section of) with bolted links at the end for
easy future extension, where necessary.

(x) Removable bolted links shall be provided for the accommodation of current
transformers for metering and protection facilities without affecting the mechanical and
electrical properties of the busbars as a whole.

(y) Before manufacturing commences the contractor shall submit layout drawings, circuit
diagrams and wiring diagrams to the Engineer for approval.

(z) These drawings and diagrams shall indicate clearly:

i) All equipment incorporated in the switchboards.

ii) Fuse, circuit-breaker and switch ratings.
iii) Current transformer ratios, class, terminal markings and outputs.
iv) Instruments, including scale details and accuracy class.
v) Relay types and characteristics.
vi) Colour of indicating lamps.
vii) Position of switches and details of function.
viii)Internal connections of all apparatus with all terminal markings.
ix) All equipment on circuit diagrams in the open or de-energized position
x) Primary and/or secondary plug contacts.
xi) Wire ferrule numbers.
xii) Size, type and colours of secondary wiring.
xiii)The main physical dimensions, drawing attention to any necessary clearances
required for removing covers, opening door, operating handles, withdrawing
equipment, busbars or trunking and gaining admission for maintenance.
xiv) Position of all equipment on panel faces indicating whether flush or projecting and,
if projecting, the greatest projection.
xv) Identification of all equipment with type numbers and the appropriate engraved
labels describing function and coding.
xvi) Foundation details including total weights, recommended points of support and
additional strength of foundations to withstand any dynamic forces due to
switchgear operation under service and fault conditions.
xvii) Cable entry details, including gland and gland plate provisions.
xviii) The gland plates and supporting steel work shall be of sufficient strength that
deflection of the gland plates when cables are installed shall be not greater than
10mm.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 22 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

3 Switchgear

(a) Switchgear shall include:

i) Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
ii) Fuse Switches
iii) Switch Fuses
iv) Switches
v) Changeover Switches
vi) Automatic Transfer Switches

(b) The switchgear shall be Triple Pole with Neutral (TP&N), Single Pole with Neutral
(SPN), Double Pole (DP) or Four Pole (Switched Neutral). For DP and TP&N, the
neutral pole shall make first and break last, and shall only be used when specified.
Switchgear shall be of surface mounting or flush mounting type suitable for
switchboard installation as specified.

(c) All switchgear shall have ratings as specified and carry continuously, make and break
the rated current without overheating or damages.

(d) The Main LV Switchboard shall be IP 54, Form 4 Type 6 free standing, and breakers
shall be plugin type, self-supporting cubicles and shall be suitable for bottom entry of
main incoming supply cables and bottom entry for outgoing cables.

(e) Switchgear shall be dust and vermin-proof. For outdoor applications the switchgear
shall be in lockable weather-proof enclosures complete with 3 sets of keys.

(f) All switchgear shall be constructed to prevent tampering with the protection device,
altering trip setting or time delay setting. Switchgear shall be provided with mechanical
interlocking devices by means of rotary handle on extended shafts so as to prevent
the closing of switchgear when the door is opened and the opening of the door when
switchgear is ‘ON’. All switchgear shall have the provision to be externally lockable in
the “OFF” position.

(g) All switchgear shall have a quick-make and break action suitable for both AC and DC
applications. Switchgear shall be completed with removable phase barriers, contact
shrouds, and arc quenching devices. All switchgear shall be equipped a with spring
accelerating mechanism to ensure positive ‘ON’ ‘OFF’ and ‘TRIP’. This mechanism
shall be permanently installed. The front operating handles of switchgear (except
circuit breakers) shall be chrome plated, extendible and shall not protrude more than
75mm from the cover.

(h) Surface-mounted metal clad switchgear shall have a casing constructed of at least
2mm heavy gauge sheet metal. The door shall have lipped edges and neoprene
gaskets and be complete with hinge, chrome plated handle, and ball type catches.
Screws shall be captive type. Loose screws will not be permitted. The switch casing
shall be hot-dipped galvanized (at least 2 layers) and cleaned, degreased, prime
coated for anti- corrosion before painting.

(i) Earth terminals shall be provided for all metal clad switchgear. All hinged or
removable doors shall be earthed by flexible earth tape to the earth terminal.

(j) Parallel operation of switchgear as a single unit is not permitted.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 23 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

4 Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)

(a) The incomer air circuit breakers shall conform to BS EN 60947-2, IEC 947.2. The
short circuit breaking capacity specified for all circuit breakers (ACBs/MCCBs) shall
correspond to the breaking performance during operation, Ics.

(b) Each ACB shall have a nominal voltage rating of 400V, and a minimum short time
rated current of 50kA for 1 second with appropriate s.c making, and breaking currents
calculated in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 60947.

(c) Minimum short circuit rating shall be 50 kA (Ics) for one second and a certificate from
a recognized testing authority shall be made available to prove performance of the
ACB in its enclosed cubicle form or in an appropriate cassette designed to maintain
full environmental control.

(d) All ACBs shall be of withdrawable type manually or manually and electrically operated,
as shown on the Drawings, with two-step, spring charged, stored energy mechanism,
quick-make, quick-break type, electrically and mechanically trip-free, to prevent
maintaining circuit breaker closed against over-current condition whether under
manual or automatic operation. Electrically operated circuit breakers shall have
integrally mounted, spring charging motor mechanism automatically recharged upon
closing. Both manually or manually and electrically operated circuit breakers shall
have mechanical built-in charging lever and shall include open and close direct acting
push buttons. Stored energy provision shall allow open/close/open sequence of
operation without use of external energy.

(e) All ACBs shall incorporate a microprocessor-based sensing, protection/information

unit. All necessary modules/accessories required for the above shall be included in
the LV Switchgear proposed.

(f) Circuit breakers shall be of the triple pole and neutral pattern or four poles as
indicated on the drawings. They shall be of the horizontal draw-out, tropicalized, air
brake type complying with BS EN 60947-2 and other specified requirements.

(g) Minimum short circuit rating shall be 50 kA (Ics) for one second and a certificate from
a recognized testing authority certificate shall be made available to prove performance
of the ACB in its enclosed cubicle form or in an appropriate cassette designed to
maintain full environmental control. Including latest amendments of IEC / EN / BSEN
60947-2. And tripping power shall be derived from main power circuit, with sufficient
tripping energy to reliably trip the circuit breaker.

(h) The fixed portion of each circuit shall be equipped with indication, protection
equipment, closing contactor and fuses for closing and trip supplies as specified
herein.

(i) ACB shall have the following as minimum:

i) ON/OFF pushbuttons and ON/OFF mechanical indications
ii) Spring charged/discharged indications
iii) Position indicators for connected, test, disconnected positions
iv) Trip indication with resettable pop-out indicator and overcurrent trip switch
v) Padlocking provision for ON/OFF pushbuttons

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 24 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(j) All incoming circuit breakers on main switchboard shall be so located to ensure a
minimum distance of 900 mm from the finished floor level to the bottom of the cable
entry.

(k) Closing mechanisms shall be of the trip free type and shall be hand charged spring
operated.

(l) Each operating mechanism shall be provided with a shunt trip device and means for
local manual tripping by a lockable push button.

(m) For maintenance purposes, means shall be provided for the slow closing of all circuit
breakers. This facility must not be operable in the 'service' position.

(n) The energy stored in a charged-spring mechanism shall be sufficient to ensure that: -
vi) If the circuit breaker is open and spring-charged, the circuit breaker can be closed
and then tripped.
vii) If the circuit breaker is closed and the springs charged there shall be sufficient
energy to trip, close and then trip the circuit breaker.

(o) Tripping and closing circuits shall be independent of each other and independent of all
other circuits.

(p) Tripping and closing circuits shall be provided with a fuse in each pole.

(q) Circuit breakers, when in the service and isolated/test position, shall be earthed via
adequately designed contacts. The earthing connection shall be made before the
primary connections are established.

(r) Provision should be made for earthing the cable or busbars. The method of earthing
shall be applied through the circuit breaker.

(s) Visible mechanical indication shall be provided to show whether the circuit-breaker
is: -
i) OPEN or CLOSED or TRIPPED.
ii) In the SERVICE or ISOLATED/TEST position.
iii) In the case of spring-operated mechanisms, indication shall be provided to show
whether the springs are CHARGED or FREE

(t) The main circuit contacts shall be covered by pad lockable type automatic safety
shutters when the ACB is drawn out.

(u) Neutral pole shall be fully rated and of early make/late break design.

(v) Interlocks shall be provided to prevent the ACB being racked out unless the breaker is
in OFF position and also to prevent the breaker being racked into the service position
unless the breaker is in OFF position.

(w) Mechanical interlock shall be provided wherever there is a provision for generator
supply or parallel transformers with/without bus coupler ACB. Mechanical interlocks
shall be key type or cable type based on the agreed logic of operation.

(x) Electrical interlocks shall also function in addition to mechanical interlock so as to

prevent closing of the circuit breaker before the inter-locking demands are fulfilled.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 25 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(y) Service life of the breaker should be equal to or more than 10,000 mechanical
operations.

(z) To enable function tests to be carried out provision shall be made for temporarily
completing the secondary circuits with the circuit breaker in the isolated/test position.

(aa) Facilities shall also be provided to enable primary and secondary injection tests to be
performed without having to remove wires

5 Moulded Case circuit Breakers (MCCB)

(a) MCCBs shall be four-pole, triple pole or double pole, Quick-make, quick-break type,
with positive trip-free operation so that contacts cannot be held closed against
overcurrent under manual or automatic operation. They shall be totally enclosed in a
moulded casing formed from an insulating material. The construction of the casing
shall be capable of withstanding the appropriate rated short circuit current and
reasonably rough use without fracture or distortion. The moulded casing shall have
protection of not less than IP31.

(b) All Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) serving as incomers and protecting
outgoing feeder circuits shall be designed and constructed to have ultimate short
circuit breaking capacity (Icu) of not less than 50 KA at MDB level, 25KA at SMDB &
MCC level at 415V, 50Hz operational voltage and shall conform to the requirements,
including latest amendments, of IEC / EN /BSEN 60947-2

(c) All MCCBs shall be suitable for continuous operation at full load at an ambient
temperature of 50° C and shall have distinct ON, OFF, TRIP positions. Tripped
indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between ON
and OFF.

(d) All MCCBs of rating above 400A shall have electronic protection releases/trip unit.
MCCBs of rating up to 250A shall be with thermo-magnetic release.

(e) All circuit breakers shall be 3-pole unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

(f) All thermo-magnetic MCCBs shall have nominal current rating declared at an ambient
temperature of 50° C. MCCB data sheet shall be submitted in proof of the same.

(g) MCCB shall have a "push to trip" button in front to test the opening of the breaker.

(h) Rated insulation voltage (Ui) shall be not less than 690V, rated impulse withstand
voltage (Uimp) not less than 6kV and rated operational voltage (Ue) not less than
415V

(i) MCCBs shall have a thermal-magnetic tripping mechanism giving a fixed, stable,
inverse time-current characteristic. The operating characteristic shall be such that:

i) The time delay on overload tripping shall be inversely proportional to the

overcurrents up to a threshold value of approximately 7 times the rated current.
ii) There shall be no intentional time-delay on overcurrent tripping due to shortcircuit
or heavy overcurrents exceeding the threshold value.

(j) MCCBs shall have the following performance

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 26 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

i) Rated short circuit breaking capacity - not less than 46kA for use in switchboards
and 25kA for lateral sub-main installation or the prospective fault current at the
point of installation whichever is greater.
ii) MCCB short circuit performance shall be category P-1.

(k) Shunt Trip Release shall operate correctly at all values of supply voltage between
70% and 120% of the nominal supply voltage under all operating conditions of the
MCCB. MCCBs incorporating a shunt release shall be provided with block terminals
and shunt release lead cables.

(l) Endurance of the MCCB should be equal to or more than 10,000 operations.

(m) MCCBs shall allow addition of electrical motor operator, control and interlocking
accessories, under-voltage release, shunt-trip coils, alarm and auxiliary switches,
padlocking devices, key-locking devices, rotary handles etc.

6 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)

(a) All MCB’s shall comply with BS EN60947 and BS EN60898

(b) MCBs shall be DIN rail mounting type and with minimum 6 KA short circuit breaking
capacity (Icn) as per IEC 60898-1 & 2 standards.

(c) It shall be possible to remove each MCB individually without having to disturb/remove
the busbars fitted to it. Clear contact position indication (red/green) shall be provided
at the front of the device. Terminal markings shall be printed near to the terminals for
error free wiring.

(d) MCBs shall have thermal tripping element and a magnetic tripping element, both non-
adjustable types, tested in accordance with IEC 60898 product standard. MCBs shall
be of Type-B characteristics for lighting circuits and Type-C characteristics for power
circuits. MCBs of tripping curve Type-D shall also be available for heavy starting duty
application if required.

(e) Preferred rated currents shall be 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50 & 63A and available as
1P, 2P,1P&N, 3P, 3P&N & 4-pole circuit breakers.

(f) Terminals of MCB shall be of dual function for connection of busbar or wire.

(g) The body and base of the units are to be of moulded bakelite, or similar material, and
the units are to be sealed after assembly.

(h) The load handling contacts are to be silver/tungsten. The contacts and operating
mechanism shall be designed as to give a wiping action during make and break
operations.

(i) The breaker operating mechanism is to be of the trip- free type so designed to prevent
the load handling contacts from closing on a fault.

(j) Circuit protection against overload and fault conditions is to be provided by means of a
thermal- magnetic or thermal-hydraulic device, designed to give thermal operation on
overload and magnetic/hydraulic operation under fault conditions.
(k) The tripping mechanism shall be designed to give stable time/current characteristics in
accordance with IEC 60364.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 27 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(l) MCBs with current carrying contacts of plug-in type shall not be acceptable.

(m) Cable terminals of the MCBs shall be at the top and bottom of the unit with access
from the front and shall be suitable for terminating the size of solid or stranded
conductor in accordance with Table 6 of IEC60898: 1991.

(n) Positions of the breaker operating dolly are to be clearly indicated for ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’.

(o) All stranded cable and busbar terminations shall be sweated and tinned prior to
connection to the MCB terminals.

(p) MCB shall be suitable for operation at an ambient temperature of 50°C. The life
expectancy shall be at least 4,000 mechanical operating cycles and 20000 electrical
operating cycles.

7 Residual Current Device (RCD)

(a) Residual Current Device (RCD) shall comply with IEC61008-1 and IEC61009-1.

(b) RCD shall be of double-pole or 4-pole as required with an operating residual current of
30mA and a short circuit current capacity of not less than 10kA.

(c) For MCB with integral RCD protection, RCBO comply to IEC61009-1 shall be used.

(d) The casing of the RCD shall be formed from insulating material designed to withstand
reasonably rough usage.

(e) A quick make and quick break switching mechanism irrespective of toggle switching
speed with trip free mechanism shall be provided and the switching mechanism shall
be totally enclosed with moulded Bakelite.

(f) 4-pole RCD shall be interlocked internally so that earth leakage on any one phase
shall trip all three phase of the device simultaneously.

(g) RCD shall be suitable for independent toggle operation. The automatic tripping
operation shall be of the passive type, i.e. it shall not involve the amplification of the
operating residual current and shall not rely on the supply voltage.

(h) An integral test device shall be provided on the front of the RCD to enable the
operation of the RCD to be tested. Operation of this test device shall create an out of
balance condition simulating an earth fault.

(i) RCCB shall be suitable for operation at an ambient temperature of 50°C. The life
expectancy shall be at least 4,000 operating cycles.

(j) Where indicated, SP&N RCBOs of 10kA rated breaking capacity shall be proposed
complying with the requirements of IEC 61009 standards.

8 Fused Switches, Switch fuses and Isolators

(a) All fused switchgear and, isolation switches shall be heavy duty type conforming to the
requirements of IEC 60947-3. All contacts are to be silver plated, fully shrouded and
are to have a breaking capacity of 35MVA.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 28 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(b) The fuse links for fuse-switches and switch fuses are to be high rupturing capacity,
cartridge type.

(c) Each piece of switchgear shall be supplied as a complete unit consisting of a basic
unit, an enclosure, and all fuse links. Adequate space shall be provided in the
enclosure for proper cable termination, otherwise cable termination boxes shall be
provided.

(d) The enclosures shall be of totally enclosed type, made of heavy gauge sheet metal,
adequately rust protected and finished in baked enamel to a light grey finish or the
manufacturers nearest standard colour. An earthing terminal shall be provided. The
enclosure shall be suitable for conduit, trunking and armoured cable entries and also
for connection to busbar chamber from top or bottom. Frames sizes for the range of
switchgear shall be kept to a minimum.

(e) The switchgear shall be of quick-make and quick-break type and the switching
operation shall be independent of the speed of the manual operation. An interlocking
device shall be provided such that the front cover of the switchgear cannot be opened
when it is at the ‘ON’ position.

(f) Similarly, it shall not be possible to close the switch with the door open, except that
provision shall be made for authorized persons to defeat the mechanical interlock for
test purposes and close the switch with the door in the open position.

(g) Insulation material used shall be of non-hygroscopic and non-ignitable type. The
contacts shall be self-aligning so that the contact pressure can be maintained at all
times. All live parts shall be adequately shielded from the front of the unit but easily
accessible for maintenance by using a tool.

(h) The ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ positions of all fuse switches and isolation switches shall be
clearly indicated by a mechanical flag indicator or similar device.

(i) Fuse switch and isolation switch operating handles shall be retractable into the unit
when the switch is in either the ‘ON’ or ‘OFF’ position.

(j) In triple-pole and neutral fuse switches or isolation switches bolted neutral links are to
be fitted. For single pole and neutral switch fuses and isolation switches, the neutral
conductor is to be taken through a bolted link. Breaking the neutral conductor, either
with linked or non-linked switch shall not be permitted.

(k) Where mounted externally or otherwise specified, weatherproof enclosure shall be

provided.

(l) All local isolators shall be of the types indicated in the schedules or shown on the
drawings and shall be of the 500-volt duty type.

(m) For external and roof installations isolators shall be manufactured from die cast
aluminium and powder coated.

(n) Interiors shall comprise porcelain bases fitted with non-ferrous (brass) conducting
components. Switches shall be of the quick make quick break type suitable for use on
either AC or DC Shields shall be fitted over both fixed and removable contacts.

(o) Isolators shall be suitable for padlocking in the off position.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 29 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

9 Current Transformers

(a) Current transformers shall comply with IEC standards be of the ‘straight through’ type
and shall be rated for Class B temperature rise and a primary voltage of 600V.

(b) Current transformers shall be of the epoxy resin encapsulated type and shall be
capable of providing the necessary output at the prospective fault current to operate
all the VA burdens of the connected protective devices, instruments and pilot wire loop
resistance.

(c) Current transformers with adjustable primary turns will not be accepted.

(d) For dual ratio current transformers, all ratio terminals shall be terminated at a terminal
board and be clearly marked with connections corresponding to the wiring diagrams.

(e) The secondary circuit of each set (R-Y-B-N) of current transformers shall be earthed
at one point only. Means shall be provided for these earth connections to be
disconnected at an accessible position for testing.

(f) Routine test reports shall be supplied for individual current transformers with the
actual figures provided.

(g) Current transformers provided in plastic casings and of the split core type will not be
accepted.

(h) Measuring current transformers shall be connected to test terminal blocks. The test
blocks shall be provided with easily removable links and designed to facilitate
connection of the current transformer.

(i) Current transformers shall have an accuracy not less than Class 1 for measuring and
metering and Class IP20 for protection.

(j) Current transformers shall be capable of operation, without damage, with open
circuited secondary and full load current flowing in the primary.

(k) Current transformers shall be firmly supported and installed as to permit easy access
and to be readily replaceable, if necessary, without dismantling of adjacent equipment.

(l) (p) Provision shall be made for accommodation of the supply metering equipment in
the switchboards. The contractor is responsible for liaising with the power supply
company for obtaining the space requirements. The contractor is also responsible to
ensure such provision and arrangement shall be acceptable to power company.

10 Indicating Instruments

(a) All indicating instruments shall be in accordance with BS EN 60051-1. The accuracy
class of instruments shall be to Class Index 1.5 and the total scale length shall have a
minimum value of 85mm.
(b) Instrument scales shall have a 240-degree movement marked as recommended in
BS3693 Part 1 and arranged so that the normal working indication is between 50%
and 75% of full-scale deflection.

(c) Voltmeter connections shall be protected by fuse links.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 30 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(d) Ammeters for motor circuits shall be supplied with overload scales to six times full
load current and shall have a red adjustable pointer to indicate full load current.

(e) Covers shall be made of glass designed to reduce reflections and give a clear view of
the scale and pointer. Instruments shall be flush mounted, and the case finish shall be
gloss black.

(f) Metal cases shall be connected to the switchboard earth bar by PVC insulated
conductors of 2.5 Sq.mm cross-sectional area.

11 Protection and Relays

(a) Unless otherwise specified air-circuit breakers shall be equipped with over current
devices with independent adjustment of the following: -
i) Inverse time over current as a multiple of current rating.
ii) Independent time over current as a multiple of current rating.
iii) Time setting of Inverse over current in seconds.
iv) Time setting of independent time over current in fractions of a second plus
instantaneous setting.

(b) Air-circuit breakers shall also be equipped with solid state earth fault protection with
independent adjustment of the following: -
i) Earth fault as a multiple of current setting.
ii) Time setting of trip in fraction of a second plus instantaneous setting.

(c) The earth fault relay shall be set high to prevent the breaker tripping on an outgoing
feeder fault line of the fused switches.

(d) All Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall incorporate adjustable electronic /
microprocessor-based protection units for overload and short circuit protection
whether specifically mentioned elsewhere or not.

12 Contactors

(a) Contactors shall be electromagnetically controlled, double air-break, four-pole, triple

pole, double-pole or single-pole as required. They shall comply with and be tested to
IEC 60947-4-1 1992.

(b) The rated operational voltage shall be 380 ±6% volt, 3 phase, 50Hz, or 220 ±6% volt,
single phase, 50Hz.

(c) Both the main and auxiliary contacts shall be rated for uninterrupted and intermittent
duty. The main contacts of the contactors shall be silver, or silver faced.

(d) The mechanical life of the contactors shall not be less than 10 million no load
operating cycles. The electrical life shall not be less than 0.5 million on load operating
cycles. The mechanical and electrical life of the contactors shall be valid for an
operation rate of 3600 operations per hour.
(e) Two spare sets of NC and NO contacts shall be provided in addition to the contacts
used.

13 Busbar Chambers

(a) Busbar chambers shall be constructed in compliance with IEC 6039.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 31 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(b) A busbar chamber shall contain 4 sets of fully sized, hard drawn copper busbars
electro-tinned and supported on epoxy resin or other approved insulators spaced at
600mm internal. The busbar chamber shall be totally enclosed and manufactured from
sheet steel of 2mm thick suitably rust-proofed and epoxy powder paint finished. The
front cover and end plates shall be removable and normally held in position by non-
ferreous captive metal screws.

(c) The busbar chamber shall be of metal clad, air-insulated, totally enclosed type. The
length of the busbar chamber shall be sufficient to accommodate all switchgear
connected to it without staggering one above another. Spaces shall be provided for
future installation of switchgear.

(d) Each busbar shall be coloured to indicate the phase to which it is connected.
Colouring shall comprise a band of paint in one position on the busbar, but the busbar
shall not be painted throughout its length.

(e) Items of switchgear or associated equipment shall be connected or jointed to a busbar

chamber by means of properly designed connection flanges having similar material
and finish of the busbar chamber, or by means of conduit couplers and bushes to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

(f) Interconnection cables between a busbar chamber and other items of switchgear or
associated equipment shall be copper conductors and shall be sized in accordance
with IEC60364.

(g) Busbar shall be so arranged that all conductors can be brought onto the bars without
undue bending. Connection to the busbar shall be made by means of tap- off clamps.
No drilling of busbars shall be required.

(h) Switchgear shall be coupled to the busbar chamber by means of proper galvanized
connection flanges or conduit couplers and male bushes.

(i) Conductors between the busbars and switchgears shall be copper cable with cross-
sectional area not less than that of the outgoing cable from the switchgear.

(j) The busbar chamber shall be fabricated by a reputable manufacturer and shall be fully
type tested for withstand capacity of 46kA for 3 seconds. Locally made busbar
chambers are acceptable provided a test certificate is available.

14 Power factor correction system

(a) General and System Requirement

i) This specification is for the design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning
of a power factor correction system to the site.
ii) The prime purpose of this document is to produce a technical facility of a
consistent and high installation standard.
iii) This Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design, manufacture, works
test and delivery of the equipment required to provide power factor correction to
the site.
iv) Equipment shall comply generally with IEC950 and flammability rating shall be
appropriate for installation in a non-hazardous environment. Protection against
electro-magnetic emissions to EMC Class ‘B’ is required for the entire system(s).
v) All equipment shall be new and preferably manufactured under quality control
conditions certified to ISO9000.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 32 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

vi) Equipment shall be tested prior to delivery with full functional and performance
cycle over a minimum 8 hours burn-in period. Test Certification shall be supplied
at time of delivery.
vii) The electrical equipment supplied shall conform in design, materials, and
performance with

1) IEC 60364 (all sub sections)

2) IEC 60056
3) IEC 60715
4) IEC 61000
5) IEC 60871
6) IEC 6143-1
7) BS EN 61439-1
8) BS EN 61439-2
9) BS EN 61921
10) BS EN 60831-1
11) BS EN 60831-2
12) BS EN 50160
13) BS EN 60143-3
14) BS EN 60871-4
15) BS EN 61000-2-2
16) BS EN 61000-2-4

viii) To provide an automatic system of control to allow the site’s power factor to be
centrally corrected from its base level to a level of 0.95.
ix) To provide a system that is extendable and is designed to cater for the unique
harmonic requirements of each project.

(b) System Description

i) Seismic Performance: Power factor correction equipment shall withstand the

effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
ii) The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event
iii) The equipment shall be housed in a metal enclosure with an IP 31 protection
degree. The capacitor bank shall have protection against direct contact when a
door is opened. According to the reactive power and the ambient temperature the
capacitor bank should be forced cooling.
iv) The fan shall be controlled by a thermal probe.
v) Each panel shall be fitted with an earth terminal in the form of a 10 mm diameter
threaded bolt and fitted with two nuts and washers. vi) DESIGN DATA:
1) IEC standard : 61921 & 61439
2) Protection degree : IP 31, Indoor type
3) Insulation level : 0.66 kV
4) Withstand 60Hs, 1 minute : 2.5 kV
5) Short circuit level for 1 second : 25 kA
6) Gland plated : Un-drilled
7) Incoming cable entry : Bottom

vi) The ultimate site load may be assumed to be the size of the incoming mains
supplies.
vii) The design shall not contain any free flammable liquid and all materials must be
environmentally acceptable.
viii) The system will raise the building power factor to a level of 0.95 in stages.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 33 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

ix) Stages will generally be not less than 4 no. (25%). The specific stage setting will
conform to the specific load requirements.
x) A site will generally have two incoming supplies onto a common busbar system
having a normally open bus coupler (see Low Voltage Distribution section).
Therefore, provide two identical packaged systems, each connected to either side
of the bus coupler, and each capable of providing power factor correction to the
ultimate load.
xi) Where the installation is a smaller site with a single LV supply, a single unit is to
be provided.
xii) The Contractor shall be responsible for requesting information as to the structure
of the various system loads to be installed on the site, for the design of the power
factor correction equipment.
xiii) The power factor correction equipment shall be housed in a free-standing cubicle
switched into circuit from a moulded case circuit breaker on the main LV switch
panel.
xiv) The control of the reactive relay contained in each power factor correction panel
shall be from a current transformer located within each side of the main
xv) LV switch panel on the incoming Red phase, supplied and fitted by the switch
panel manufacturer.
xvi) The voltage rating of the capacitors shall be in conformance with 380/220V, 50Hz.
xvii) The equipment cubicle shall have facilities to add series reactors at a later date.
xviii) The capacitors shall be dry type metal film capacitors and be provided with an
adequate discharge circuit. The residual voltage shall be reduced to 50V or less
within one minute after the capacitor is disconnected from the source. The
capacitor losses shall be less than 0.5 watt/kVAr. The dielectric shall be made of
plastic film (polypropylene) impregnated with a non-PCB agent. Capacitor liquid
shall be inflammable and non-toxic.
xix) HRC fuses of adequate rating shall be used to protect each step of the capacitor
bank in the circuit. The switching of the capacitor groups shall be in a rotational
sequence in a first in first out manner to enable uniform wear of the capacitor
bank.
xx) The capacitors shall be installed and secured on rigid steel support. Capacitor
casings shall be earthed.
xxi) The contractor shall be responsible for applying to the power company for all the
necessary testing and acceptance of the capacitor installation on completion.
xxii) The system shall be “tuned” by use of in-line resistors. Where large harmonic
currents are produced the design will employ active filter harmonic equipment or
design filter reactors to accommodate the load and harmonic constituent of the
system.
xxiii) This Contractor shall carry out a full harmonic load test three months after
occupation and provide a report advising of a course of action.

(c) CAPACITORS

i) Comply with BS EN 60831 Parts 1 and 2.

ii) Service Conditions: Capacitor equipment suitable for the following conditions:
1) Operating Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 46 deg C.
2) Maximum Altitude: 1800 m.
3) Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, non-condensing.

iii) Capacitors shall be carefully chosen for suitability to planned installation,

considering any harmonics, sensitive equipment, ambient environmental
concerns, etc.
iv) Cells: Shall be dry, self-healing type Dry metallized-dielectric, self-healing type.
Each cell shall be encapsulated in thermosetting resin inside plastic container with

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 34 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

individual discharge resistors and be protected against internal faults, over

pressure, etc.
v) Shall be installed in an electrical distribution system having system voltage of 400
volts (system highest voltage 440 volts) and shall be rated at 480 volts due to
voltage rise caused by connecting the active harmonic filters. The
vi) ambient temperature in the room will be maintained at 40 C. If the ambient
temperature in the room exceeds 40 C then the capacitor bank and its
components should be de rated to 550 volts.
vii) The temperature category shall be 5D as per BS EN 60831, Part 1
viii) Shall be completely leakage proof and of dry type construction without any filling
of jelly, wax, etc. Shall be of the self-healing type utilizing low loss metalized
polypropylene film dielectrics.
ix) The capacitor containers shall be of non-metallic design from high temperature
withstanding material and shall not require an earth connection
x) Each capacitor element shall have an internal HRC fuse (BS88) combined with a
secondary solid foil electrode to ensure safe disconnection from the circuit at the
end of its normal working life.
xi) A suitable device shall be provided to automatically disconnect the capacitor unit
from the supply if excessive pressure is generated inside the unit.
xii) Shall have permanently connected built in discharge resistors to ensure safe
discharge of the capacitors to less than 50 volts in 1 minute after switch off.
xiii) The total losses including discharge resistors shall be less than 0.5 watt/kVAr.
xiv) Shall be rated for a minimum of 150% continuous current overload and 118%
continuous voltage overload based on the rated voltage of the capacitors.
xv) Construction: Multiple capacitor cells or elements, factory wired in threephase
groups and mounted in metal enclosures.
xvi) Rupture Protection: Pressure-sensitive circuit interrupter for each cell.
xvii) Capacitor rating xvii) Provide power factor correction capacitors, size as
indicated on the drawings. xviii) Capacitors shall be switched in 50 kVAr
stages.
xviii) Capacitors shall be provided in separate control panels and located in main LV
electrical rooms and shall be complete with control gear integral to the PFC
control panel as indicated on the LV Distribution schematics.
xix) Bank unit
1) Provide modular bank. Include in each module contactors, line fuses and
control circuitry.
2) Power factor capacitors and controls to be integral within a separate control
panel.
3) Switching to be block contactor switching.
4) Provide automatic control via an automatic multi stage kVAr sensitive, solid
state relay with stage switches to operate the capacitor contactors.

xx) Control relay

1) Incorporate relay into PFC cubicle.
2) Fit relay with a loss of voltage no volt release re setting feature to reset
switching sequence to all contacts open position following failure of supply.
3) Provide visual indication by means of LED's for capacitor stages and
capacitor/inductive load.
4) Provide Hand/Off/Auto selection switch.

xxi) Incorporate on load break isolator in unit.

1) PFC Assembly.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 35 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

xxii) Provide assembly housed in sheet steel enclosure complete with main terminals,
comprising individual low loss, power capacitor elements and fuses to BS EN
608714 or BS EN 60143-3.
1) Incorporate thermal equalizers within assembly of elements.
2) Fill enclosure with inorganic, inert and non-flammable granules.
3) Fit discharge resistors.
4) Ensure all internal and external connections are adequately rated and fully
insulated.
5) Material: Manufacturer's standard.
6) Finish & Colour: Manufacturer's standard.
7) Access: Front access.

(d) Control Requirements

i) For the situation where the complete LV switch panel is fed from a single incoming
mains supply, it will be necessary to render inoperative the corresponding power
factor correction package to prevent cyclic control of each.
ii) The current transformer on each side of the LV switch panel shall therefore be
located such that current will not be registered when an incoming mains breaker is
open.
iii) The cubical shall be provided with hand/off/auto selection. Power factor indication
and rotational switching shall be of the Bulk type.
iv) Visual indication shall be provided by means of LEDs for capacitor stages and
capacitor/inductive load.
v) Control shall be accomplished by the use of an automatic multi-stage xxx
sensitive, solid state relay having multi-stage switches that shall operate capacitor
contactors.
vi) The power factor controller shall be of the electronic type capable of switching
capacitor contactors in up to 12 steps.
vii) The technical specification should be as follows:
1) Connection type : Line to line or Line to neutral
2) Connection feature : Insensitive to CT direction/Insensitive to phase rotation
polarity
3) Voltage input : 220 / 240 V
4) Frequency : 50 Hz (+/- 1 Hz)
5) Current input : CT ….../5 A class 1
6) Step output contacts : 12, volt free contact

viii) Momentary no voltage function: Disconnection of all steps after voltage loss
lasting greater than 15ms. Automatic reconnection upon restoration of correct
system voltage.
ix) Step configuration programming: Fixed /Auto/Not used
x) Information provided on LED Screen:
1) Cosine phi
2) Connected steps
3) Period before switching
4) Step output status (capacitance loos survey)
5) Load and reactive current
6) Total voltage harmonic distortion
7) Voltage, temperature, Power (S,P,Q) (Apparent, Real, Reactive)
8) Current and Voltage up to 31st harmonic
9) Alarm and warning
10) Low power cosine phi
11) Hunting
12) Abnormal cosine phi

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 36 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

13) Overcompensation
14) Frequency not detected
15) Over current
16) Under voltage
17) Over voltage
18) Over temperature
19) Total voltage harmonic distortion
20) Capacitor overload
21) 2 relays programmable as alarm and/or fan control. To be interfaced with the
BMS.
22) Power factor setting: Digital, 0.8 inductive to 0.9 capacitive. To be interfaced
with the BMS.
23) C/K setting: Automatic search or manual setting. To be interfaced with the
BMS.
24) Accuracy class: 1.5% 29.
25) Display: 7 segments + LED.

(e) REACTORS

i) Detuned reactors shall be used in case of harmonic pollution.

ii) The detuned reactor shall be three phase iron cores with cooper winding.
iii) The reactor shall comply with IEC 60289.
iv) Tolerance: +/-5%
v) Tolerance between phase: Lmax / Lmin <1.07
vi) Tuning order: 2.7 (relative impedance: 14%)
vii) Harmonic current spectrum for tuning order 4.3:

l3 = 2% l1

l5 = 69% l1

l7 = 19% l1

l11 = 6% l1

viii) Permissible overload fundamental current: 1.1 times the nominal current (l1).
ix) Insulation level: 1.1 kV according to IEC 6076
x) Insulation Class: H
xi) Test voltage (coil to core): 3 kV 1 minute
xii) Distance between terminals and earth: 20 mm
1) The 3 phase series reactors to be connected in series with each capacitor
stage for harmonic current suppression and to prevent resonance should be
of iron cored type. The current rating of the reactors should be increased
suitably to take into account the effect of harmonics in the network which
could be generated by variable speed drives, dimmers, elevators, UPS
systems, fax machines, computers, fluorescent discharge lamps etc. The
offered reactors should undergo tests wherein the reactors should be
subjected to harmonic currents generated by harmonic generating test
equipment. The magnitude of these harmonic currents should correspond to
the harmonic current magnitude in the network.
2) The combination of capacitors and reactors should be tuned below the lowest
harmonic present in the network. With the capacitors and suitable series
reactors connected it should be proved through submission of relevant

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 37 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

calculations that the Total Harmonic Voltage Distortion is within the limits as
specified in G5/4 Engineering Recommendations on Planning levels for
Harmonic Voltage Distortion and the connection of non-linear loads to
Transmission Systems.
3) If the Total Harmonic Distortion limits are exceeded even with the use of the
detuned harmonic suppression capacitor banks, then appropriately rated
Active Filters should be proposed in conjunction with the detuned capacitor
banks to limit the Total Harmonic Distortion to below the specified limits in
G5/4 Engineering Recommendations.

15 Motor Control Center (MCC)

(a) General
A. The MCC technical requirements shall be in accordance with the data sheets,
single line diagrams and schematics.

B. The MCC shall be Form-4b Type-6 in full compliance with DEWA requirement.

C. The motor control centres shall be suitable for operation on 400 V, 3-phase, 3 wire,
50 Hz, front mounted, installed on steel channel sills.

D. All power bus bars as well as all other current carrying parts shall be of copper.
The main horizontal bus bars shall be insulated and isolated, and rated as
indicated in single line diagrams, and shall run continuously the entire length of the
control centre, except when it may be necessary to cut and provide splice plates as
between shipping sections. The main bus shall be housed in an isolated
compartment. Vertical bus bars extending the full height of each section shall be
provided. The vertical bus shall be insulated with flame-retardant material. All
buses shall be braced for 50,000 symmetrical amps RMS short circuit current. All
bus assemblies shall be supported by steel framework with insulators of moulded
glass polyester. Provision shall be made to extend MCC on either side. Comply to
the Busbar specification indicated in MDB section.

E. Motor control centres shall have a continuous horizontal copper earthing bus
installed in the bottom of the MCC. It shall extend through each section of the
control centre and shall be provided with compression lugs at each end. Vertical
ground bus extending down each vertical section shall also be provided.

F. Incoming sections shall have top/bottom entry, as per project requirements. Space
shall be adequate to accommodate incoming bus ducts supplied by others. MCC
Supplier shall coordinate with the main contractor regarding details of bus ducts.

G. Outgoing power and control wiring shall be from top/bottom as per project
requirements.

H. Each control centre shall be provided with a laminated phenolic nameplate, white
outer layers with black centre layer, 75 mm x 200 mm, with bevelled edges.
Lettering shall be engraved into the phenolic to produce black letters on a white
background. The MCC number shall be in 25 mm high letters and numerals. All
other lettering shall be a minimum of 10 mm high. The nameplates shall be firmly
fixed to the MCC’s.

I. Vertical Sections
1. Each motor control centre shall consist of one or more rigid free standing
vertical section(s) bolted together to form a unit assembly.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 38 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

2. Sections shall be suitable for mounting starters in front of the section.

3. Vertical sections shall be front connected and be capable of being wired from
the front without removing any units. Adequate vertical wiring space accessible
from the front shall be provided in a separate vertical isolated wireway, with
covers.

4. Openings, covered by removable gasketted plates, shall be provided in ends of

vertical sections to allow for future addition of vertical sections at either end.
Removable plates shall also be used to cover the top and any unused space on
the front and back of the control centres. Where called for in specific
requirements, space shall be provided for installation of future units. This space
shall be complete with bus, unit supports and isolating barriers.

J. Unit Compartments

1. Each control unit shall be designed for mounting within a vertical section in such
a manner that each unit will be completely enclosed and isolated from all other
units. Adequate space shall be provided for entry of wiring from the vertical
wiring trough. Control units shall be “plug in” type construction, equipped with
self-aligning stabs of a type that will increase contact pressure on short circuits.

2. Control units shall be capable of independently and satisfactorily clearing a fault

on the load side of the starter with 42,000 symmetrical amperes available at the
line side terminals.

3. Each unit compartment shall be provided with an individual front door. Starters
and feeder unit doors shall be interlocked mechanically with the unit disconnect
device to prevent unintentional opening of the door with power on and
unintentional application of power while the door is open.

4. Means shall be provided for releasing the interlock for intentional application of
power, if desired, while the door is open. Padlocking arrangements shall permit
locking of the disconnect device in the OFF position with a maximum of 3
padlocks with the door closed or open.

5. Starter disconnect devices shall be operable from outside the enclosure and
shall show position of disconnect device whether compartment door is opened
or closed.

6. Similar nameplates showing unit location I.D. shall be installed at left top corner
of front door of each unit.

7. Special tools and equipment shall be provided for operation and maintenance
purposes.

8. Provision to be provided in the panels (control circuits) for the thermostats

connection.

(b) STARTERS, DISCONNECT AND ACCESSORIES

A. Motor starters shall be in accordance with this specification. The maximum starting
currents for motors shall be:

1. Less than 5 hp - 5 times full load current

2. 5 hp to 50 hp - 2 times full load current

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 39 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

3. 50 hp and above - 1.5 times full load current

B. The stationary equipment shall be as follows:-

1. Motors up to 5 hp will be connected Across-The-Line with over current

protection

2. Motors above 5 to 50 hp will be controlled with motor starters of a star delta.

3. Motors 50 hp and above shall be controlled with motor starters of a soft start
design.

4. Provide moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) for feeders with current limiting
protection as indicated on single line diagrams. The rating of the MCCB’s shall
be in accordance with the load indicated on the single line diagrams with a
minimum of 65kA interrupting capacity.

(c) ACROSS-THE-LINE STARTING

A. Controllers shall be of circuit breaker combination type with full voltage magnetic
starters for across-the-line starting. Full protection of each phase shall be provided
in starters by means of electronic overloads.

B. Under voltage protection shall be provided by the starter coil to disengage on 65%
of rated voltage unless otherwise noted.

(d) ELECTRONIC OVERLOAD RELAY

A. Vendor shall provide an electronic overload relay for connecting the starter.
B. The overload relay shall have a current adjustment range of 5:1 or greater.
C. The overload relay shall have +/- 2.5% setting accuracy.
D. The overload relay can be converted from manual to automatic reset.
E. The overload relay trips in two seconds or less under phase loss conditions when
applied to fully loaded motor.
F. The overload relay provides a visible trip indicator.
G. The overload relay provides led status indication.
H. The trip indication LED flashed in a pattern that indicates the trip cause.
I. The overload relay provides 1 N.C. auxiliary contact.
J. The overload relay provides a test trip function that when operated trips both the
N.C. contacts and the N.O. triac outputs.
K. The overload relay has trip free construction
L. The overload relay is ambient temperature compensated
M. The overload relay has user selectable 10, 15, 20 or 30 tripping classes
N. The overload relay has user selectable jam/stall protection.
O. The overload relay has user selectable ground fault protection.
P. The overload relay is compatible with a hand-held or panel-mounted interface
device that provides a two-line Bakelite LCD and start, stop and reset control
functions.
Q. The overload relay can communicate on an open communications bus.
R. The overload relay provides the following information on a communication network:

1. Average Current
2. Percent Phase Imbalance
3. Percent Thermal Capacity Used
4. Trip Cause
5. Full load Current Setting
6. Output Triac Status

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 40 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

S. The overload relay provides two triac outputs that enable the overload to control
two starter coils.
T. The overload relay provides the following control functions on a communication
network.
U. Start
V. Stop
W. Reset

(e) VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. General Description

This Specification describes the requirements for the 400V Variable Frequency Drive
Controllers (VFD). The 400V Variable Frequency Drive Controllers shall be designed
and provided in accordance with this Specification and the attached data sheets. The
proposed Manufacturers installation requirements should be complied by the
Manufacturers as part of the Contract including shielded power cables (if required),
enclosure for VFD’s, earthing requirements, etc to achieve EMC Compatible installation.
All details shall be furnished as part of the submittal.

B. Scope of Supply

The scope of supply includes the design, manufacture, testing and delivery of the 400V
VFDs as described above. The VFDs shall comply with EMC directives and provide with
filters. All VFDs shall be communicating type using LON / Modbus.

C. Supplied By Contractor

Equipment unloading and storage at the Job Site.

D. Codes and Standards

1. All equipment shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the
latest edition of the applicable:

NFPA 70
IEC 146
EN Standard/CE marked for EMC directives:
Emissions Immunity
EN 50081-1 EN 50082-1
EN 50081-2 EN 50082-2
EN 55011 Class A IEC 801-1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8
EN 55011 Class B EN 50178

2. EN 60204-1
3. The manufacturer shall furnish the product as listed and classified by
underwriter’s laboratories as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

E. Environmental Conditions

1. The VFD product line shall be capable of operating normally in an environment

with an ambient temperature range of 0 °C to 50 °C with a relative humidity of up

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 41 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

to 95% (non-condensing). The enclosed current rating shall be derated by 10%

for each 5 °C above 50 °C not exceeding 60 °C.

2. The product line shall be capable of being shipped and stored in an environment
with an ambient temperature range of 0 °C to 65 °C.

3. The nominal operating altitude shall be less than 1000 m above sea level.

F. Product Delivery and Handling

Ship controllers in convenient sections crated and protected, bearing in mind the
hazards of transportation.

All necessary bus connections, wire jumpers, bolts, nuts, etc. shall be suitably packed
and identified to facilitate field assembly.

G. Products

1. General

2. The variable speed drive controllers’ technical requirements shall be in

accordance with the data sheets. Seller shall be responsible for ensuring that
under all operating conditions:

- The controllers and their characteristics shall be compatible with their

respective driven production motor and the plant control system. Seller
shall obtain speed (frequency) range required and maximum frequency
permitted for each type of controller from the load equipment supplier.

- The VFD shall be suitable for use with high efficiency Design B, 400 V
motors.

- The total harmonic distortion (THD) voltage in the plant electrical and
local DEWA systems shall not exceed 5% and no individual harmonic
shall exceed 3% during normal plant operation.

- Computerised harmonic analysis studies to IEEE Standard 519; copies

of the studies shall be provided with the proposal.
- The VFD shall be fully digital pulse width modulated type (PWM) using
latest generation IGBTs with isolating contactors and line reactors.

3. Design Requirements

a. The VFD controllers shall be suitable for operation on 400 Volt 15%, 3
phase, 50 Hz input power supply and 0-400 Volt, 3 phase, 0.5 to 400 Hz
output. No transformer shall be used on either the input or output of the
VFD.

b. Each controller shall comprise:

- Enclosure with filters and gaskets construction, mounted on

steel sills.
- Incoming supply terminals complete with cable lugs.
- Pad lockable line disconnect switch with bolt on HRC
fuses in each phase.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 42 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

- 110% overload capacity above motor service factor demand

(115%) for 30 minutes.
- Short circuit and current limit protection.
- Surge (TVSS) protection.
- Stop / Start contactor to ensure when the motor is not running,
no voltage is present on the motor power terminals.
- Wireways with removable gland plates.
- Incoming power system isolation transformer, if required, with
thermal sensing in each phase, and filters to limit on the plant
400V bus THD to 5%; no single harmonic to be more than 3%.
- Drive operation man machine interface (MMI) keyboard.
- Stepless non reversing minimum and maximum motor speed
adjustments, adjustable ramp up rates, minimum/maximum
speed limits for pump motors. Adjustments to be password
protected.
- Man / Auto select switch via keypad, with locking via password
in both positions (see Note).
- Local/Remote selector switch via keypad with locking via
password in both positions (see Note).
- “Drive Ready” with remote signal.
- Stop and start pushbuttons via keypad, in remote mode.
- Speed control: Local / Remote / Automatic via keypad.
- Motor speed indication via LED display.
- Motor On / Off indication via LED display.
- Emergency stop pushbutton, local at controller and local to
plant.
- Drive status and failure diagnostic feature via LED display.
Feature to log, time and date the last 30 fault conditions.
- Indication of output to drive current on each phase.
- Isolated I/O control signals.
- Motor multi-function protection, providing short circuit (51),
overvoltage (59), under voltage (27), thermal (49), stalling (49S)
and phase unbalance (46) protections, complete with ground
fault (51G) protection device to trip the incoming supply.
- Bolted and shrouded bolted type terminals for terminating load
cables.
- Weidmuller or Wieland type terminal blocks shall be provided to
connection of external wiring and cables.
- Interposing relays as required.
- 110V AC control voltage or manufacturers standard.
- Microprocessor based electronic self-diagnostics and fault
detection system.
- Each cubicle shall be provided with a earthing bus, complete
with two connectors for connecting to the plant earthing system.
Drilled holes shall be provided for connecting cable earth
conductor.
- VFD controllers shall be provided with a lamacoid engraved
nameplate, minimum size 150mm x 75mm, engraving details to
be provided by Purchaser.
In “Man” mode, two modes shall be functional: Local or
Remote. In “Local” mode, motor shall be started from
Start/Stop pushbuttons via controller’s keypad. In “Remote”
mode, motor shall be started from pushbutton station located
near motor (if required).

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 43 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

c. Performance:

The VFD shall have the following features as a minimum:

- Minimum efficiency of 97% at maximum load and speed.

- Minimum line side displacement power factor of 0.95 to 1.0
logging at all speeds and loads.
- Adjustable motor frequency of 0 to 400 Hz.
- Separately adjustable acceleration and deceleration ramps
from 0 to 999 seconds.
- Rotating motor restart feature.
- Capable of running without a motor connected for set-up and
testing.
- Skip frequency reject point to prevent operating of the
equipment at a resonant speed.
- Ride through for power outage of at least 2 seconds duration
- Load loss detection
- Overload protection
- Auto economizer
- The flying start feature operable with or without encoder
feedback

D. Discrete Operation:-

Inputs:

Start
Stop

Outputs:

Ready to start
Running
VFD general fault alarm status
VFD Auto and Man/Local/Remote operation status

E. Analog Operation:-

Inputs:

Speed control signal

Outputs:

Speed signal feedback

Phase currents (percent)
Frequency (percent)

F. Verification of Interface:-

Vendor shall demonstrate functional testing and operational verification

of the control interface with the Building Management System via
Modbus, Bacnet, LON, or equal as required.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 44 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Inspections and Factory Test:

Controllers shall be inspected at all stage of manufacture in accordance

with the Seller’s Quality Assurance Program and shall be completely
assembled in the works. Seller shall provide a production schedule,
which shall give details of the production processes. Seller shall
provide a QA

Manual, which shall detail the inspections, testing to referenced

standards, and burn in at full load at an ambient of 50 C, for a minimum
of 8 hours. All deficiencies shall be corrected before shipment.

H. Painting

All metal surfaces that are to be painted or coated shall be cleaned to

an equal of a commercial finish as defined in the Steel Structures
Painting Council’s manual - SSPC-SP6-63, modified to exclude wet
sandblasting and painted to manufacturer’s standard finish. Internal
surfaces shall be painted white.

I Nameplates

Nameplates shall be provided for each VFD controller.

(f) SOFT-STARTER:

Introduction

- This specification covers electronic soft starters, three-phase controlled, ie 6

thyristors (SCRs).

- The starter provides power for starting and stopping three phases asynchronous
motors (squirrel-cage) type IEC or NEMA. Stopping can be managed in 3
manners: freewheel stop, stop on the ramp or controlled dynamic breaking.

Quality of the product and of the Supplier

- The soft- starter shall be developed and qualified in accordance with international
standards, particularly with the standard dedicated to soft starters EN / IEC
60947-4-2.

- The starter must be CE marked under the harmonized standard EN / IEC 60947-
4-2.

- In accordance with electromagnetic compatibility, the soft-starter must comply with

Class A for conducted and radiated emissions, described in the standard EN / IEC
60947-4-2. This is valid for all the basic functions available within the soft starter.

Class B can be obtained with additional accessories and covers only soft starters
with a rated current not exceeding 170 A.

- The Soft-starter shall comply with CSA "Industrial Control Equipment”.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 45 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

- The manufacturing facilities for Soft-starters and associated activities such as

development and design must be certified ISO 9001 version 2000 and ISO 14001.

Description of the product

Make of Soft-starter should be same as ACB, MCCB, MCB, Contactor & VFD
manufacturer.

- The operating principle of the soft starter should not simply take ground on a
limitation of motor current during the transitional phases or on a voltage ramp, but
on a torque control motor. The soft starter should provide a torque ramp during
the acceleration phase. Thus, it can control the torque during the starting period
and if necessary provide a motor torque constantly throughout the acceleration
phase.

- For pumping applications, the deceleration will be on a torque ramp.

- All soft starter sizes will have the same control PC boards.That control board must
be identical for all applications. The same soft starter can be used on different
applications: pumps, conveyors (taking into account the sizing), grinders, fans,
compressors, and others.

- All soft starters shall be equipped with motor current measuring means to ensure
engine protection.

- The terminals for the mains should be located on top of the soft starter and the
motor terminals should be on the bottom (through wiring).

- All soft starter sizes must have terminals for the connection of the by-pass
contactor. The measurements of the current will be active when the soft starter is
by-passed.

- The soft starter should have a separate power control.

- The terminals of the board control shall be of plug type.

Environment

- The soft starter shall be able to operate in ambient temperatures from -10 to + 40
°C without derating, and between 40 and 60° C with derating of 2% per degree C
above 40 °C.

- The maximum relative humidity will be 95% without condensation or dripping

water according to standards IEC60947-4-2.

- The storage temperature can be between -25 °C to + 70°C

- The maximum operating altitude is 1000 meters (3280 feet), beyond that limit, the
soft starter will be downgraded by 2,2% per 100 meters (328 feet).

- The supplier will indicate a noise level of the soft starter, this noise level should
not exceed 65 dBA.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 46 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

- About the soft starter cooling, if the soft starters are equipped with fans, those
fans should not run continuously. They will be managed automatically according
to the temperature of the radiator.

- The degree of environmental pollution will be a maximum degree 3 according to

IEC 60664-1 (or IEC 60947-4-2).

- The supplier will indicate the connection diagrams of the soft starters.

- The supplier will make available the association charts between circuit breakers,
fuses, contactors and soft starters in a way to ensure coordination of type 2.

Electrical characteristics of the soft starter

- The run category of the soft starters will be on a standard AC 53a following EN /
IEC 60947-4-2.

- The supplier shall be able to offer soft starters in one or several ranges in a way to
cover mains from 208 to 690V (208V to 690 V -15% +10%).

- The current range of soft starters will be between 17 and 1200 A.

- The soft starter will automatically adapt itself to the frequency of the mains 50 or
60 Hz with a tolerance of + / -5%. Through configuration, it will be capable to
operate at a frequency network which may vary +/-20%.

- Logic inputs: the soft starter should have at least 4 isolated digital inputs 24V.

- Outputs: the soft starter must have at least 3 relays with a close contact.

- Maximum switching capacity on inductive load: 1.8 A at 230 Vac and 30 Vdc.
Minimum switching capacity 10 mA at 6 Vdc.

- Outputs: the soft starter must have at least 2 digital outputs 24V.

- Analog outputs: the soft starter will have one analog output signal with a 0-20mA
or 4-20mA. This signal may be scaled.

- The starter shall have its own source power supply (24V) for logic inputs/outputs.

- The supplier will offer an array of choices of soft starters for 2 types of design:

 Sizing 1 :
Starting from cold state (motor service S1): 1 start at 3 In for 46 seconds.
On an operating level (motor service S4), with a duty cycle of 50% and 10
starts per hour or equivalent thermal cycle: 1 start at 3 In for 23 seconds.

 Sizing 2 :
Starting from a cold state (motor service S1): 1 start at 4ln for 48 seconds on
an operating level (motor service S4), with a duty cycle of 50% and 5 starts
per hour, or equivalent thermally cycle: 1 start at 4ln for 25 seconds.

Protections

- The starter will include the management of PTC sensors.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 47 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

- The starter will calculate continuously the motor overheating from the real current
value (the current must be measured and not estimated). Several classes of
thermal protection will be proposed following the standard EN/IEC60947-4-2:
Classes 10A, 10, 20, 30 and the intermediate classes, one less than the 10A
class, one between classes 10 and 20 and one between classes 20 and 30.The
calculation of the thermal protection must be active even when the soft starter is
not power energized.

- The starter shall be protected against thermal overload.

- The soft starter will detect an under- load from the motor torque information. The
detection threshold and the allowed duration of the under- load shall be
adjustable. That protection may result in a default on the soft starter or simply
cause an indication in the form of an alarm on a logic output relay.

- The soft starter will detect an over- load from the information of the motor current.
The detection threshold and the allowed duration of the over-load shall be
adjustable. The duration of overload may be adjustable from 0.1 seconds. That
protection may result in a default on the starter or simply cause an indication in
the form of alarm on an output relay.

- The soft starter shall have protection against reverse-phase network, the loss of
phase (s) on mains or on motor.

- The soft starter will take into account the management of an external fault. When
the contact is open, the soft starter trips in fault.

- The protections should be maintained even when the soft starter is by-passed by
a contactor.

Communication

- The starter will include a multipoint serial link to be connected directly to a Modbus
network.

- The starter shall be able to be connected to Ethernet and other networks and
communication bus option.

- The communication shall provide access to the control, adjustment and monitoring
of the soft starter.

Main functions

- The starter may start and stop several motors in cascade.

- A second set of motor parameters can be switched by a logic input.

- To protect the motor during long standstill periods against condensation, the soft
starter shall have a function of pre-heating without causing rotation of the motor.
The current preheating system must be adjustable.

- The soft starter will handle the by-pass of the soft starter: manage the closure of
the by-pass at end of acceleration time and open that by-pass at end of stop
sequence. That function must be compatible with the types of judgements:
freewheel, ramp, controlled breaking.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 48 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

- The soft starter may control the line contactor. The contactor will be closed from a
run control and open at end of shutdown of the motor.

- The access to the settings can be locked by code. The monitoring parameters
should remain accessible.

Monitoring

- The starter shall have a basic screen dialogue and programming push-buttons. An
optional kit to get remote terminal will be offered.

- The following information must be accessible on the screen dialog:

o Motor current
o Torque
o Motor thermal state
o Cos
o Active Power
o Current status (acceleration, deceleration ...).
o Operating time.
o The last fault occurred

- The following information will be available on the analog output:

o Motor current
o Torque
o Motor thermal state
o Cos
o Active Power

- The Soft-starter has in option advanced dialogue solutions such as:

Software workshop for PC to prepare, store, download and print settings.

Terminal display with clear parameters.
For these tools, 6 languages are available: French, English, German, Italian, and
Spanish.

Motor Data :

The starter must be sized for use with IEC motors or NEMA motors.

15 Sub Main Distribution Boards (SMDB)

(a) Submain Distribution Boards (SMDB) shall be located as shown on the small power
and schematic drawings.

(b) The incoming supply shall be terminated on a non-auto MCCB (rating as shown on
the schematic diagram) door interlocked. The fault level of the whole board shall be
suitable for minimum 35kA, for 1 second.

(c) The incoming supply shall be equipped with three ammeters, one voltmeter with
selector switch and three phase indication lamps.

(d) Each outgoing way shall be of a common frame size to present a composite
appearance.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 49 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(e) The sub main distribution panels as shown on the drawings shall be wall mounted
type. Construction shall be to BS5486, Form 2.

(f) All internal wiring shall be carried out neatly and shall be housed in wiring trunkings
forming an integral part of the switchboard. Under no circumstances shall the
crowding of internal connections in the proximity of live metal be permitted and
adequate clearance shall be maintained between the various phases and between
phases and non-current carrying metal.

(g) Detachable panels of insulating material shall be provided at all locations to avoid
accidental contact with live metal on the opening of any cell. All outgoing and
incoming MCCBs and isolators shall be fully shrouded and independently segregated
to local authority requirements. All equipment mounted on the door shall be fully
shrouded with insulating materials.

(h) All outgoing ways shall be molded case circuit breakers sized as shown on the circuit
diagram and schematics.

(i) All components shall be identified on both the front of the board and at each MCCB by
means of white traffolyte labels and black inscriptions rivet fixed. Sticky papers labels
or Dymo tape will not be accepted. Cable terminations, where installed shall be
labeled with circuit reference and all cables shall be identified.

16 Distribution Boards (DB)

(a) The distribution board shall comply to BS EN 60439–3 & Local electricity authority
regulations.

(b) The Enclosure shall be of IP41 with hinged doors. It shall accommodate
MCB’s/RCBO’s with plug in system to the busbar.
(c) All busbars shall also be shrouded properly. The DB shall have 25% spare capacity
provision and sufficient space for cabling/wiring.

(d) Boards shall be of metal construction, with separation arrangements and provided
with moulded case circuit breakers or miniature circuit breakers as the circuit design
load requires.

(e) The distribution boards and loose switchgear shall be constructed and installed to
comply with the standards of the country or area of installation.

(f) All distribution boards shall, where possible, be wall mounted and shall incorporate
incoming disconnect switches which may be accomplished with integral non-auto
circuit breakers.

(g) All distribution boards shall be equipped with front doors covering breakers and these
shall be lockable.

(h) All distribution boards shall be labelled to a quality as defined for the main switch
panel. The label shall identify the following:

i) Board reference
ii) Source panel and circuits
iii) Incoming cable size

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 50 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(i) Distribution boards installed externally for landscape lighting shall be installed in an
IP65 enclosure with bottom entry cables.

(j) The Distribution board shall be provided complete with day light sensor and a manual
override switch.

17 Metering

(a) DEWA standard and approved tariff meters shall be provided at the incoming supplies
to the site as indicated on the schematic drawings.

(b) Tariff meters shall be housed in the DEWA approved enclosures with the required
indication and labelling. They shall confirm to DEWA document “Technical
Specification for Electric Meters”. All tariff meters shall be fitted with output pulse
contact for KWH and KVARH registering at BMS. Confirm with DEWA if meters are to
be free issued by DEWA for installation. If not confirm with DEWA, the type of meter to
be installed prior to order

(c) The accuracy class of the tariff meters shall be as per DEWA recommendations.

(d) All integrating meters shall be suitable for measuring three-phase, three-wire,
unbalanced loads. The speed of the rotor shall not exceed forty revolutions per minute
at full load. Unless otherwise approved, the bottom rotor bearing shall be fitted with a
diamond jewel which shall be enclosed so as to exclude, as far as possible, dust and
other impurities.

(e) All integrating meters shall be fitted with a ratchet or other approved device to prevent
reverse rotation. 4. The meter cases shall be designed such that the meter elements
are independently withdraw able and that during withdrawal and when withdrawn the
current transformer connections are shorted out.

(f) Front of panel test blocks shall be provided for all meters.

(g) Other than for tariff metering, energy meters shall be of Class 1 accuracy.

(h) Maximum demand indicating ammeter shall have 15 minimum time lag thermal
movement and a self-contained current limiting transformer to prevent damage to the
thermal movement due to high overloads. A red slave pointer shall show the highest
point reached and has a wire sealable reset knob. The MDI shall have 1 No. pair of
normally open adjustable contacts connected to terminals for indication to BMS

(i) Energy Meters: Shall be of the withdraw able flush mounting, switchboard pattern in
accordance with IEC 62052-11 and IEC 62053-11. Meters shall be back connected
and have a register of the cyclometer drum type.

(j) Switchboard Meters: Instruments are to be housed in enameled, square, metal cases
for flush installation. Scales and markings are to be protected and sealed. Accuracy of
instruments is to be within 2% unless otherwise indicated. All metering instruments
shall be with low glare window and potential terminals shall be covered against
accidental contact and consequent damage.

(k) Motor Control Center Metering Instruments: Housed in metal cases for flush mounting,
with scales and markings fully protected and scaled meters shall have accuracy within
2% unless stated otherwise.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 51 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(l) Energy metering is required on any piece of equipment or plant installed that uses
more than 100kWh of power per day or exceeds 10kW of demand

(m) Individual metering of the following final circuits is required: lighting, plug load. This
means that all final distribution boards shall have at least 2 No. energy meters.

(n) For switchboard metering devices the following conditions shall apply:

(o) Generally: Instruments are to be housed in enameled, square, metal cases for flush
installation. Scales and markings are to be protected and sealed. Accuracy of
instruments is to be within 2% unless otherwise indicated. All metering instruments
shall be with law glare window and potential terminals shall be covered against
accidental contact and consequent damage.

(p) The following metering devices are to be provided:

i) 3 ammeters 144mm x 144mm required with expanded scale in operation area and
compressed scale at ends and maximum demand indicating pointer which can be
set.
ii) Incomers shall have 3 phase sensors to provide automatic switching in case of
phase loss, phase reversal or under voltage and automatic restoration on
normalization to prevent loss of supply.
iii) Voltmeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 1.25 times nominal
system voltage, 90° angle, size 76 x 76mm. 4. Voltmeter Selector Switch:
7position rotary type.
iv) Ammeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 2 times nominal
circuit amperage, degree angle, size 144 x 144mm. To be provided with maximum
demand indicator needle.

(q) Maximum Demand Indicator (MDI): Shall be equipped with 15 minutes time log
capability, complete with reset knob.
(r) Microprocessor Based Monitoring Device: Provide complete electrical metering (kW,
kVA, THD, kVAR, power factor, frequency, Amp. per phase, single phase and
composite phase voltage, etc.)

18 Ammeters

(a) Ammeters shall be of moving iron type class 1 accuracy and be capable of carrying
their full load current without undue heating and shall not be damaged by the
maximum fault levels of the switchgear.

(b) All ammeters shall have a continuous overload capability of 120% of the upper limit of
the scale for two hours. All ammeters are to be 100mm dial square flush pattern with
quadrant scales.

(c) Mechanical zero adjustment shall be provided and shall be accessible from the front
without dismantling.

(d) The ammeters shall give direct readings without application of any multiplication
factors.

(e) For the ammeters combining with record of maximum demand current, a separate
calibrated reading scale shall be provided in one case. The maximum demand
indication pointer shall be operated by a directly heated bimetal element averaging the
ms current over every 15 minutes interval. The pointer shall show the highest value
reached until reset.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 52 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

19 Voltmeters

(a) Voltmeters shall be of accuracy Class 1 and have expanded scales. The arrangement
and scale deflections shall be approved prior to assembly of the associated
switchboards.

(b) Mechanical zero adjustment shall be provided and shall be accessible from the front
without dismantling.

(c) Voltmeters shall be connected to the incoming side of the power supply through HRC
fuses and links.

(d) Other requirements shall be as per the applicable clauses specified for the ammeters.

20 Power factor meters

(a) Power factor indicators shall be of accuracy Class 1.5 having bezel dimensions 115 x
115mm. They should give direct readings without the use of multiplication factors. The
arrangement and scale deflection shall be approved prior to assembly of the
switchboards.

21 Frequency meters

(a) Frequency meters shall be of accuracy Class 0.5 and comprise of a moving coil
indicator with a frequency transducer.

22 Ammeter selector switches

(a) The ammeter selector switches shall be mounted on the front of the panel and shall
be of the rotary type with make-before-break contacts for selection to read Red-
Yellow-Blue-Neutral currents with R-Y-B-N marked clearly on the switch.

(b) Contacts shall be rated for a thermal current of 6 amperes.

23 Voltmeter selector switches

(a) The voltmeter selector switch shall be mounted on the front of the panel and shall be
of the rotary type with break-before-make contacts for selection to measure Red-
Yellow, Yellow-Blue, Blue-Red and Red, Yellow and Blue phase voltages with R-Y, Y-
B, B-R, R—N, Y-N, B-N indicated clearly on the switch.

(b) Contacts shall be rated for a thermal current of 6 amperes.

24 Batteries

(a) DC supplies shall be used for tripping of the ACB’s and to affect the operational
sequence of the switchboards described elsewhere in the Specification.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 53 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(b) The batteries shall be housed in a separate and ventilated compartment in the
switchboards. The batteries shall have sufficient capacity to operate all switchboard
devices a minimum of 20 consecutive times.

(c) The batteries shall be of the sealed, nickel cadmium type complying to IEC 60285,
1995 and have a rated voltage of 30V DC or as recommended by the switchboard
manufacturer, requiring no maintenance, being of the long life type.

(d) The battery compartment of each main L.V. switchboard shall also house a 3 stage
trickle charging unit which shall constantly maintain the batteries in fully charged
condition.

(e) The automatic trickle charging unit shall be capable of recharging the battery from fully
discharged to fully charged condition in not more than eight hours. Battery overcurrent
protection shall be provided to safeguard the battery from being short circuited.
Facilities shall also be provided to prevent the battery from overcharging.

(f) The following provisions shall be made at the front of the switchboards:
i) Supply healthy lamp
ii) DC voltmeter c/w test button

(g) The battery circuits shall be suppressed against radio and television interference to
the limits in accordance with IEC 55014:1993.

25 Control and Auxiliary Contacts

(a) Control and auxiliary relays shall be plug-in type, rack-mounted, provided with cable
connection sockets and anchored by quick fastening vibration-proof devices as
required where deemed necessary for proper operation of the ACB. All contacts of
the relays shall be double break, easily accessible for maintenance and have
adequate current rating to carry the connected load.

(b) All relay coils shall be appropriately rated and shall be capable of operating when the
voltage is reduced to 85% of nominal.

(c) Contact elements and Operating coils shall be replaceable and be enclosed in
transparent dust-proof plastic case or available for easy inspection.

(d) All relays shall have a minimum of one pair of normally open and one pair of normally
closed spare contacts.

(e) Latching relays shall be provided where required and shall be suitably rated. They
shall be able to close when subject to a voltage reduction of 85% of nominal.

(f) When the operating coil of the relay is energized, a spring-loaded latch shall hold the
contacts in the closed position. The contact shall remain closed even after the power
is removed from’ the operating coil.

26 Automatic Transfer Switch (Micro-logic based)

(a) Automatic transfer switches shall comprise a pair of circuit breakers mechanically and
electrically interlocked to exclude any possibility of paralleling the normal and standby
sources. The open and close operations of the circuit breakers shall be automatic with
the assistance of charging motors. The charging motors shall be operated at D.C.
supply or A.C. supply as specified.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 54 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(b) To ensure continuity of service both circuit breakers shall have two stable positions,
Closed and Open. It shall be possible to manually operate the circuit breakers in the
event of a failure on the control voltage.

(c) The circuit breakers shall have a neutral position with both breakers in the open
position. It shall be possible to lock each breaker in this position.

(d) The front panel of the equipment shall be provided with indicating lights to indicate
closed and opened status of each circuit breaker.

(e) A three-phase sensing circuit shall be provided on the main busbar of each main L.V.
switchboard. Failure of one or more phases on any of the incoming supplies, or a
reduction in voltage to less than 70% of normal, shall initiate a timing device
adjustable in the range 0 to 15 seconds. If the failure persists and at the expiry of this
pre-set time delay, a signal shall be initiated to start the engine of the standby
generator serving the switchboard.

(f) When power becomes available from the generator, the automatic transfer switch
shall operate with an adjustable time delay between 0 to 15 seconds to transfer the
essential load to the generator supply.

(g) After restoration of the normal supply, the automatic transfer switch shall be manually
restored to its normal position.

(h) The ATS shall also have provisions for connecting to the BMS for monitoring only.
Refer to the particular electrical specification for details and list of signals to be
monitored.

(i) The ATS circuit breakers or contactors shall be 4 pole type unless other specified.

(j) Provide and install automatic transfer and bypass-isolation switch (ATS/BPS)
system(s) with number of poles, current rating, voltage, withstand and close-on ratings
as shown on the drawings. Each automatic transfer shall consist of an inherently
double throw power transfer switch mechanism and a microprocessor controller to
provide automatic operation. All automatic transfer and bypass-isolation switches and
controllers shall be the products of the same manufacturer. These switches shall be
separate cubicle mounted and located as shown on the relevant drawing. Coordinate
with the requirements of the rating as shown on the LV schematics.

(k) Coordinate the incoming and outgoing maximum ampere ratings required to serve the
load, complete with the following features and characteristics. Provide necessary
equipment and interconnection wiring to ensure proper functioning of controls in
accomplishing the sequence of operation outlined herein and with the transfer switch
accessories outlined. Note change over ACBs/MCCBs shall not be accepted.

(l) Include the following components and functions.

i) Full Relay Protection for 3-Ph, 4-wire System. Transfer to emergency source
when voltage on any phase drops to 70 percent or less. Retransfer to normal
when all phase voltages are 90 percent or more.
ii) Adjustable time delay on generator start sequence, 10 seconds maximum, in
all second intervals.
iii) Adjustable time delay on automatic transfer to normal, 15 to 30 minutes in 1-
minute intervals. If the emergency source fails and power is available

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 55 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

iv) from the normal source, the time delay shall be defeated, and the transfer
operation immediately initiated.
v) Two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary contacts on main shaft.
vi) Mounted pilot light to indicate switch in normal position.
vii) Mounted pilot light to indicate switch in emergency position.
viii) Engine Starting Contacts.
ix) Test Switch and necessary contact for remote test switch.
x) Under-frequency Relay.
xi) Other Controls as necessary for the smooth automatic function of the system.
xii) Switched neutral contacts: The neutral of the normal and emergency power
sources shall be switched through a fourth pole of the transfer switch which
shall be non-overlapping (break before make) and shall operate with the main
poles of the switch.
xiii) In phase Monitor Control. The transfer switch shall include an in-phase
monitor to protect against abnormal inrush currents, which may result from
out-of-phase transfer of motor loads. The monitor shall initiate operation of the
transfer switch when the remote or local pushbutton is actuated and the phase
angle between both sources is approaching zero phase angle. The motor
currents upon reconnection shall not exceed normal starting values. In phase
transfer shall be provided in either direction whenever both power sources are
above 70% of nominal voltage.
xiv) The in-phase monitor shall incorporate silicon semiconductor control logic and
an industrial grade output relay, rated for operation of the transfer switch. The
inphase monitor shall be automatic transfer switch.

(m) Sequence of Operation:

i) The transfer switch shall be interlocked to provide the operation specified
herein. In addition to those specified herein, all relays and sensing devices
shall be provided to accomplish the functions.
ii) When normal power fails on the transfer switch (adjustable time delay relay
set at 1 to 2 seconds) the engine-generator starting sequence shall be
initiated.
iii) When emergency power is available at the transfer switch that indicates
failure of normal power, the transfer switch shali transfer without delay.
Voltage and frequency relay settings as required.

(n) The ATS/BPS shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS symmetrical
short circuit current at the ATS/BPS terminals with the type of overcurrent protection
shown on the plans.

(o) The ATS/BPS shall be tested in accordance with BSEN-6-497-6-1 and be labelled
accordingly. Type test certificates from a recognised test laboratory shall be provided.

(p) Tests and Certification

i) The complete ATS/BPS shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation of
the individual components and correct overall sequence of operation and to
ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency and time delay
settings are in compliance with the specification requirements.
ii) Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide factory test certificates
certifying compliance with all of the requirements of this specification including
compliance with the above codes and standards, and withstand and closing
ratings. The certification shall identify, by serial number(s), the equipment
involved. No exceptions to the specifications, other than those stipulated at
the time of the submittal, shall be included in the certification.
END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 56 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C2 LV DISTRIBUTION CABLING

1 Cable Installation

(a) All the main and sub-main cables shall be of the copper conductor type. The
contractor shall provide all the necessary cable trays, cable ladders, conduits,
trunking, glands, shrouds, end boxes, clamps, compounds, specialist tools, etc.,
necessary to install, terminate and connect the cables in accordance with good
engineering practice.

(b) All cables shall be provided with identification labels at each end. The labels shall be
copper disc or ‘traffolyte’ type engraved to show the size and type of the cable and
the equipment it feeds.

(c) Where multi-core cables are used for indication, protection and control applications,
each core shall have an identification number and the contractor shall in addition to
the cable identification labels provide engraved ferrules over the cable tails. The
ferrules shall be numbered according to a wiring diagram. All wires shall be
terminated with an approved type of clamp connector. Pinching screw type
connectors shall not be acceptable.

(d) Notwithstanding the above the contractor shall install the cables in accordance with
the IEC 60364 (latest edition) incorporating all current amendments.

(e) Cables running horizontally at high level shall be supported by perforated cable trays
or cable ladders and cleated at intervals not exceeding 2m directly on the tray or
ladder unless otherwise specified. Where cables are installed vertically, they shall be
cleated at distances not exceeding 1m.

(f) The cable tray /cable ladder design and strength and/or the tray /ladder supports shall
be spaced at such intervals, to ensure that tray / ladder sag is not noticeable when
installed with all cables to be carried.

(g) Where cables are clipped to the wall or ceiling, they shall be secured by means of
space saddles at centres as recommended in IEC60364. The space saddles shall be
of the hot dip galvanized steel deep spacer type fixed to the surface by means of
“rawplugs” or other equal method. Each cable shall be secured by saddles fixed to
their bases by two cadmium plated fixing screws.

(h) This contractor shall be responsible for the offloading and handling of the cables on
site and shall ensure that cables are new and delivered to site on new drum and
properly protected against mechanical damage and loss with all manufacturer’s seals
still intact. Partly used drums of cable which have already been used elsewhere shall
not be acceptable unless special approval is given by the Engineer and MKI
Construction Manager in writing.

2 Fire Resistant Cables

(a) Cable of this type shall be 600/1000V grade, copper core, steel wire armoured cables
insulated with fire resistant materials designed to maintain circuit integrity under fire
conditions. These cables shall be category CW (i.e. resistance to flame temperature
of 950ºC for 1 hour minimum and water spray as defined in BS6387).

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 57 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(b) The over sheath of the cables shall be an extruded layer of black PVC complying with
the requirements of BS4066: Part 3 or IEE332-3 for flame retardance.

(c) All the equipment considered as life safety shall be fed by FR cable

3 Heat resistance flexible cable

(a) Description: Multi-core Flexible rubber sheathed, PVC Insulated BS EN 50525-2-11

(b) Conductor: Copper

(c) Voltage Rating: 450/750 volts

(d) Insulation Temperature Rating: 105°C.

4 PVC / PVC Cable

(a) PVC insulated PVC sheathed copper cables (PVC&PVC) shall be of single core or
multi-core with full neutral and shall be 600/1000v grade. The cores of these cables
shall be high annealed copper conductors complying with IEC standards.

(b) The PVC insulated cores shall be colour coded in accordance with IEC60364 and
shall be over sheathed with PVC.

(c) The minimum bending radius shall be not less than eight times the overall cable
diameter.

(d) Where cables run horizontally, they shall be properly supported on perforated cable
trays and cleated at intervals not exceeding 2m directly to the tray. Where cables are
installed vertically, they shall be cleated at distance not exceeding lm.

(e) Insulation Temperature Rating: 90°C.

5 PVC / SWA / PVC Copper Cable

(a) PVC insulated steel wire armoured cable (PVC/SWA and PVC) shall be 600/1000V
grade, multi-core with full neutral. The cores of these cables shall be high annealed
copper conductors complying with IEC standards.

(b) The PVC insulated cores shall be colour coded and shall be sheathed with PVC
which shall serve as a bedding for galvanised single steel wire armouring. The
armouring shall be served with an outer PVC sheath.

(c) Cables shall be terminated in a gland fitted with an armour clamp. The gland body
shall be provided with an internal conical seating to receive the armour clamping cone
and a clamping nut which shall secure the armour clamping cone firmly to the armour
wires, ensuring that the armour wires shall be tightly clamped between the armour
cone and conical armour seating. The spigot on the gland body shall be threaded to
suit standard conduit accessories. A PVC shroud shall be fitted to cover the entire
gland body.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 58 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(d) The minimum bending radius shall be not less than eight times the overall cable
diameter.

(e) Where cables run horizontally, they shall be properly supported on perforated cable
trays and cleated at intervals not exceeding 2m directly to the tray. Where cables are
installed vertically, they shall be cleated at distance not exceeding 1m.

6 Cross-linked Polyethylene Insulated Steel Wire Armoured Cables (XLPE /SWA / PVC)

(a) Cables of this type shall be 600/1000V grade complying with BS5467 or IEC502 and
IEC811, copper core, cross-linked polyethylene insulated, extruded PVC bedded,
steel wire armoured and PVC sheathed.

(b) Conductors shall be plain annealed copper conductors complying with BS6360 or
IEC228. For multi-core cables, each conductor core shall of the same cross-sectional
area.

(c) The insulation of cores shall be cross-linked polyethylene complying with BS6469 or
IEC811.

(d) Each core of the cable shall be identified by the appropriate colour as specified in
BS6346 throughout the whole of the insulation.

(e) Wire armour shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel wires of the size in the
appropriate table in BS6346 and comply with BS1442.

(f) The oversheath of the cables shall be an extruded layer of black PVC complying with
requirements of BS4066: Part 1 or IEC332-1 for flame retardance.

7 PVC Copper Cable

(a) The cables shall consist of copper conductors insulated with PVC complying to IEC
standards Cables for three phase and single-phase circuits shall be 450/750V grade.

(b) The current carrying capacity of each circuit shall be in accordance with those
indicated in IEC 60364 and shall be limited to the specified voltage drop.

(c) All wiring shall be carried out by the loop-in system and shall be enclosed in conduits
or in metal trunking. Joints or connectors shall not be allowed in any such cable
length.

8 Cable Glands and Accessories for Armoured and Non-armoured Cables

(a) All cable glands shall be manufactured and tested to the requirements of BS6121.

(b) All cable glands shall be manufactured from unplated brass complying with the
requirements of BS2874.

(c) Cable glands for armoured cables shall be accurately machined and have water-tight
seals between outer sheath and gland, and between inner sheath and thread fixing
component, with electric bond for metallic inner sheath. The brass gland nut shall
incorporate a cone-grip armour clamp which shall be designed to ensure that each
armour wire contributes equally to the conductance of the bonding connection. Cable

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 59 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

glands for non-armoured cables shall be accurately machined and have water-tight
seals on outer and inner sheath.

(d) Each cable gland shall be supplied with a brass gland locknut, plain brass slip-on
earth tag and flame retardant PVC outer gland shroud. The earth tag shall be flat
circuit ring type and placed between the gland and the apparatus into which it is
screwed to ensure metal to metal contact between equipment/earth tag and gland.
The thread engagement shall not be reduced to below the limits as specified in
BS4683 or BS5501: Part 4 where appropriate. The PVC shroud shall totally enclose
the gland body and form an effective seal down onto the cable’s sheathing overall.

(e) The body of the cable glands shall be stamped with identification for the size, type
and manufacturer.

(f) For cables which are protected by ACBs or MCCbs, an integrally cast earth lug shall
be provided as the entry portion of cable gland for armour clamp. The lug shall be
complete with zinc passivated bolt for earthing the armour to the main earth system at
the supply end.

9 Cable Containment

(a) Cable tray

i) Power cables and ELV cabling shall not be installed in same raceway.

ii) Cable trays shall be of a perforated pattern formed from 1.6mm minimum
plain steel sheet and be hot-dipped galvanized to IEC standards.

iii) All cable trays shall be heavy duty type and shall be provided with returned
edges. The cable trays shall be joined by coupling channels giving an
increased strength at the joints. Joints by direct coupling of the connection
pieces with the holding bolts taking the bending load shall not be accepted.

iv) All cable trays shall be supported from the soffit of structural slabs and
beams by hot-dipped galvanized steel rods not less than 6mm dia. and/or
hot-dipped galvanized steel underslung angle brackets or a ‘unistut’ type
support system fixed on side walls. All bolts and nuts shall be electroplated
with zinc or cadmium minimum thickness of 25mm.

v) Cable tray supports shall be spaced according to the number and size of
cables being carried on the tray, but nowhere shall they be at greater than
1.2m intervals.

vi) Cables mounted on the trays shall be laid after installation of the tray and
spaced in accordance with IEC 60364 to avoid derating of the cables. Cables
shall be grouped in circuits and individually clipped, cleated or tied at
intervals of not less than 1.5m lengths on horizontal runs and lm lengths on
vertical runs, using PVC covered metal strip or equal and approved fixing.
Single core cables shall however be fixed with non-ferrous cable cleats or
ties.

vii) Notwithstanding the minimum gauge of metalwork specified, gauges shall be

of sufficient strength to prevent sagging between supports.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 60 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

viii) Cables leaving cable trays shall be installed properly without damage to
cables by cutting edges of trays and rubber pads shall be inserted to
underside of cables.

ix) Trays shall not be bent for change in direction of run. Manufacturer’s
standard fittings such as tees, 90 degree bends, reducers, etc. shall be used
throughout the installation. Cable trays shall be supported at either sides of
all junction and tees.

x) Where trays are exposed to the weather, they shall be coated with epoxy
resin before painting. PVC coating is not acceptable.

xi) The spacing between cables on cable trays shall not be less than 1 cable
diameter. Cables shall be fixed to tray and ladders by cleats on all vertical
runs and by cleats (or cable ties for smaller cables less than 10mm outside
diameter) on horizontal runs.

xii) Where cables pass below the structural slab, ducts shall be cast in the
structure to accommodate cable routes. All cable openings through the
structure and walls shall be sleeved.

xiii) Cable tray/ladders mounted external on roofs and other exposed locations
where there is potential for mechanical damage, shall be suitable protected
against solar radiation and mechanical damage. The protection shall be
arranged so as not to interfere with the natural ventilation of the cable tray.

xiv) All external fixings and brackets shall be fabricated of steel which is hot dip
galvanized after fabrication.

xv) All fresh cuts and surface damage shall be treated with approved zinc rich
cold galvanizing paint.

xvi) Cable tray routes shall be coordinated with the architectural features and all
the other services.

xvii) Cable trays mounted on the roof shall be perforated steel type with
intumescent epoxy coating on both sides.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 61 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C3 SMALL POWER AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

1 General Requirement

Complete conduit / trunking system, sub-main and final circuits for lighting and small power,
control circuits and wiring for electrical and lighting system shall be provided as shown on the
Drawings and as specified in this Specification.

2 Lighting Switches

(a) Lighting switches shall be of 10A rating single pole (20A for high bay lights), micro
gap type and comply with BS3676. The lighting switches shall not be derated when
used with fluorescent or inductive loads.

(b) Where switches are shown adjacent to one another on the Drawings, provide multi-
gang switch units. Segregate wiring and switches controlling circuits for different
phases.

(c) For group-switch panels, label each switch to indicate the area to be controlled.

3 Socket Outlets and Plugs

(a) Socket outlets and plugs shall be 3 pin, 5A (for floor stand light fittings), 13A or 15A
as shown on the Drawings. All socket outlets shall be switched and shuttered type
and marked with appropriate phase colour in a permanent manner.

(b) The 5A, 15A plugs and socket outlets shall comply with BS546. 13A plugs and socket
outlets shall comply with BS1363. Fuses for use in plugs shall comply with BS1362.

(c) Socket outlets shown as “twin” on the Drawings shall be dual socket outlet.

(d) Connect the earthing terminal of each socket outlet by an insulated conductor of
2.5mm² to the earthing terminal incorporated in the conduit box.

4 Fuse Connection Units

(a) Fused connection units shall be of double pole un-switched type complying with
BS5733 with flexible cord outlet and fitted with cartridge fuse links complying with
BS1362.

(b) Provide 13A fuse in the fused connection units for small power circuits, unless
otherwise specified.

5 Telephone Outlets

Telephone outlets shall be of Dual outlet type with a British Telecom approved type socket
outlet (RJ45). Conduits with draw wire and trunkings shall be provided for CAT6A cable
connecting to the ELV Racks.

Details of the RJ45 outlets are available in the ELV specification.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 62 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

6 Double pole switches

(a) Double pole switches shall be 20A, 30A or 45A, as indicated, with pilot lamps
complying with BS3676.

(b) The equipment served shall be engraved on the cover plate.

7 Trunking

(a) Trunking and fittings shall be compatible to the requirements laid down in BS 4678 :
Part 1 Class 2 and shall be fabricated with sheet steel having a nominal thickness as
follows:

Trunking Size Minimum thickness of Material

Up to 50mm x 50mm 1.0 mm
Up to 100mm x 75mm 1.2 mm
Up to 150mm x 100mm 1.4 mm
Up to 225mm x 150mm and above 1.6 mm

(b) Manufacturer's standard fittings such as tee or angle pieces, connectors etc. shall be
used throughout unless prior endorsement has been obtained from the Engineer.

(c) Trunking and fittings shall have at least Class 2 protection against corrosion in
accordance with BS 4678 : Part 1 i.(e) medium protection (e.g. electroplated zinc
having a minimum thickness of zinc coating of 0.0025 mm plus stove enamel or air
drying paint).

(d) Steel trunking shall be of square or rectangular cross section. One side of the
trunking shall be removable or hinged. No projection from screw or other sharp
object will be allowed inside the trunking.

(e) Connection between adjacent lengths of trunking, tee or angle pieces, accessories,
etc. shall be made by means of butt joints. The two adjacent ends of trunking shall
be fixed so that no relative movement can occur between them.

(f) Electrical continuity shall be achieved by means of connecting a tinned copper tape of
adequate size across the two adjacent ends of the trunking.

(g) Trunking and fittings shall have removable or hinged covers extending over the entire
length. The covers shall be of the same material and finish as those of the trunking
body.

(h) Removable covers shall be held in position on the trunking either by the quick-fix
pattern with centre captive screw or spring-on type.

(i) Bends, tee junctions, etc. shall also be fitted with removable covers.

(j) Connection between trunking and apparatus shall be by a screwed coupler and brass
male bush, or a standard flange coupling or an adapter neck, fabricated or casted.
Direct attachment of trunking to apparatus will only be permitted if cable entries are

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 63 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

provided with smooth bore bushes or grommets and the return edge of the lid of the
trunking is left intact.

(k) Where connection is made between trunking and a distribution board, the cable entry
or entries shall be sized to accept all cables from all used and 'spare' ways.

(l) Trunking shall be adequately supported through its length. Trunking support shall be
fixed at regular intervals with maximum spacing as follows:

Trunking Size Maximum Distance Between Fixings

Up to 50mm x 50mm 900mm
Up to 75mm x 75mm 1200mm
Up to 150mm x 150mm 1500mm
Up to 225mm x 150mm and above 1800mm

(m) Overhead trunking shall be suitably supported by means of hangers, brackets or

other approved devices, so that no visible sag is observed when loaded with cables.
All hangers, brackets or other approved devices shall be hot-dip galvanised mild steel
with bolt and nuts electroplated with zinc or cadmium.

(n) Cables penetrating into trunking shall be protected by screwed coupler and brass
male bush except for PVC insulated and sheathed cables if such cables form part of
a surface wiring system. In such case, the holes in the trunking, through which such
cables penetrate, shall be fitted with suitable rubber grommets to BS 1767 or
insulated bushes.

(o) Whenever trunking passes through a fire-resistant structural element, such as floor
and wall, designated as fire barrier, the opening thus formed shall be sealed with
approved type of fire resisting material according to the appropriate degree of fire
protection required. In addition, suitable internal fire barriers shall also be provided to
prevent the spread of fire or smoke through the trunking.

(p) In vertical trunking installations, internal fire barriers shall be provided between floors
or at intervals of 5m apart, whichever is the less.

(q) Every entry to the trunking shall be so placed as to prevent and/or to be protected
against the ingress of water.

(r) Holes in trunking shall be drilled, punched or cut by ring saw. After cutting, burrs and
sharp edges on the trunking shall be removed to prevent abrasion of cables.

(s) Trunking, which is installed in such a position that the cables would fall out when the
cover is removed, shall be fitted with cable retaining bars or other suitable devices to
prevent the cables from falling out.

(t) Trunking installed in a vertical plane shall contain sufficient supporting devices within
the trunking to prevent strain on the cables due to the weight of the cables, and to
prevent vertical movement of the cables.

(u) The number of cables put into a trunking shall be such that no damage is caused to
the cables or the trunking. In determining the size of the trunking required for a

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 64 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

particular installation, the "unit system" method as recommended by the IEE Wiring
Regulations shall be adopted.

(v) Where more than three loaded conductors or more than one multi-core cables are
enclosed in a common trunking, suitable correction factor for grouping, as
recommended by the IEE Wiring Regulations, shall be applied in determining the size
of the cables to be installed.

(w) Where a common trunking is used to accommodate cables for different circuit
categories, they shall be effectively segregated by means of partitions or dividers.
The partitions or dividers shall be adequately secured to the body of the trunking.

8 Conduit System

Metallic conduit system shall be provided in the development.

(a) G.I. Conduits and Conduit Accessories

i) Steel conduit shall be approved best quality welded, heavy gauge, mild steel,
enamelled or galvanised conduit complying with BS.4568: 1970 and any
subsequent modifications thereto, and not less than 16 mm. diameter. Each
length of conduit shall bear a stamp guaranteeing it to be to this
Specification.

ii) The inside surfaces and ends of the erected conduit and all fittings shall be
smooth and free from burrs and other defects.

iii) Flexible conduit shall be watertight flexible metallic conduit complying with
BS.731: 1952. The flexible conduit shall terminate in clamp type connectors
and a 2.5 sq.mm. copper earth continuity conductor shall be run from an
earth terminal in the conduit box to the earth terminal on the equipment.

iv) Flexible conduit shall be connected to rigid conduit via boxes securely fixed
to the walls, etc. IP54 internal installation and IP67 external installation.

v) Nuts, bolts and washes shall be hot dip galvanized steel (centrifuged) to BS
EN ISO 1461: 1999.

vi) Power cables and ELV cabling shall not be installed in same raceway.

vii) Before any work on the installation is started, this Contractor shall prepare
shop drawings of proposed conduit runs showing the number, size and circuit
reference of all conductors to the satisfaction of Engineer prior to the
commencement of works.

viii) The Engineer's endorsement shall not relieve this Contractor from liability in
respect to the provision of an adequate number and/or sizes of conduits for
the installation.

- All conduits and fittings used in the installation, except flexible conduits,
shall be heavy gauge, screwed, steel, longitudinally welded, solid
drawn, galvanised on both internal and external surfaces, in
accordance with BS 4568, Class 4.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 65 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

- The minimum size of conduit used in the installation shall be 20 mm

diameter.

- Separate conduits shall be provided for wiring of different extra low

voltage systems.

- Conduits shall be installed to enable "loop-in" wiring to be carried out.

- Inspection-type and non-inspection type conduit bends, elbows and

tees shall not be used.

- Conduit systems shall be electrically and mechanically continuous and

watertight after installation. They shall be arranged, wherever possible,
to be self-draining to conduit outlet points for equipment. The system
when installed, and before wiring, shall be kept plugged with wooden
plugs.

- This Contractor shall make good any damage to the finish of all
conduits (including threads cut at site) by painting two coats of anti-rust
paint to match the non-damaged galvanized surface.

- All bends in conduit shall be formed on site by bending machines.

- Runs between draw-in boxes shall not have more than two right angle
bends or their equivalent and the length of such runs shall be limited to
10m to permit easy draw-in of cables.

- In concealed conduit systems all adaptable boxes for accessories and

draw-in boxes shall be installed such that the outer rim of the box is
flush with the finished surface of the wall.

- All conduits shall be entirely separated from other piping services and
no circuit connections shall be permitted between the conduits and
such pipes.

- Conduits and outlets fixed in area where there is waterproofing to

building shall be installed with no damage to the waterproofing.

- All conduit systems shall be effectively earthed. Before any cable is

drawn into the conduit, a test for continuity of the system shall be
carried out and the result of the test shall be notified by this Contractor
to the Engineer.

- Where a conduit crosses an expansion joint, special arrangement shall

be made to allow relative movement to occur on either side of the
expansion joint. A separate circuit protective conductor shall be
installed to maintain an effective electrical continuity across the
expansion joint. The circuit protective conductor shall have a cross-
sectional area rated to suit the largest live conductors drawn into the
conduits in accordance with the IEE Wiring Regulation.

- The maximum number of cables permitted in one conduit shall be in

accordance with the IEE Regulations.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 66 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

- Each conductor inside the conduit run shall be of one continuous

length. Joints in a conductor in any part of a run shall not be permitted
unless approved by the Engineer.

- Circular boxes, dome covers shall be malleable cast iron, galvanized in

accordance with BS 4568 Part 2 Class 4. Ceiling mounted circular
boxes shall have an internal depth of not less than 60 mm.

- Adapter boxes complete with covers shall be of cast iron, galvanized or

sheet steel having Class 4 protection against corrosion in accordance
with BS 4568: Part 2. Boxes shall be not less than 50 mm deep and of
such dimensions to enable the largest size cable to be drawn in the
conduits without excessive bending of the cables.

- Metal boxes for the enclosure of electrical accessories shall be in

accordance with BS 4662. 35 mm deep and 47 mm deep boxes shall
be used to house accessories such as domestic switches, socket
outlets, etc. Boxes shall have heavy duty protection against corrosion
in accordance with BS 4662.

- BS 4662 box shall be used in concealed or cast-in purpose. For

surface mounting, hot-dipped galvanized adapter box shall be used.

- All conduit entries to adapter boxes, outlet boxes and switchgear shall
be made with couplings and hexagonal male bushes.

- Samples of the conduit boxes shall be submitted for approval prior to

the installation.

(b) PVC Conduits and Conduit Accessories

i) Power cables and ELV cabling shall not be installed in same raceway.

ii) Before any work on the installation is started, the Contractor shall prepare
shop drawings of proposed conduit runs showing the number, size and circuit
reference of all conductors to the satisfaction of Engineer prior to the
commencement of works.

iii) The Engineer's endorsement shall not relieve the Contractor from liability in
respect to the provision of an adequate number and/or sizes of conduits for
the installation.

- All conduits and fittings used in the installation, except flexible conduits,
shall be heavy gauge complying with BS4607: Part 1 and BS6099:
Section 2.2 or IEC 614-2-2, Type A.

- The minimum size of conduit used in the installation shall be 20 mm

diameter.

- Separate conduits shall be provided for wiring of different extra low

voltage systems.

- Conduits shall be installed to enable "loop-in" wiring to be carried out.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 67 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

- Inspection-type and non-inspection type conduit bends, elbows and

tees shall not be used.

- Runs between draw-in boxes shall not have more than two right angle
bends or their equivalent and the length of such runs shall be limited to
10m to permit easy draw-in of cables.

- In concealed conduit systems all adaptable boxes for accessories and

draw-in boxes shall be installed such that the outer rim of the box is
flush with the finished surface of the wall.

- All conduits shall be entirely separated from other piping services and
no circuit connections shall be permitted between the conduits and
such pipes.

- Conduits and outlets fixed in area where there is waterproofing to

building shall be installed with no damage to the waterproofing.

- A separate circuit protective conductor shall be installed to maintain an

effective electrical continuity in the PVC conduits.

- Where a conduit crosses an expansion joint, special arrangement shall

be made to allow relative movement to occur on either side of the
expansion joint. A separate circuit protective conductor shall be
installed to maintain an effective electrical continuity across the
expansion joint. The circuit protective conductor shall have a cross-
sectional area rated to suit the largest live conductors drawn into the
conduits in accordance with the IEE Wiring Regulation.

- The maximum number of cables permitted in one conduit shall be in

accordance with the IEE Regulations.

- Each conductor inside the conduit run shall be of one continuous

length. Joints in a conductor in any part of a run shall not be permitted
unless approved by the Engineer.

- All PVC conduits accessories shall comply with BS4607, as applicable.

- All conduits shall be jointed and terminated in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions. Permanent adhesive shall be used where
rigid water-tight joints are required, in conjunction with standard
couplers and accessories. Flexible adhesive shall be used where
expansion facilities are required in long conduit runs, in conjunction
with expansion couplers.

- Conduits up to 25mm diameter may bend cold with the appropriate

bending spring (obtained from the conduit manufacturer) inserted
internally. The inner radius of every conduit bend shall be not less than
2.5 times the outside diameter of the conduit.

- Where bending larger size conduits, the section to be bent shall be

heated uniformly until it is pliable. When the conduit is well heated, it
shall be bent around a suitable former with the appropriate bending
spring inserted internally.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 68 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

- Adequate allowance shall be made for linear expansion and

contraction of the conduits under normal working temperature.
Expansion couplers shall be used on all straight runs of conduit
exceeding 6m in length. Conduit shall be free to slide within saddles.
- Special consideration shall be given to the fixing of accessories in
situation where the temperature fluctuates excessively. Oversized or
slotted fixing holes shall be used.
- Conduits shall be supported with saddles at a distance not exceeding
1.2m in accessible positions. Where working temperatures tend to be
high, the spacing shall be reduced accordingly.
- Samples of the conduit boxes shall be submitted for approval prior to
the installation.

(c) Flexible Conduit

i) Flexible conduit shall be used for final connections to equipment subject to

vibration. Maximum length of use shall be limited to 1.2 meters (subject to
Engineers’ approval.

ii) Flexible conduit and fittings shall comply with BS 731: Part 1:1980. The
flexible conduit shall have a galvanized steel helical coiled inner core of the
square locked type. The core shall be over sheathed with a contoured PVC
jacket (complying to BS 476 Part 6 and 7 and FSD requirements for
installation inside ventilated ceiling) so that the flexibility of the steel inner
core is not restricted.

iii) The adapters shall be of nickel-plated brass made in two parts. The inner
core shall screw into the bore of the conduit together with a ferrule which
caps off the end of the conduit. The core shall lock against the outer ferrule
which provides a smooth edge for threading of cables.

iv) Where the conduits are installed exposed in weather or subject to water
intrusion, the PVC over sheathed jacket and all conduit fittings shall provide
waterproofing to IP54 (BS 5490: 1977).

v) A separate earth wire shall be enclosed in every length of flexible conduit.

(d) UPVC DUCTS

i) Electrical Cable Ducts – uPVC pipes & fittings to comply with
DIN 8062 Class 6 with Nylon rope
ii) Telephone Ducts – 56D uPVC pipes & fittings for Telephone ducts
with Nylon rope as per Etisalat requirements
iii) Cable Ducts to be installed in hard standing areas. Refer drawings for exact
routing and dept. Direct buried cabling is permitted only in soft landscape
areas.

9 CONDUITS INSTALLATION

(a) Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

(b) Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
(c) Conduit Support:

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 69 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

i) Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26

0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having
jurisdiction.
ii) Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support
from piping, ductwork, or other systems.
(d) Connections and Terminations:

i) Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to
another.
ii) Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to
protect conductors.
iii) Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and
electrical continuity.
(e) Penetrations:

i) Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including

footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.
ii) Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
iii) Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate
installation. Set sleeves
iv) flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
v) Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
vi) Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first
accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases with approved w/p
sealant.
vii) Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to
maintain integrity of membrane.
viii) Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment
openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations.
Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to
preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty.
ix) Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with
submittals.
x) Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other
elements, using materials and methods specified.

(f) Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide
expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed
conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:

i) Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or

deflection.
ii) Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

(g) Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential
substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing
compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This
includes, but is not limited to:

i) Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.

ii) Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned
interior spaces.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 70 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

10 Particular Specification for Wiring Accessories

Product Range
Sr. No. Item Picture Item Description Location (Finishes/Colors)

1 Gang Bell Push PC Slimline Decorative

1 Switch (Screwless)
PVC White

20A 1 Gang 1-2 PC Slimline Decorative

2 Way Switch (Screwless)
PVC White

20A 2 Gang 1-2 PC Slimline Decorative

3 Way Switch (Screwless)
PVC White

20A 3 Gang 1-2 PC Slimline Decorative

4 Way Switch (Screwless)
PVC White

20A DP Switch
w/LED Indicator PC Slimline Decorative
5 - WATER HEATER (Screwless)
- WASHING PVC White
MACHINE
- GAS DETECTOR
- COOKER
IGNITION
- CHF / HAND
DRYER, ETC.

13A DP Single PC Slimline Decorative

6 Switch Socket – (Screwless)
Dual Earth PVC White

13A DP Twin PC Slimline Decorative

7 Switch Socket – (Screwless)
Dual Earth PVC White

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 71 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Dual Voltage PC Slimline Decorative

8 Shaver Socket (Screwless)
IP41 PVC White

1 Gang Faceplate, PC Slimline Decorative

Single Opening + (Screwless)
RJ45 Adopter PVC White
9 Shutter Frame only.

2 Gang Faceplate, PC Slimline Decorative

10 Single Opening + (Screwless)
2 RJ45 Adopter PVC White
Shutter Frame only.

+ +
13A Switched Spur PC Slimline Decorative
outlet w/LED, Front (Screwless)
11 Flex PVC White

13A Switched Spur PC Slimline Decorative

outlet w/LED, Front (Screwless)
12 Flex PVC White

25A Flex outlet for 800 Moulded White Plastic

Fixed Appliance
13

Doorbell, 230v PC Slimline Decorative

14 built-in Transformer (Screwless)
PVC White

4-Pin Plugin type PVC White Plastic

15 Ceiling Rose

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 72 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

20A 1 Gang 1-2

Way Switch Metal Clad Grey Enameled
16 Supplied with Metal
Clad Back Box

20A 2 Gang 1-2 Metal Clad Grey Enameled

Way Switch
17 Supplied with Metal
Clad Back Box

13A DP Single
Switch Socket – Metal Clad Grey Enameled
18 Dual Earth
Supplied with Metal
Clad Back Box
13A DP Twin Metal Clad Grey Enameled
Switch Socket –
19 Dual Earth
Supplied with Metal
Clad Back Box
20A 1 Gang 1-2
Way Switch Nexus Storm W/P IP66
20 Weatherproof IP66, White
Supplied with Back
Box
13A DP Single
Switch Socket – Nexus Storm W/P IP66
21 Dual Earth White
Weatherproof IP66,
Supplied with Back
Box

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 73 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

SPART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C4 GENERAL LIGHTING

1 General and System Requirement

(a) This specification is for the design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
the Primary Lighting Installation to the sites.

(b) The prime purpose of this document is to produce a technical facility of a consistent
and high installation standard.

(c) The supplier shall be responsible for the detailed design, manufacture, works test and
delivery of the equipment required to provide lighting/luminaires to site.

(d) The lighting to be supplied and installed shall be suitable for internal environment, for
building user, and an economic life of 10 to 15 years.

(e) Equipment shall comply generally with IEC950 and flammability rating shall be
appropriate for installation in a non-hazardous environment. Protection against
electro-magnetic emissions to EMC Class “B” is required.

(f) All equipment shall be new and preferably manufactured under quality control
conditions certified to ISO9000.

(g) The electrical equipment supplied and installed shall conform in design, materials and
performance with

IEC 60364 (all sub sections)

IEC 60614
IEC 60898
IEC 61084
IEC 61200-52
IEC 61048
BS 546 - Specification. Two-pole and earthing-pin plugs, socket-outlets and socket
outlet adaptors (including Supplement No. 1 Specification for plugs made of resilient
material)
BS 559 - Specification for design, construction and installation of signs
BS 1075 - Specification for tungsten halogen lamps (non-vehicle) – N/A
BS 1362 - Specification for general purpose fuse links for domestic and similar
purposes (primarily for use in plugs)
BS 1853 Part 2 - Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting service. Specification
for lamps used in the United Kingdom not included in BS EN 60081, BS EN 60901,
BS EN 61195 and BS EN 61199 BS
4533 - Luminaires
BS 4683 Part 1 - Specification for electrical apparatus for explosive atmospheres.
Classification of maximum surface temperatures
BS 4683 Part 2 - Specification for electrical apparatus for explosive atmospheres.
The construction and testing of flameproof enclosures of electrical apparatus BS EN
13032-3:2007 - Measurement and presentation of photometric data of lamps and
luminaires.
BS 5499 Part 1 - Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols. Specification for fire
safety signs

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 74 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

BS 5499 Part 3 - Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols. Specification for
internally illuminated fire safety signs
BS EN 60079-18:2015 - Explosive atmospheres. Equipment protection by
encapsulation
BS EN 40 - Lighting columns
BS 7693 - Guide to uses of infra-red transmission and the prevention or control of
interference between systems
BS 7895 - Specification for bayonet lamp holders with enhanced safety
BS EN 60079-11:2012 - Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres.
Intrinsic safety 'i'
BS EN 50102 - Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment
against external mechanical impacts (IK code)
BS EN 50107 - Signs and luminous-discharge-tube installations operating from a no-
load rated output voltage exceeding 1 kV but not exceeding 10 kV
BS EN 55015 - Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance
Characteristics of electrical lighting and similar equipment
BS EN 60061-1 - Specification for lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the
control of inter-changeability and safety. Lamps caps
BS EN 60061-2 - Specification for lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the
control of inter-changeability and safety. Lamp holders
BS EN 60064 - Tungsten filament lamps for domestic and similar general lighting
purposes. Performance requirements
-CIBSE Code for Interior Lighting
-CIBSE Lighting Guides
NOTE: ONLY LED LUMINAIRE FITTINGS ACCEPTED.
Strictly adhered to the approved Vendor List

(h) The internal lighting installation shall be designed in accordance with the CIBSE Code
for Interior Lighting LC1 and shall be fluorescent linear or compact source fluorescent.
Any applicable standards rules or regulations pertaining to the design of the lighting
system shall be adhered to for country of installation.

(i) Unless otherwise advised the reflectance factors used in calculating the lighting levels
shall be 50% ceiling, 50% walls, 10% floors.

(j) Co-efficient of utilization shall be taken from the selected manufacturer’s data only for
the luminaires proposed. The use of general data or that of another manufacturer
who manufactures similar luminaires shall not be permitted.

(k) Light loss factors shall be calculated assuming lamps and luminaires cleaning once
every 2 years, room surface cleaning once every 5 years, lamps are changed ad hoc
when failure occurs.

(l) All fluorescent luminaires shall be equipped with high frequency control gear.

(m) Lamps shall be selected so that sites standardize on length to reduce the range of
spares.

(n) Provide spare luminaires, control gear, lamps and louvers as listed hereinafter.
1- Lamps. Provide 5% spare lamps & tubes of each lamp & tube type and rating with a
minimum of 10 lamps or tubes of each type and rating.
2- Control Gear. Provide 5% control gear of each control gear type and rating with a
minimum of 3 control gear per type and rating.
3- Louvers & Lenses. Provide 5% spare lenses & louvers of each type.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 75 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(o) Contractor shall protect all openings edge in gypsum false ceiling by a protection
means to engineer’s approval.

(p) Each lighting fixture shall have a manufacturer’s label affixed to it and shall comply
with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.

(q) All fixtures shall be protected from damage during the installation and any broken
fixtures, globes, sockets, stems, and the like, shall be replaced with new parts, without
additional cost of the Employer.

(r) The right to select other fixtures of the same quality, without additional cost to the
Employer is reserved by the Engineer regarding the shape of the lighting luminaire.

2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

(a) The lighting installation shall comprise the final sub-circuit wiring from local distribution
boards run in a containment system to luminaires generally installed at high level.

(b) Generally, all lighting shall be controlled by local switches adjacent the point of entry
to the room or area. Where more than one entry point is provided, 2-way lighting
switches shall be mounted by each door controlling the points of entry.

(c) In large open plan areas localized light switches shall be provided to comply with
Local Energy Conservation regulations.

(d) Unless otherwise described, lighting switches shall be wall mounted rocker type of a
suitable capacity for the load switched and shall have flush or surface cover plates to
suit the conduit installation.

(e) Where areas/rooms have been provided with accessible false ceiling voids the
containment system shall be installed within the void.

(f) Lighting circuit cables shall be sized to suit the load, protective device, grouping and
voltage drop allowable.

(g) Luminaires shall be loop wired phase and neutral with final connections via plug and
socket arrangement within false ceiling and via fixed based connectors for conduit
systems. Do not loop directly into the luminaires. External joint boxes shall not be
permitted.

(h) Final connections shall be in heat resistant cord or over-sheathing (Butyl flexible
cable).

(i) Provide luminaires of the type and performance indicated on the Luminaire schedules
and drawings.

(j) Provide fixtures as shown on the drawings and as indicated in Architectural Lighting
Fixture Schedule, complete with all specified lamps, completely wired, controlled and
securely attached to supports.

(k) Fixture Types: Type of fixture shall be as indicated on the drawings and Architectural
Lighting Fixture Schedule.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 76 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(l) Lamps: Lamps for each type of fixture shall be as indicated on the drawings and
Luminaire schedule.

(m) Coordination: Coordinate installation, connection, and securing of all luminaire

schedule with adjacent construction and with all other applicable trades to a total
system that is complete and finished in appearance.

(n) Completeness: The specifications and drawings pertaining to this scope of work, are
intended to convey the salient features, function and character of the fixtures only, and
do not undertake to illustrate or set forth every item or detail necessary for the
complete installation of the work.

(o) Minor Details: Minor details, not usually indicated on the drawings nor specified, but
are necessary for the proper execution, completion and installation of the fixtures,
shall be included, as if, they were herein specified or indicated on the drawings.

(p) Omissions and Clarifications: Where any fixture type or lamping designated has been
omitted or cannot be determined by the Contractor, request a clarification from the
Architect and provide the fixture type as directed.
(q) Where an inconsistency in the specifications and/or the drawings is determined by the
Contractor, request a clarification from the Design team and provide as there will be
no increase in cost permitted to correct any inconsistency within the documents so
long as the overall intent of the work scope is not changed.

3 LUMINAIRES

(a) All light fittings shall be capable of mounting and relamping from below without use of
special tools and without the removal of any part of the luminaires other than the
diffusers if fitted.

(b) Movable parts of luminaires shall generally be made so that gravity assists in retaining
them in a safe position or by other specified or approved means. Locking devices
shall be positive. Movement shall not cause any straining or chafing of insulated
wiring.

(c) Each luminaire shall be supplied as a complete set comprising the main part, reflector,
diffuser, control gear, lamp holder, internal wiring, terminal blocks, integral earth and
bonding terminals, lamp tubes or bulbs, fixing bolts and nuts, cable entry hole, and
other accessories as appropriate. The complete set of each type of luminaires with all
components and accessories, with the probable exception of the lamp tubes and
bulbs shall be supplied by a single imported proprietary manufacturer who is
specialized in luminaire manufacturing for at least five years with well-known proven
production quality, unless otherwise specified or approved for individual cases by the
Engineer.

(d) All light fittings shall utilize internal wiring of minimum 1.0 mm2 heat resistant copper
cable and shall be provided, appropriately colour coded, neatly wired and properly
terminated. Terminal blocks shall be capable of accepting looping in cable up to 2.5
mm2. All luminaires shall be equipped with earthing and bonding points and shall be
properly earthed and bonded.

(e) Generally, all luminaires shall have good and slightly appearance. They shall have a
minimum area of horizontal or near horizontal surfaces on which dust may settle. Any
dust accumulated on the luminaires shall be easily removable by simple cleaning

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 77 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

methods. The external surfaces of luminaires shall be smooth and free from
apertures or crevices as far as possible. All finishes shall be permanent and be able
to withstand frequent application of cleaning agents.

(f) All recessed light fittings shall be suspended and shall match the adjacent ceiling grids
and panels, air conditioning ductwork, other services and support brackets but be
independent of them. The luminaires shall be adequately supported in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
contractor shall liaise fully with and all relevant parties for the installation of recessed
luminaires.

(g) Lamp holders shall be non-inflammable and non-conductive when installed. The lamp
holders shall be adjustable to allow manufacturing tolerance (within the
manufacturer’s specification) in the length of lamps.

(h) Inter-component wiring shall be in 105°C 450V flame retardant silicone rubber and
shall be neatly secured within the luminaire to prevent undue loosening of contacts.
Where wiring passes through any metal section of the fitting, it shall be protected by
an approved grommet, and be double insulated. All wiring shall be concealed from
view when the light fitting is installed. Earthing of each fitting shall be made via the
20 mm conduit entry. Each luminaire shall be provided with built-in fuse for
protection.

(j) The main part of each luminaire shall be constructed form substantive mild steel sheet
of minimum thickness of 0.9 mm, cold rolled made to IEC standards. It shall be
pretreated to prohibit corrosion on both sides, with hot alkali degreasing, and with a
layer of iron of zinc phosphate, two coats of primer and a finish of glass white stoved
enamel or epoxy polyester continuous panel piece to give a rigid structure on its own,
further strengthened by ribs as necessary.

(k) At least two knockouts, one of 25 mm dia. and the other of 20 mm dia, shall be
provided for termination of supply conduit on the vertical side of the casing as close to
the fused terminal block as possible.

(l) All tubes and fittings shall provide satisfactory starting with switch and switch less start
control gear operated on voltage and frequency pertaining to country of installation.

(m) All internal wiring shall be PVC insulated heat resistant copper cable of minimum 1
mm2 approximately, neatly wired and properly terminated.

4 Control Gear

(a) All electrical control gear shall be totally built into the fitting assembly. Separate
ballast, starter and power factor correction capacitor shall be provided for individual
lamp.

(b) Ballasts shall comply with BSEN60920 and BSEN60921 or IEC920 and IEC921.

(c) Power factor correction capacitors complying to BSEN61047 and BSEN61048 or

IEC1047 and IEC1048 shall be provided to correct the power factor for each lamp to
not less than 0.9 lagging two hours after continuous operation of the lamp. All
capacitors shall be fitted with suitable internal discharge resistor.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 78 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(d) Starters shall be complete with bases and shall comply with BSEN60155. A radio
interference suppression capacitor shall be fitted internally within the starter.

(e) Control gear shall be suitably selected to suit the requirements on switching and/or
dimming control as specified on the Drawings.

(f) Radio interference suppressor shall be provided where necessary.

(g) All ballasts shall be naturally cooled polyester-filled type, class A insulated complying
with IEC standards.

(h) All starters shall comply fully with IEC 60155: 1995. The canister shall be made of
electrically safe and non-corrosive material capable of withstanding high
temperatures. A ceramic disc type radio interference suppression capacitor shall be
fitted internally to each canister. Waxed paper and foil type capacitors will not be
accepted.

(i) All electrical control gear shall be totally built into the light fitting assembly and shall
provide for electronic ballasts operation. Ballasts shall be designed to suit nominal
supply of voltage and frequency.

(j) Control gear and wiring assemblies shall be sprayed with an approved non-hardening
lacquer coating to prevent the ingress of water moisture. All control gear, tubes,
fixtures and accessories shall be of the same manufacture as the luminaire.

5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed
under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of
supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of
luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations.
2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork,
piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other
potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or
other potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by
others.
4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to
obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

6 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer shall provide 2 sets of full system submittals, one copy of which will be
returned with comments and action. Submittals shall include two of each of the
following:
1. Shop Drawings: Where indicated for specific Fitting types in Architectural
Lighting Fixture Schedule, Submit full-size shop drawings cross-referenced to
contract documents, indicating name of project, Fitting type, construction of
Fitting, dimensions, material thickness, finishes, joints, lamping, anchorages,
and relationship to adjacent materials and complete details and/or data of

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 79 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Fittings, including Manufacturer’s name, catalog number for lamp holders,

transformers, ballasts, metal gauges, independent test reports, photometric
data, type of wiring, color and texture of finishes.
a. No variation from the general arrangement and details indicated on
the contract document drawings shall be made on the shop drawings
unless required to suit the actual conditions on the project, and then
only with the written acceptance of the Architect.
b. All variations must be clearly indicated as such on the shop drawings
submitted for approval.
2. Cut Sheets: For all Fitting types, and where shop drawings are not specifically
indicated for submission, submit standard drawings, or cut sheets, including
product data and photometric data.
3. Lamping: For all Fitting types submit cut sheets for lamping including
manufacturer, manufacturer’s catalog number; and quantity of lamps per
Fitting.
4. Samples: Where indicated for specific Fitting types in Architectural Lighting
Fixture Schedule, a sample will be required for the purpose of ascertaining its
performance, quality of parts and details, maintenance features, Method of
installation and safety features. Samples must be wired for simple plug-in
operation for evaluation purposes. Samples to be shipped prepaid by the
contractor to the Architect, or as otherwise advised. No payment shall be
required for samples and will be submitted at no additional cost to the Owner.
Samples submitted for evaluation purposes may not be returned, at the
discretion of the architect, nor are they to be included in the quantities listed
for the project
a. For each sample Luminaire submitted, submit photometric data from
an independent laboratory, of the submitted sample.
b. All sample Fittings must be tested and labeled by Underwriters’
c. Laboratories mc, and bear such label affixed to each fitting in such a
position as to conceal it from normal view.
d. Luminaire samples and photometric data shall be submitted for final
review within thirty (30) days after receipt of reviewed shop
drawings. If after a period of thirty (30) days from submittal of
sample, the Fitting cannot be made acceptable, then a Fitting, (shop
drawing and sample), by an alternate specified Manufacturer, as
selected by the architect, shall be submitted for review, and provided
to the project, at no additional cost to the Owner.
e. Construction time permitting, and then only with the written
acceptance of the Architect, ample Fittings may be submitted for
review of workmanship and material finishes only, prior to the
submittal of the complete working sample. The approval of a sample
for workmanship and material finishes does not negate the
requirement for submission of the complete working sample
including photometric data.
5. Maintenance Manual: Prior to the completion of the project submit, for
incorporation into the overall project maintenance manual, recommended
maintenance requirements from the manufacturers of each Fitting type,
including:
a. A quantity of two (2) of any special tools required.
b. Types of cleaners to be used.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 80 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

c. Replacement parts identification lists and local contacts for all

Fittings, including all lamps.
d. Recommended maintenance schedule and procedures.
e. Final as-built shop drawings for all Fittings that required shop
drawing submittals.
B. Mock-ups: If required by Article, Mock-ups, make submittals required for mock-up
construction and obtain necessary approvals prior to commencement of mock-up
construction. Submit Mock-up Shop Drawings of each mock-up, showing materials,
dimensions, details, hardware, Fitting, lamping, and proposed mock-up location.
C. Contractor Statement: With all submittals, provide a statement declaring that the
contractor has coordinated all lighting Fittings and Fitting drawings with the drawings
and details of the Architectural, Structural, Electrical, Mechanical, and other related
trades to assure an accurate and efficient installation.

7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor’s Quality Assurance Responsibilities: Contractor is solely responsible for quality

control of the Work.

B. Quality: All fixtures, lamping, accessories, and materials, shall be new and free from defects
which in any manner may impair their character, appearance, durability and function.

C. Replacement of Damaged Fixtures: All blemished, damaged, or unsatisfactory fixtures shall

not be installed. All blemished, damaged, or unsatisfactory fixtures shall be replaced in a
satisfactory manner as directed by the Architect.

D. Listing: All fixtures shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the appropriate and current
requirements of the Local Code as verified by a testing agency as acceptable to local code
authorities. Such a listing shall be provided for each fixture type, and the appropriate
applicable regulatory agency label or labels shall be affixed to each fixture in such a position
as to conceal it from normal view. Listing and labels shall be provided for IP ratings
as required, and as specified herein.

E. Substitutions: The lighting designated for this project is based on fixture types and lamping as
specified. Identification of specified fixtures and lamping by means of manufacturers’ names
and catalog numbers is to establish basic features, aesthetics and performance standards.
Any substitutions must meet or exceed these standards. If substitution of fixtures, and/or
lamping, other than those specified is desired, provide the following information noted below,
for both the specified fixture and lamping, and the proposed equal substitute fixture and
lamping, for evaluation by the Architect F. Product Requirements.
1. Fixtures submitted for substitution are required to have been in commercial use for at
least one (1) year unless otherwise noted.
2. Submit all performance data noted below in paragraph, Equality.
3. At the discretion and request of the Architect, and at no additional cost to the Owner,
provide lamped, working samples of both the specified fixture and the proposed substitute
fixture for evaluation by the architect. Samples must be wired for simple plug-in operation
for evaluation purposes. Samples to be shipped prepaid by the contractor to the Architect,
or as otherwise advised. Samples submitted for evaluation purposes will not be returned,
nor are they to be included in the quantities listed for the project.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 81 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

F. The average lighting power density (LPD) should not exceed those values given in DM Green
Building regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible to propose high efficient lighting
fixtures to meet the same.
8 Particular Specification for Light Fittings
Refer Lighting Layout

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 82 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C5 LIGHITNG CONTROL SYSTEM DEVICES

1 General

a) Common Area / Public Area lighting:

1. All lights in the lift lobbies, corridors, passages, back of house, toilets should be
controlled using a movement/presence detector, Time schedule and central control.
Lighting Circuits should be designed to achieve a minimum light level (for example 35%)
during non-activity period. Staircases can be either on Movement detector or Timer push
button. During an emergency the lights should automatically be switched ON until the
situation is restored.
b) Exterior Lighting:
1. Lights catering the external areas like open car parks, gardens, lawns and façades
should be controlled based on daylight. A 3-channel light value switch capable of
switching up to three lighting groups where each individual channel has a separate
switching set point shall be used. The brightness range of the set points shall be
adjustable from 1 to 20000 lux as agreed with the consultant/client at the time of
commissioning. A light sensor shall be connected to the switch to detect daylight. In
addition, these lights shall be controlled in combination with a timer according to the
schedules proposed by the client or the consultant in line to the availability of the natural
light. Astronomical clock shall schedule the timer to calculate the daytime as during
different months of a year.
c) Staircase lights:
1. All staircase lights shall be controlled via wall mounted movement detectors with built-in
Auto/manual override switch.

2 Time Control Modules

a) For energy efficient automation, selected lighting shall be controlled via predefined time
schedules according to the usage of the property.
b) Lighting circuits can be either switched off, or in case of dimmable circuits, set to a specified
light value (e.g. 30 %) to allow a basic ambient lighting.
c) Features:
- 800 memory locations
- Astronomical function with automatic calculation of sunrise and sunset times
- Operation on the device with display backlight
- Transfer of time programs via memory card or via the KNX bus
- Automatic summer/winter time changeover
- Holiday and random programs
- Protection against unauthorized access (PIN)
- 8 years power reserve (lithium backup battery)
- Number of timed channels: 8
- Supply voltage: 110…240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 83 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

- Mounting: 35 mm mounting rail, IEC/EN 60 715

3 Presence Detectors

a) An occupancy-dependent control is a control method that uses motion or presence detectors.

It shall detect the presence of persons inside the building or in external areas and turn the
corresponding lighting on or off. If dimmable lighting circuits are used, the light value can be
reduced to a certain level (e.g. 30 %), if no presence is detected. Additionally,
b) Presence detection can be also combined with constant lighting control to increase the
energy efficiency. For this control mode, a presence detector with in built-in constant lighting
controllers shall be used.
c) Features
- Configurable as master or slave (for multiple detectors operations)
- Programmable Modes: Automatic, automatic activation or deactivation
- PIR sensors, with integrated brightness sensor and temperature sensor and IR
receiver.
- Detection range (for mounting height 2.5 m, 3 m and 4 m): circular 8m, 10m, 14m
respectively.
- Brightness limit value: 1…1,000 Lux
- Power supply: Via KNX,
- Connection: Bus connection terminal
- Type of protection: IP 20, IEC/EN 60 529
- Temperature range: -5 °C to 45 °C

4 Ceiling/Wall Mounted Motion Sensors

a) The sensor shall be able to control up to 30 different KNX group addresses. The movement
detector also has a photo-electric sensor function. This function triggers telegrams when the
brightness level exceeds or falls below set values. Using a slide switch, the movement
detector shall switch between the three operating modes ON/AUTOMATIC/OFF.
b) The switch can be locked in the neutral position using the screw supplied.
c) Features:
- Sensor angle: 220° horizontal (adjustable arm)
- Maximum range: approximately 16 m (at installation height of 2.5 m and
horizontal alignment)
- Protection class: IP 55 per DIN 40 050 post installation
- Operating temp. range: -25 °C to 55 °C

5 Brightness detectors (Photocells):

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 84 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

a) The Brightnes detectors shall be installed outdoors and detects different lux levels of Day
light from 1 to 20,000 lx, the light sensor shall be IP 65 and shall comply with EN 60 529.
b) External lighting loads shall be logically controlled via DIN Rail mounted device which is
connected to the KNX bus.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 85 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C6 EARTHING SYSTEM

1 General

(a) This section of the Specification covers the design, supply, installation, testing,
commissioning, and setting to work of complete earthing networks as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein, in respect of LV electrical earthing and telephone
earthing.

(b) A ‘clean’ earth 70mm² copper bar riser shall as well be installed and shall be
connected to ‘clean’ earth bar similar to the earth bar and installed in each electrical
room. This bar shall provide clean earth to all the clean earth power outlets.

(c) All LV switchboards shall be provided with two (2) earth pit connected to earth
marshalling bar (50 x 12 mm) with 1c 150 mm2 G/Y PVC earth cable. Earth pits to be
located in the Raft foundation interconnected via cables in 80 mm UPVC duct cast in
the slab.

(d) Generators shall be provided with two (2) earth pit connected to earth marshalling bar
(50 x 12 mm) with 1c 150 mm2 G/Y PVC earth cable. Earth pits to be located in the
Raft foundation interconnected via cables in 80 mm UPVC duct cast in the slab.

(e) Transformers shall be provided with dedicated neutral earthing pits connected to the
neutral side of the transformer with 1c 150 mm2 G/Y PVC earth cable. Earth pits to
be located as directed and approved by DEWA.

(f) All enclosures, equipment, exposed conductive parts, extraneous conductive parts,
metallic trunking, metallic conduits, metallic cable trays and other metalwork, other
than any live part, forming protection to or part of the electrical installation, including
apparatus and appliances, curtain wall, building structure, doors in electric
rooms/substation etc... shall be provided with equipotential bonding and effectively
connected to earth.

(g) Remove non-conductive coatings from threads or other contact surfaces to ensure
good electrical continuity.

(h) Protect all exposed grounding conductors from mechanical damage.

(i) All joints shall be of thermo-weld and soldered joints are not permitted.

(j) All metal poles supporting outdoor lighting fixtures shall be earthed using earth rod
and earth pit.

(k) Drive earth rods until tops are 50mm below finished floor or final grade, except as
otherwise indicated and interconnect with earthing electrode conductors without
damaging copper coating or exposing steel.

(l) Route the earthing conductors along the shortest and straight paths possible,
avoiding obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to
strain, impact or damage.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 86 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(m) Lay the underground earthing conductors at least 500 mm below grade.

(n) Provide insulated copper earthing conductors in conduit from building’s main earthing
bus to main metal water service entrances to building and connect to the water
service pipes by earthing clamp connectors. Do not install a earthing jumper across
dielectric fittings.

(o) Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment earthing
conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, etc. Use braided
type bonding straps.

(p) All bonding leads in the form of cable having a stranded conductor shall be
terminated in “sweated” sockets and shall be rigidly bolted to earthing terminals.

2 Products

(a) Networks shall be formed from high conductivity annealed copper tapes complying
with BS1432 or BS1433, or single core PVC insulated copper cables as specified,
where appropriate.

(b) Earthing electrodes shall be Solid Copper rods of 20mm nominal diameter, complete
with Driving studs, coupling dowel, driving spike, concrete cover and pit enclosure.

(c) For electrodes installed within buildings provide double flange waterproof seal.as
supplied by the manufacturer.

3 Earthing Pits

(a) Each individual earthing system shall be connected to their separate earthing
electrode systems, referred as earthing pits hereafter, and the resulting earth
resistance of individual systems shall not be greater than the values as specified
hereafter.

(b) Earthing pits shall each comprise not less than three earth rods as specified or
copper tapes of 50mm by 6mm driven or buried into the ground to a suitable depth
and in any case not less than 100mm below the lower ground floor slab structure.

(c) Sufficient earth resistance enhancement compound of approved quality shall be

added to each earthing pit to lower the earth resistance.

(d) The earthing conductor shall be arranged to emerge through the finished floor screed
to a position clear from all reinforcement and to be agreed on site. Provision shall be
made for disconnecting the main earthing terminal from the means of earthing, to
permit measurement of the resistance of the earthing arrangements. This joint shall
be such that it can be disconnected only by means of a tool, and shall be
mechanically strong and reliably maintained for electrical continuity.

(e) A permanent label durably marked with the words “Safety Electrical Connection – Do
not Remove” in legible local language and English not less than 5mm high shall be
permanently fixed in visible position at or near the point of connection of every
earthing conductor at the earth terminals, and the point of connection of every
bonding conductor to extraneous conductive parts. This shall also comply to local
regulation on the installation earthing pit.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 87 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

4 Connections

(a) Joints in the earth rods and copper tapes shall be by exothermal welding such that
the resistance of the section containing the joint shall not exceed that of an equivalent
length of unjointed conductor. Any joint so made may be required to be tested to
prove compliance with this requirement.

(b) The contact faces of all protective conductors shall be cleaned before connections
are made.

(c) No drilling of the earth bar shall be permitted except in terminations.

5 LV Electrical Earthing

(a) The electrical earthing system shall be installed both vertically and horizontally along
the routes as shown on the drawings and shall form a network bonding all
switchboards, control panels, distribution boards, all exposed conductive parts and
extraneous conductive parts to the building’s main earth bar.

(b) The minimum size of the principal protective conductors shall be as indicated below:

i) Circuit protective conductor for equipment/circuits protected by over current

protective devices rated above and including 630A: 25mm by 6mm.
ii) Circuit protective conductor for equipment / circuits protected by over current
protective devices rated below 630A: 25mm by 3mm.

(c) The external earth terminal on the outside of the end panel of any switchboard shall
be connected to the main earth bar provided.

(d) Principal protective conductive conductors shall be provided in electrical and

mechanical plant rooms and along the routes as shown on the Drawings for the
bonding of all exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive parts. A suitably
sized earthing terminal shall be provided per principal protective conductor per floor
for this purpose.

(e) All exposed conductive parts shall be effectively connected in an approved manner to
the principal protective conductors. The circuit protective conductors shall be PVC
insulated single core copper cables or high conductivity annealed copper tapes
specified. Unless otherwise specified, the minimum cross-sectional area of the circuit
protective conductors shall be selected in accordance with the regulation

(f) All metallic sheaths and armour of the cables shall be effectively bonded at both ends
to apparatus which shall in turn be bonded to the principal protective conductors as
specified in items (g) and (h) above.

(g) Earthing connections for all items of equipment shall be made between the
equipment and the distribution board feeding it and as specified.

(h) All connection between circuit protective conductors and apparatus shall be by bolts
or studs so arranged that the resistance between the apparatus and the earth
conductor shall not exceed 0.1 ohm.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 88 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(i) Particular care shall be taken on cable termination boxes to ensure that the cable
sheath and armour is adequately bonded to the frame of the item of plant to which the
cable is connected. If the earth continuity through the cable termination gland is
inadequate, a special copper connection shall be made between the apparatus frame
and the cable sheath and armour.

(j) The circuit protective conductor of every ring final circuit shall also be run in the form
of a ring having both ends connected to the earth terminal at the origin of the circuit.

(k) Main equiotential bonding conductors shall be provided and shall connect to the main
earth bar all the extraneous conductive parts including the following:

i) Main gas pipes

ii) Main water pipes
iii) Other service pipes and ductings
iv) Exposed metallic part of the building structure
v) Risers of central heating and air-conditioning system

(l) Local supplementary bonding conductors shall be provided between simultaneously

accessible (i.e. within 2.5m) exposed conductive parts of equipment, between
exposed conductive parts and simultaneously accessible extraneous conductive
parts, and between simultaneously accessible extraneous conductive parts. The
bonding conductors shall be PVC insulated single core copper cables and shall be
sized in accordance with Clause 547-03 of the IEE Wiring Regulation.

(m) All equipment equipotential bondings in areas other than plant rooms and within false
ceiling shall be concealed. Any remedial work required afterwards due to bad
connection, open circuit, etc. shall be borne by the Sub-contractor.

(n) In case where metallic trunking and conduits are adopted along the whole of the
routes of the current carrying conductors, the additional circuit protective conductors
as specified in item (h) above shall still be required.

6 Telephone Earthing

(a) An earthing bed shall be provided for computer / telephone earthing, the resulting
earth resistance shall not be greater than 1 ohm.

(b) A continuous principal earthing conductor shall be provided in the electrical rooms
and along the route as shown on the drawings for the bonding of computer /
telephone equipment.

(c) The principal earthing conductor shall be 25mm by 3mm copper tape as specified. In
addition, the copper tape shall be PVC sheathed throughout in grey colour.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 89 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C7 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

1 General

(a) The Contractor shall design, supply, install, test and commission a Lightning
protection system to provide the following during thunderstorms/Lightning strikes and
other atmospheric disturbances.

• Protection to buildings and their contents including human life, from exposure
to the effects of unsafe electrical currents and potentials

• Safe discharge to earth of electrical currents generated

• Potential rise relative to the earth on exposed conductive materials

• System voltages and insulation breakdown voltages are within reasonable

limits

(b) A Lightning protection system shall be provided in compliance with BS EN 62305.

(c) A complete non-radioactive type lightning protection system including lightning

terminals(s), lightning carrier(s) and lightning earth pit(s) shall be supplied and
installed as specified in tender drawings.

(d) The location and length of the lightning terminal(s) indicated in tender drawings are
for reference. This contractor shall submit manufacurer’s calculation for protective
area of the proposed lightning system.

(e) The routing of the lightning carrier(s) indicated in tender drawings are for reference.
The contractor shall propose the routing and coordinate with the Builder for any
builder’s work for the lightning carrier(s).

(f) The make of lightning protection system shall be submitted for Architect’s approval.

(e) Earthing pit for lightning protection system shall be provided in a manner as described
elsewhere in the specification and drawings. The whole of the lightning system shall
have a resulting resistance to earth of not greater than 10 ohms and acceptable to
the manufacturer of the lightning protection system.

2 Design Parameters

(a) The system shall incorporate the required test facilities to allow testing of the system
in accordance with BS EN 62305 and BS 7430.

(b) Precautions shall be taken to ensure that bi-metallic corrosion will not occur, between
joints in the system, which comprise of dissimilar metals.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 90 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(c) Precautions shall be taken to ensure all exposed conductive metal work, which could
become electrically charged during a thunderstorm, is bonded to the lightning
protection.

System Description

The system shall comprise of various elements and components as described but not limited
to the following.

(d) Air Termination Network:

i. The air termination network should comprise of 25x3mm bare copper tape of
99.99% purity (complying with BS EN 13601) and shall form an air
termination network as per BS EN 62305 on the accessible side.

ii. At all the edges, it is recommended to use the strike pad to facilitate the flow
of lightning current through the above exposure points. The conductor
should be fixed to the roof with DC clips to suit the final roof finish at every
1-meter.

iii. All joints between conductors should be made with cross over tape clamp.

iv. All metallic parts protruding outside the extended air termination network
(e.g., balcony handrails etc.) shall be connected to the air termination using
suitable clamps (material complying to BS EN 50164) at every floor
wherever the horizontal conductor is applied.

(e) Down Conductors:

i. Down conductor shall be 2no.of dedicated electrically continuous re-bar

installed internally.

ii. The re-bar is exothermically welded, and ‘U” bolt rod is clamped within the
joints. (Refer typical installation details for exact requirement)

iii. A test joint shall be provided for each down conductor before it is terminated
to an earth pit.

(f) Bonding

i. The 25x3mm copper tape, which is used as horizontal ring conductor must
be bonded to all down conductors, The aluminium cladding wall shall be
bonded to lightning protection system using bimetallic clamps (in compliance
to BS EN 50164)

ii. Any exposed metal parts e.g. balcony hand rails etc shall be bonded to the
main lightning protection system at the same intervals / spacing as per the
horizontal conductor’s placement from the height of 20m and above. These
shall be bonded using a cable of minimum 50sq.mm cross sectional area.

iii. The Contractor shall be responsible for the co-ordination with other services
like structural/civil, cladding etc.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 91 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(g) Earth Termination Network

i. The earth termination network can be done using dedicated earth pits for
reasons of maintenance.

ii. The earth termination network shall comprise of solid copper earth rod
driven at the base of each down conductor position. Each down conductor
has a separate earth termination.

iii. The earthing shall be done as per local authorities’ requirements. The
complete Lightning Protection System measured at any point, should not
exceed 10 ohms. With the test clamp disconnected, the resistance of each
individual earth should be no more than ten times the number of down
conductors in the complete system.

iv. The LV and the IT earth should in no case exceed 1 ohm.

v. The earth pits inside the building shall have double flange earth electrode
seals. This will ensure that there is a test point available for each down
conductors and should there be a need in future to reduce the resistance to
earth, earth rods can be driven through the earth pits and the necessary
resistance be achieved.

vi. The double flange earth seals shall be designed for use in concrete slabs of
nominal thickness from 300mm to 5000mm thick. The seal will withstand
water pressure up to 80 psi equal to a 55-meter head of water. The earth
seal flange shall be free from dust / debris, grease/paint before pouring of
the concrete. A specialist installer should be employed to do the installation
or shall be done under our or your supervision.

(h) Surge Protection Devices

Surge protection devices shall be installed wherever required as per BS and relevant
local authorities’ regulations and consultant’s requirement.

(i) Mast and Grounding

i. Mast height to be determined by the area of protection, with threaded

connections for the ESD air terminal and manufacturer’s approved bonding
hardware for cable to mast connection.

ii. Ground rods shall be a ¾” x 10’ long and consist of a delta configuration.
They shall be installed a minimum of one foot below grade and a minimum
of two feet from the foundation. All connections shall be exothermically
welded.

iii. A minimum of one (1) inspection and test well, rated for the traffic of the
installation area, shall be installed for each completed system.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 92 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

iv. Bonding of grounded systems shall be via main size conductors. The
bonding shall be accomplished to achieve equal potential of all grounds. All
underground connections shall be via exothermic welding.

(j) Connectors, fittings, fasteners, and hardware

i. All conductor mast to ground path connections to be exothermically welded.

ii. Provide all connectors, fittings, fasteners, clamps, lugs crimps, and
miscellaneous hardware as required to connect the install on all parts of the
system.

iii. All equipment shall be fabricated from copper and/or bronze, aluminum or
stainless steel.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 93 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C8 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENT ON TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

1 General and System Requirement

(a) This specification details the requirements for testing and commissioning the entire
electrical installation associated with the site and all electrical equipment to be
manufactured and delivered to the site.

(b) The prime purpose of this document is to produce a technical facility of a consistent
and high installation standard.

(c) This Contractor shall be responsible providing all necessary test equipment and tools
to carry out testing and commissioning of all equipment and accessories to provide
power supplies to all the apparatus of the site.

(d) The equipment testing and commissioning shall conform in performance with:
- IEC 60364 (all sub sections)
- IEC 60034-3
- IEC 439
- Local Supply Authority Regulations and Codes of Practice

(e) On completion of the work, the contractor shall commission the entire installation and
put it into operation.

(f) The contractor’s commissioning personnel shall be experienced and trained. Proof of
the commissioning Engineers qualifications shall be submitted for approval.

2 Testing
(a) The precise method and requirement of carrying out tests on the installation shall be
agreed with the Engineer and shall meet with the Local Power Supply Company’s
requirements. The following are minimum tests that shall be carried out by this
contractor after the installation has been completely erected and connected up
(except for those items of equipment for which tests have to be carried out before
connection is made) on site.

(b) The contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of 7 days in advance of tests to
be carried out.

(c) All instruments, tools, materials, plant supervision and labour shall be provided by the
contractor, Instruments and recording devices shall be accurately calibrated and
periodically re-celebrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer. A complete list of
instruments used for commissioning and testing shall be submitted for approval from
the Engineer.

(d) The Engineer shall have the right to reject any material, apparatus, or equipment
which, as the result of inspections and/or tests may be found to be defective or
unsatisfactory in any respect, or not in accordance with the requirements of the
Specification, and to require the contractor to repair, adjust, modify, or replace the
defective item. In the case of works testing this shall be done before dispatch to site.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 94 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

If the defective items are unsuitable for repair, adjustment or modification, then they
shall be replaced by a completely new item at the expense of the contractor.

3 Type Testing and Factory Tests

(a) Type tests shall be conducted on the following equipment and the respective test
certificates issued by approved authorities (like ASTA) or other institutions shall be
submitted in triplicate to the Engineer for approval.

(b) Type test on the short circuit rating and related performance for both air insulated and
dielectric insulated busducts in accordance with IEC 439. Type tests on the
performance of weatherproof busducts under various outdoor conditions.

(c) Type test on the short circuit rating and related performance of the main switchboard
cubicle, busbars and switchgear. (in accordance with IEC 439.)

(d) Type test on the short circuit rating and related performance of busbar chambers and
distribution switchgear including MCCBs and fuse switches.

(e) Type tests on the operation performance and characteristics of engines and
alternators for the generator sets.

(f) Type tests on all types of cables in accordance with the respective IEC Standard.

(g) Acoustic infill and sound absorbent materials for silencers of generator sets shall be
tested to withstand air velocities of 20m/s. Without evidence of material breakdown,
migration or dusting. Test reports shall be submitted for approval.

(h) Factory tests shall be conducted on equipment by the contractor at the

manufacturer’s works or elsewhere as appropriate.

(i) The contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 4 weeks prior to the dates of factory
tests. Within 2 weeks after satisfactory completion of the factory tests, three sets of
the test reports (duly signed by the testing institute and the witnesses) shall be
submitted for approval.

4 On-Site Testing and Commissioning

(a) One month before the date of completion of the Electrical contract Works, the
contractor shall submit for approval a detailed programme for conducting onsite
acceptance tests and commissioning.

(b) The Electrical contractor shall start up, operate, test and adjust the systems in
accordance with the agreed programme. The setting up shall be supervised by the
manufacturer’s representative, who shall remain on site until the equipment is
operating satisfactorily and accepted by the Engineer. The Electrical contractor shall
advise and co-ordinate with the manufacturer’s representatives so that all testing is
carried out according to the agreed programme.

(c) The whole installation shall undergo the following tests to bring the plant into running
order. The Engineer shall be given reasonable notice together with a copy of
recorded test results, generally not less than seven days in advance, regarding the
nature of tests, the time and location. Acceptance tests shall only be witnessed by the
Engineer when the submitted test results are found satisfactory.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 95 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(d) Main Switchboard

i) In addition to the factory test as stipulated in the relevant section, the Electrical
contractor shall perform the site test in accordance with the following
specified requirement.

- High voltage pressure test at 2.5 kV for a period of one minute.

- Insulation resistance tests on all main and secondary circuits at 1,000

volts d.c. and 500 volts d.c. respectively. Ductor tests shall be carried
out on each busbar joint to ensure each joint is properly made with
negligible resistance in the order of micro-ohms.

ii) Mechanical inspection of relays to ensure that:

- Relay movement is free, after removal of all transport packing.
- Magnet gap and induction discs are clean.
- Gear teeth are clean.
- Contacts are clean and make simultaneously.
- Contacts make when the time multiplier setting is zero.
- The resetting times are within prescribed limit for the relay.
- Flag mechanisms operate in correct sequence with respect to
contacts.
- Flag and reset knobs operate with the relay cover on.
- Relay cover glass and gasket provide effective seal.
- CT shorting and D.C. isolating contacts for switches operate
satisfactorily.
iii) Secondary Injection Test on Relays
- Secondary injection test to re-check all protection control equipment
and circuit to ensure their proper functioning.
iv) Primary Injection Tests on the Switchboards
- Primary injection tests to prove the correctness of interconnections
between C.T. groups and relays and to prove the satisfactory
operation of the over-all protection system of the switchboards.
Injection currents shall be at least equal to the full load currents of
the ratings of respective switchgear and of sinusoidal wave form at
50 Hz – 60 Hz.

v) Mechanical Operation Tests of Switchgear

- Each item of switchgear to be operated through at least three
openclose-open cycles in both operating and test positions by
manual or electrical operation.

- All control circuits, automatic change over operations and interlocks

shall be tested for correct operation. Checks for ease of rack-in and
rack-out all withdrawable equipment to be carried out.

- Trip test circuit breakers by manually making every control relay

contacts.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 96 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

vi) C.T.’s and V.T.’s Test

- Polarity markings and connections verification of each C.T. and V.T.
by D.C. battery and galvanometer ‘kickback’ method.
- C.T. ratios verification by local primary injection.
- Magnetization curve plotting of each C.T. up to the saturation point.

vii) Phase sequence tests

- A test on phase sequence shall be made on the main switch/ switchboard to
ensure that the switch has been connected in the correct sequence.

(e) Power Cables

i) All power cables and risers shall be tested at 2kV for one minute.

ii) All power cables and risers shall be tested for insulation with a 1000 volt
megger. Insulation values shall be obtained between conductors and ground
and between phases; and before and after the pressure tests.

(f) L.V Distribution and Final Sub-circuit Wiring

i) Verification of Polarity (IEC 60364).

- These tests may be carried out by using proper test probes and a test lamp
where mains supply is available or using a continuity tester where
mains supply is not available. The use of neon indicators for polarity
testing is not reliable and they shall not be used for this purpose.

ii) Measurement of the Resistance of the Earth Electrode (IEC 60364).

- The resistance to earth of the main, and any auxiliary earthing systems
shall be measured, both at the earthing electrode position, and at the
main switch/switchboard.

iii) Insulation Resistance/Tests of Completed Installation (IEC 60364).

- Tests required are shown in the table below:

Test Conditions of Tests Minimum Insulation

Resistance
1 Insulation resistance to earth 1 Mega-ohm
2 Insulation resistance between poles 1 Mega-ohm
or phases
3 Insulation resistance to case or 0.5 Mega-ohm
frame work of live parts of fixed
apparatus where disconnected for
purposes of tests 1and 2.

- Test of Ring-circuit Continuity (IEC 60364)

- For the purpose of this test the supply must be disconnected, and the
ring conductor must be disconnected at the point of test.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 97 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(g) Noise and Vibration Compliance Test

i) Compliance test shall be carried out to ensure the installation shall fulfil the
stipulated requirements and criteria.

ii) Tests shall be carried out when the electrical equipment shall be at normal
operating condition. At the time of the tests, the areas to be tested shall be
unoccupied and not suffer from any other noise intrusion.

iii) All equipment used for the tests shall be calibrated. The sound level meter
and octave filter set used shall meet the ISO/IEC 651 Precision and general
purpose sound level meters requirements.

iv) All dBA and octave band sound pressure levels shall be read direct from the
sound level meter or plotted on a chart level recorder. Real time analyser
may be used to check the effectiveness of vibration isolators installed if there
is reason to suspect inadequate vibration isolation as determined by the
Engineer.

v) The contractor shall be responsible for the corrective work should the
vibration and noise levels due to the installation exceed the requirement set
in this Specification. The contractor shall also be responsible for the cost of
all tests after such remedial work.

vi) Vibration measurements shall be made using calibrated accelerometer,

charge amplifiers and narrow band analyser. A hard copy printout is
necessary for documentation.

5 Other Tests

(a) The Electrical contractor shall carry out any other tests that may be required by the
Engineer or the local supply company.

(b) Prospective Short Circuit Current (IP)

i) Determine values of IP by measurement, unless other means are indicated.

Determine IP at all necessary points within installation to confirm correct
equipment selections.

ii) Obtain from supply undertaker written confirmation of maximum and

minimum values of IP at origin of installation. Adjust subsequent measured
values of IP accordingly.

(c) Earth Fault Loop Impedance (ZS)

i) Use 25 A tests current. Measure and record source impedance (ZE).

ii) If alternative LV supply arrangements are available, measure ZS when using

supply with highest impedance.

iii) Measure ZS with main equipotential bonding conductors connected. Do not

summate values of several parts of each loop.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 98 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(d) Settings and Adjustments (LV panel and installation)

i) Confirm characteristics and settings of protective devices are within

maximum and minimum specified tripping times.

ii) Check correct operation of devices.

iii) Confirm interlocks and sequences operate safely and as indicated.

(e) Calibration

Provide current certificates of calibration for all instruments used during test
procedures. Record particular instrument identity on record sheets.

(f) Conductive Parts

i) Test conductive parts simultaneously accessible with exposed conductive

parts of extraneous conductive parts. Establish that they are either not an
extraneous conductive part, or that they are reliably connected by metal to
main equipotential bonding.

ii) Confirm conductive parts which are not extraneous conductive parts are
separated from earth by an impedance greater than 50,000 ohms.

iii) Confirm other conductive parts are bonded to equipotential zone earth bar by
an impedance not exceeding 0.1 ohms.

(g) Phase Sequence

i) Check and confirm correct polarity of all conductors in all circuits.

(h) LV Buried Cables

i) Test continuity and insulation of buried cables immediately after back-filling.

ii) Test continuity and insulation of buried cables prior to handover.

(i) Conduit, Trunking and Ducting

Test and confirm electrical continuity before installing cables.

6 Test Report and Records

(a) Test reports and test results of site tests shall be submitted to the Engineer within 7
days from the date of testing carried out.

(b) Records of all the readings taken from the miscellaneous tests shall be submitted to
the Engineer for inspection and comment.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 99 of 243

 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C - STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Prior to the Contract completion date the Contractor shall submit to the Architect / Engineer for
his perusal two copies (one of which shall be an original) of the manufacturer’s proposed
operating and servicing manual for each item of equipment. The Manuals shall be in English
and in pure S.I. units. They shall refer only to the items to be supplied for the Particular
Contract.

The manual or manuals shall contain at least the following:

(a) List of project team including company name, address, phone no. and fax no.

(b) Detailed and cross-referenced index of contents, emergency call, telephone no and
contact person’s name on the cover page.

(c) Index of ‘record’ and / or ‘as-built’ drawings.

(d) General description of all systems.

(e) Setting up and operating instructions for all equipment and systems installed.

(f) Detailed description of controls sequence and operation for all systems including,
unless otherwise specified, reduced scale copies (to A3 size) of all controls and
electrical schematics. Schematics shall incorporate all type and size references and
all settings.

(g) Copies of all testing, commissioning and balancing records and data.

(h) Details of all equipment, plant and ancillaries’ settings and actual values maintained
by controlled variables during commissioning.

(i) Frequency and full schedules of routine maintenance and servicing procedures
including full specifications for any required consumable.

(j) Manufacturer’s literature including clear detailed drawings, spare parts lists, electrical
circuits, printed operating and maintenance instructions, etc. The literature shall apply
only to specific items actually supplied for the Contract.

(k) Schedule of all items of equipment and plant stating name, model no., manufacturer,
local agent’s name, contact person, address and telephone number, location within
the building, manufacturer’s serial or reference numbers, duties and performance
data. This information may be incorporated under the data recorded in items (g) and
(h) above.

(l) Diagrammatic drawings of each system indicating the principal items of plant and
equipment including numbering codes or similar to co-relate with information given
under item (k) hereof.

The draft manuals may be in photo-copy form with temporary type binding and covers
but all photocopies shall be clear and easily readable including any half-tones.
Temporary insertions may be used for items which cannot be finalized until all work
are completed and tested.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 100 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(m) Within 30 calendar days following substantial completion of the works in question, the
Contractor shall provide four copies of the final approved manuals which shall
incorporate all amendments corrections, etc found necessary during examination of
the draft manuals.

The final manuals shall have pages of A4 size only (or A3 size folded) and shall be
encased in durable hard covers with suitable indelible lattering on spine and front.

All manuals shall be bound in such a manner that they will lie flat when open. Should
loose leaf ring binders be utilized they must be of ring type with all holes in sheets
reinforced. On completion of final assembly the rings shall be soldered closed to
prevent removal of sheets. The number of separate manual volumes required will
depend on the size and complexity of the installation concerned.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 101 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C - STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C10 ‘AS-BUILT’ DRAWINGS

As work proceeds the Contractor shall record all variations, amendments and changes that
take place.

As each section of the work proceeds or is completed the Contractor shall prepare 'As-fitted'
record drawings 'incorporating all approved changes. The drawing shall be prepared as-fitted
including existing equipment. The Engineer shall be permitted to examine these drawings
from time to time as work proceeds and the Contractor shall arrange all facilities to enable
such examinations.

Within 30 calendar days, following the agreed substantial completion date for the installation,
the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect / Engineer two complete sets of white prints of all
'As-fitted' drawings for checking. The contractor shall incorporate all comment from Architect /
Engineer and resubmit the drawings within 7 days for approval.

Approval will only be granted where drawings of an acceptable quality are prepared. On this
matter the Architect / Engineer’s decision shall be final.

Each drawing shall be clearly marked in 10 mm or larger block characters 'As-fitted' in the
bottom right-hand corner of the sheet.

The 'As-fitted' drawing sets shall include not less than the following

(a) Diagrams; to fully show each electrical system including location of all plant,
equipment, and controls.

(b) Individual floor plans and sections showing to a scale of not less than 1:100 and all
installations accurately located.

(c) Plant room layouts, with sections, to a scale of not less than 1:50.

(d) Wiring and schematic diagrams with settings and adjustments noted for all electrical
distribution and control systems, control panels, motor starters, interlocks, etc.

(e) The sizes and positions of all plant, equipment, containment, etc. clearly identified by
its service and dimensioned location.

(f) Complete set of symbols on a separate drawing with symbols used for individual
drawings being identified on each.

(h) All notes shall be written as “as-fitted” drawing and shall not be instructive.

(i) All drawing shall be of A0, A1 or A3 size at S.I. scale only, as agreed with the
Engineer.

(j) Equipment specification listed in table form.

Computer disk for "as installed" drawings shall be handover to client as follow:

(a) Electronic files of all “as-fitted” final approved drawings required to be produced by the
Contractor.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 102 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(b) All the above drawings shall be produced with CAD, with the format capable of being
read by AutoCAD Rel. 12 or more update version in a "PC compatible" computer and
to the satisfaction of the Architect / Engineer. Different layers shall be used for
background and equipment.

(c) Each computer disk shall be labelled, with cross reference, to a printed list of files
explaining the contents and purpose of each file.

In addition to the provision of 'As-fitted', prints and computer disk, the Contractor shall provide
and install in the relevant plant room framed under glass, non-fade prints of the following:

(a) All switchgear.

(b) Plant room record drawings showing all plant items, switchgear, etc. including all
electrical and control schematics and diagrams.

Glazing shall be polished plate of not less than 6 mm thickness mounted in natural finish,
extruded and anodized aluminum frames with the prints mounted on acid free mounting board
and the whole backed with marine grade plywood not less than 8 mm thick.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 103 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION

C11 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

1 General

(a) The standby generating plant shall include, but not be limited to, the followings:

i) Complete diesel engine/generator set including radiator, anti-vibration

mountings, holding down bolts etc.

ii) Complete exhaust system including all silencers, suspension and thermal
insulation.

iii) Complete fuel delivery system including base tank, all pipes, valves and feed
pump, where required.

iv) Control panel completes with all accessories and control to provide a
complete and operable system.

v) DC electric starting system.

(b) The generating set shall have provision for both manual and fully automatic starting
facilities and be capable of transferring the designed connected load in the event of a
complete mains failure or a deviation outside the acceptable limits and to do so in not
more than 15 seconds.

(c) The generating plant shall be adequately sized to meet the load requirements under
worst case considerations. Details of the sizing shall be submitted for approval. The
sizing of the generating plants shall take into account of, but not be limited to, the
following factors: -

i) Derating factors (altitude, ambient temperature, power factor etc.)

ii) Impact load
iii) Transient voltage dip
iv) Momentary overload
v) Regenerative power
vi) Rectifier loads
vii) Phase loads unbalance
viii) Instability due to interaction between voltage regulation system (e.g. AVRs of
generating plants).
ix) A 10% overload capacity in excess of the nameplate continuous rating for one
hour in any 12 consecutive hours of full load operation.

Notwithstanding the above, the generating plant shall have a minimum full continuous rating
as indicated on the Drawings.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 104 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

2 Particular Requirements on Quality Assurance

(a) The manufacture of various components and accessories shall be as recommended

by the generator manufacturer to ensure compatibility of the components.

(b) Notwithstanding any description or detail (implied or otherwise) included hereafter and
on the Drawings, the final installation shall comply with all the necessary requirements
and any other relevant regulations to enable the installation to be operative.

3 Submittals

As a minimum, submit the following for approval at the appropriate stages of the Works.

(a) Detailed schedule of equipment and components and manufacturer’s data, including
flue pipe insulation material.

(b) Detailed and coordinated working drawings on Generator Room equipment layout,
with requirements on engine exhaust system, fuel supply system, cooling system;
including calculations, pipe sizes, construction details, installation details.

(c) Electrical control wiring diagrams showing details of all wirings internal and external to
the generator control panel, together with terminal numbers for cable terminations to
external equipment.

(d) Detailed calculation on battery sizing.

(e) Equipment weight.

(f) Builder’s works requirement.

(g) Proposal on testing procedures and report format for testing of the generating set at
the manufacturer’s works and on site.

(h) The generator shall be capable to withstand one step load of 180kW as a minimum,
and the voltage dip of the generator supply voltage during generator starting stage
shall not be greater than 20%, this contractor shall submit a volt dip calculation to
comply the specification described above.

4 Design and Construction of Generating Set

(a) Generator

i) Design and construct the generator to meet the appropriate sections of

BS4999 and BS5000.
ii) The generator shall be of brushless type, with the rotating field excited from
an a.c. exciter and rotating rectifier unit, and with the exciter controlled by
solid state automatic voltage regulator as specified hereafter.
iii) The generator shall be rated to suit local conditions and specially
impregnated for tropical duty.
iv) The rotor and stator of the generators shall have Class F insulation.
v) Engine crankshaft speed shall not exceed 1500 rpm. The normal direction of
rotation shall be anti-clockwise.
Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 105 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

vi) The generator characteristics must be matched to the torque characteristics

of the engine, in such a manner that with full load connected to the generator,
the generator can utilize all the available engine power without exceeding it.
vii) The generator must be capable of withstanding an over speed of 20% above
synchronous value. Mechanical protection of the generator against over
speed effects shall be provided by the engine over speed protection devices
specified.
viii) The generator must be capable of withstanding an unbalance load with the
current in one phase more than the other phases by 60%.
ix) The generator shall be drip roof to IP23 of BS5420.
x) The generator shall be built in with thermostatically controlled heater and with
manual isolating switch at the control panel.
xi) The generator shall be capable of withstanding the short circuit current with
these output terminals short-circuited for 3 seconds without any damage to
the generator.
(b) Radiator

i) The engine shall be water cooled by means of a matching heavy duty radiator
complete with belt-driven fan, coolant pump, thermostat temperature control
liquid-cooled exhaust manifolds, intercooler, coolant corrosion resistant filters
suitably designed to suit the site conditions.
ii) The radiator shall be mounted on the same skid type bedplate supporting the
generating set where a set mounted radiator is required.
iii) The radiator shall be fitted with duct adapter flange to enable the ventilating
ductwork to be attached to the radiator. A short section of ductwork shall be
installed between the radiator and the metal louvers provided.
iv) Corrosion inhibitor shall be added to the cooling system.
v) The cooling system shall be equipped with coolant heater to maintain the
temperature of the coolant to a temperature above 10 deg.C to ensure ease
of starting on demand. Anti-freeze compound shall also be added to the
cooling system.

(c) Coupling Arrangement and Anti-Vibration Mountings

i) The diesel engine shall be direct coupled to the generator that shall be of the
single bearing type.
ii) Anti-vibration units shall be mounted below the baseplate, or between the
generating set assembly and the baseplate, so that the complete installation

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 106 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

can be located on a solid concrete floor without transmitting vibration to

adjacent apparatus or any part of the building.

5 Design and Construction of Ancillary Equipment

(a) Exhaust Silencers and Flue

i) A residential type silencer shall be provided. The silencer shall be of

chambered construction, complete with moisture trap, exhaust drain,
adequately sized to assure proper operation without excessive back pressure
when installed. The silencer shall be designed to reduce the emitted noise to
a level of 70dBA measure at a distance 1m from the exhaust outlet.

ii) Stainless steel flexible bellows connectors and adapter, sized to match the
engine and exhaust silencer, shall be provided for installation between each
engine and the associated silencer.

iii) A flue pipe complete with flexible bellows connectors, all adequately sized,
shall be connected beyond the silencer to discharge the flue to location as
shown on the Drawings.

iv) Bends in flue pipe shall have a minimum radius of three times the diameter of
the pipe.

v) The entire system shall be insulated with glass fibre blanket wrapped on
galvanized metal mesh and supported on 25mm hot dip galvanized mild steel
air spacing stool strips such that a 25mm air gap is maintained around the
flue.

vi) The finish of all flue pipework and silencers shall be aluminum cladding of not
less than 0.6mm thickness.

vii) The entire system shall be supported by spring type hangers with an
approved design.

(b) Fuel System

i) A base fuel tank shall be provided as specified herein and as shown on the
Drawings.

ii) A base fuel tank of 8 hours minimum capacity shall be provided. The fuel
tank shall be fitted with low level fuel switches set to provide 2-stage alarm at
20% and 5% level.

iii) The fuel tank shall be manufactured in accordance with BS799: Part 5 and
shall be fabricated from high quality mild steel plate of 5mm thick, end dished
and flanged, electrically welded throughout and spatter removed.

iv) A manual operated “shut-off” valve shall be provided in the fuel supply line for
emergency shut down of the plant.

v) A temperature maintaining device shall be installed in the fuel tank in order

that the fuel inside will be kept at a constant range of temperature.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 107 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(c) D.C. Electric Starting System

i) The generating set shall be equipped with an engine starter motor which shall
be suitable for 24V D.C. operation, complete with manual and automatic
starting and starter cut-out switch as described herein.

ii) The engine starting control equipment shall be arranged to disconnect the
mains operated battery charger to prevent its being overloaded during
starting.

iii) The starting equipment shall incorporate a fail-to-start device for automatically
disconnecting the starter motor if the engine fails to start within a pre-
determined time, say 15 seconds, so as to avoid undue discharge of the
batteries.
iv) A total of three consecutive starts, say with 15s duration, and at 5s intervals, shall
be made to start the engine, after which disconnection of the starter by the fail-tostart
device shall operate the visual and audible alarm as specified hereafter. No further
attempts shall be made to start the engine by the automatic starting system until the
fail-to-start mechanism has been reset manually.

(d) Starting Battery and Charger

i) A 24V D.C. engine starting battery set of nickel-cadmium type of adequate

ampere-hour capacity and discharge rate shall be mounted adjacent to the
engine under base. The battery shall comply with IEC623 and be capable of
providing six consecutive starts of 15-second duration, and at 5 seconds
intervals, without being discharged to a level where damage may be caused
to the battery as advised by the manufacturer. The battery shall be housed in
a corrosion resisting container of an approved type.

ii) The battery charger shall be constant potential type, complete with DC
voltmeter and ammeter, surge suppressor, controls, float and boost charging
selection, battery discharging indication, protection against over-charging and
indication, charger failure alarm. All controls and sensors shall be wired to
the set mounted control panel.

iii) The battery shall be supplied in a fully charged state ready for use and shall
be complete with hydrometer for testing the electrolyte and two-liter distilled
water and battery filler.

(e) Engine Heater

i) A water jacket heating system shall be provided to maintain the engine jacket
water to about 30°C., or as recommended by the manufacturer, so as to
ensure ease of starting on demand.

ii) The heater shall be thermostatically controlled and be disconnected

whenever the engine is put into operation.

6 Control and Protection of the Generating Set

(a) Engine Status Indication

The engine shall be provided with the following status indication as a minimum:

 oil pressure
Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 108 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

 oil temperature
 engine temperature
 service hours
 tachometer
 battery charger ammeter

(b) Engine Protection

i) The engine shall be provided with the following protective devices and control
as a minimum to effect early warning and/or shut down in the event of:

 low lubricating oil pressure

 high engine coolant temperature
 low coolant level
 engine overspeed
 engine overcrank
 low fuel level

ii) The above protection shall be in two stages; it shall give visual and audible
warnings at an initial stage and shall shut down the engine when a
predetermined danger level is reached.

iii) In additional to the above, the following status and alarms shall be connected
to client’s BMS network:

 Generator running
 Generator fault
 Quantity of fuel
 Status of polishers and fuel pumps

(c) Voltage Regulation and Adjustment

i) Voltage Regulation
- Provide an automatic voltage regulation system to maintain the
output voltage at the generator’s terminal within +2.5% of its rated
value from no load to full load under steady state condition.

- The performance of the voltage regulation system of the generator

shall be of Grade VR2.23 as specified in BS4999: Part 40.

ii) Voltage Adjustment

- Provide a means of adjusting the output voltage to facilitate
adjustment of the machine output voltage at any level within its
design parameters.

(d) Control Panel

i) Provide a self-contained or floor mounted generating set control panel at a

position as shown on the Drawings with suitably designed and approved
supporting framework. Otherwise, it shall be mounted on top of the
generator.

ii) Construct the control panel with materials capable of withstanding the
mechanical, vibrational, electrical and thermal stresses, and the effects of
humidity, which are likely to be encountered in normal service.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 109 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

iii) Provide protective devices to give protection against the consequences of

short circuits in the control circuitry.

iv) Where electrical apparatus is attached to lids or doors, means shall be taken
to ensure continuity of the protective circuit in the form of an earth continuity
conductor of an appropriate size.

v) Install wiring to apparatus and measuring instruments in covers or doors so

that no mechanical damage can occur as a result of movement of the door or
cover.

vi) Locate adjustment devices not required on a regular daily basis within the
control panel to permit safe operation.

vii) The control panel shall contain, but not be limited to, the following:

- Triple pole MCCB with adjustable trips for generator, earth fault and
reverse power relays, controls and indications as specified. The
current rating and breaking capacity of the MCCB shall be compatible
with the generator provided.

- Meters

 kW meter
 frequency meter (range: 45 to 55 Hz)
 power factor meter
 hours run meter (range: 9999 hours)
 AC voltmeter with phase selector switch, to monitor generator
output voltage
 AC ammeter with phase selector switch and current
transformers, to monitor generator output current
 DC voltmeter to monitor battery voltage
 DC ammeter to monitor charging current

- Push buttons

 engine start push button

 engine stop push button
 system reset push button
 push button to simulate mains failure

- Red indicating lights with audible alarm

 MCCB tripped on fault

 engine overcrank lockout
 engine overspeed shutdown
 engine fail-to-start
 low fuel level (2 stages)
 low lubricating oil pressure (2 stages)
 high coolant temperature (2 stages)
 battery system fail

- Indicating lights without audible alarm

 Red lights - MCCB closed

 engine control in auto mode
Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 110 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

 battery discharging
 Green lights - MCCB open
 engine control in manual mode
 generator on load
 main supply available
 Amber lights - MCCB trip circuit healthy

- Other control devices

 lamp test button

 frequency preset device
 voltage preset device
 engine starting control
 battery charger and associated equipment
 engine heater control
 electronic isochronous governor
 solid state automatic voltage regulator
 “manual - auto” rotary control switch
 audible alarm and muting switch
 thermostatically controlled anti-condensation panel heater
with manual isolating switch.
 All necessary relays and dry contacts to provide for remote
indications, engine starting and engine shutdown, generator
protection override, etc. as specified hereafter.

7 System Operation and Performance

(a) Automatic Operation

i) On operation of the voltage relay at the upstream of the ‘Normal’ breaker of

the ATS in the designated main switch board during failure of the main
supply, a signal shall initiate the start-up system of the engine. A time delay,
adjustable between 0 to 5 seconds, shall be incorporated in the system to
prevent automatic starting in the event of momentary voltage interruptions to
the mains supply.

ii) If the failure persists at the expiry of the time delay period the prime mover
start sequence shall begin.

iii) Within 15 seconds of the start sequence commencing, the generating set
shall be established at its running speed and full load transfer shall take place
automatically.

iv) Should the prime mover fail to start after a period of 15 seconds, the
sequence shall be interrupted for a period of 5 seconds and a further two
attempts to start of 5 seconds duration shall then be made. If it again fails to
start, the starting sequence shall be locked out, an audible and visual alarm
given and it shall remain in this locked out condition until manually reset.

v) Restoration of the main supply during the starting period shall not interrupt the
starting sequence but shall prevent operation of the load transfer.
Subsequent failure of the mains supply while the generating set is running
shall, after expiration of the 0.5 to 1.0 seconds time delay, cause the load
transfer to take place.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 111 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

vi) When the generating set reaches its rated frequency and voltage, a signal
shall be initiated to open the ‘Normal’ circuit breaker and close the ‘Standby’
circuit breaker. Designated outgoing circuits, which have become open due
to the undervoltage condition previously, shall close automatically in a
predetermined sequence as indicated on the Drawings when the essential
section of the LV switchboard is energized in order not to overload the
generator.

vii) On full restoration of normal supply, load transfer and shutting down of the
generating set shall be either by manual or automatic operation selectable by
a selector switch on the control panel. Upon activation of this command, load
transfer shall take place immediately. The generating sets shall run unloaded
for a short cool-down period of 0 to 15 minutes adjustable and then shut
down.

(b) Manual Operation

i) The control panel shall also be equipped with an “Auto/Manual” rotary control
switch. The system shall operate as described above in “Auto” selection and
shall hold the existing status of the system until manual controls are effected.
ii) The generating set shall be able to start manually, by control switches
located on the control panel. Once started and running normally, the
generator can be manually connected to the desired essential loads.
iii) During the whole of the manual starting sequence, all the loads shall not be
transferred to the generator as long as the mains power remains available.
However, upon actuation of a “Manual Load Transfer” push button, a signal
shall be initiated to open the “Normal” circuit breaker and close the “Standby”
circuit breaker to enable load transfer as per in the automatic operation. By
re-setting the “Manual Load Transfer” push button, the load shall be
transferred back to the mains supply.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 112 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C12 FIXING TO BUILDING FABRIC

1 General

All work related to the following clauses shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification all cutting of holes and chases in
brickwork, concrete or other building materials, channeling of joints and the excavation of
trenches for outside runs of cable, will be included in the tender, together with all the
subsequent making good relaying of covers, filling in and resurfacing of trenches. The
Contractor must include for the vising of conduits etc., the boring for and fitting of all plugs,
bolts and other fixings, the final trimming and adjustment for depth for accessory boxes, and
the supply and laying of protective tiles.

When applicable the Contractor is equipped to plan and set out cable, conduit and trucking
runs well in advance of the time of installation in order that others can have sufficient time to
arrange for necessary builders’ work.

The cost of all unnecessary cutting away and making good occasioned by the faulty marking
out and/or incorrect instructions being given by the Contractor shall be borne by him.

Floor joists must be carefully cut as near to the walls possible to the minimum depth and
width required, for the accommodation of the wiring or conduit and where channels of more
than 20mm deep are required, the proposed route must be defined and permission obtained
before proceeding.

All holes through walls, ceiling etc. must be cut as carefully as possible and made up solid
after completion.
Chases in plaster, brickwork and concrete must be sufficient deep to give 6mm clearance to
all conduits and fastenings introduced. The chases must be neatly executed and be of
minimum width.

2 Preparation

The Contractor shall:

(a) Mark-out, set-out and firmly fix all equipment, components and necessary brackets
and supports.

(b) Prepare drawings showing, apart from other builders work requirements, details of
various types of supports/fixings required for equipment/services and furnish details of
fixing and obtain Engineers approval in time for construction to proceed as per
approved program.

(c) Provide loading details for all fixing types. For equipment requiring plinths/inertia
blocks, provide all loading details on the builders work drawings.

(d) Provide all necessary assistance to enable any item of building-in type to be built in by
others.

(e) Use largest size of bolt, screws of other fixing permitted by diameter of hole in item to
be fixed.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 113 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(f) Ensure all bolts, screws or other fixings used are greased or lubricated in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions.

(g) Obtain Engineer’s approval for all fasteners, fixings and install samples of fixings on
site for Engineer’s approval prior to proceeding with works.

3 Standards:

Comply with BS 3974 Part 1, or equivalent European Standards for fixings. Ensure that
fixings such as expanding anchors are tested for tensile loading in accordance with BS 5080
or equivalent.

4 Plugs & Fixings:

Use plugs of suitable size and length for fixings. Use plastic or soft metal non-deteriorating
plugs to suit application. Do no use wood plugs.

Ensure that when screw is in place, threaded length is in plug. Ensure plugs used for screw
fixing are set-in to correct depth prior to final tightening.

Where cast-in fixings are permitted, mark out and set fixings in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.

Obtain approval prior to using shot fired type fixings.

Obtain approval prior using self-adhesive type fixings.

Provide proprietary channel inserts for casting-in where indicated.

Drill holes squarely. Use drills of requisite size and depth, and appropriate to fabric. Do not
flame-cut holes in metal works.

Use only proprietary fixings and comply with manufacturer’s instructions for all fixings such as
self-expanding anchors, chemical anchors, rails.

Take precautions to avoid fixing through reinforcement.

Fix equipment, brackets and supports where there is access at rear of wall, by drilling hole
through wall and fixing with bolt, back-plate, washer and loose nut. For each of type of fixings
obtain approval of sample fixing from the Engineer, prior to proceeding with work.
Fix equipment, brackets and supports where there is no access at rear of wall, drill hole and
use screw anchor type fixing or gravity type toggle fixing.

Fix equipment, brackets and supports using approved fixings.

Drill holes and fix using one of the following approved methods.

Fix equipment, brackets and support as follows:

- Use wood screws in plugs. - Use shot fired fixing.

Drill holes and fix using:

- Steel bolts of grouted bolt type.
- Expanding bolt type fixing.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 114 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

- Resin bolts. - Studs.

Fix equipment, brackets and supports by drilling holes and fixing using one of the following
approved methods.
-
- Self-tapping screws.
- Gravity type toggle fixing.
- Spring type toggle fixing.
- Set screws or bolts complete with washers, shake-proof washers and loose nuts.

Fixing equipment, brackets and supports by drilling or flame cutting holes in or welding to
metal structures is not permitted without Engineers written approval. Proprietary girder clamps
shall be used for suspending pipes, equipment or ducts from steel structure. Ensure the
Girder clamps are provided with axial restraints to prevent accidental slipping or Girder
clamps due to horizontal thrusts.

Provide manufacturer’s information on recommended fixing. Obtain approval for any fixing to
structure steelwork and concrete structures.

Generally, use proprietary fixings to structural steelwork and concrete structures.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 115 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C13 IDENTIFICATION

1 Labels and Notices

Apply identification labels, colour coding and notices in accordance with Clause 514 of BS
7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations) and other equipment including electrical components of
mechanical systems. Also install caution and other labels required by the Electricity Supply
Authority and as instructed by the Engineer.

Fit labels and notices as shown on the schedules and drawings.

BS 7671 Labels and Notices

• Identification of protective devices.

• Diagrams, charts or tables to comply with Clause 514-09.
• Warning notices, voltages in excess of 250 volts.
• Periodic inspection and test notices.
• Residual current device notices.
• Earth electrode safety electrical connection label.
• Bonding conductor connector point to extraneous conductivity parts label.
• Earth free local equipotential bonding areas warning notice.
• Electrical separation areas warning notice.
• Outdoor equipment socket outlet notice.
• Control equipment, including circuit breakers, fuse switches, isolators and fuse boards.
• All cables with applicable colour code, cable number, destination and source shall be
provided.
• In panel boards all cables shall be ferruled.
• All cables trays, trunking and conduits shall be identified with appropriate number
corresponding to the shop drawing numbering and service identification.
• All equipment’s shall be clearly and permanently labelled, to the approval of the
Engineer. Where labels are provided for making clear the method of operation of
apparatus, they shall be concise and preferably diagrammatic in form.
• Labels shall be of the engraved traffolyte type and to the approval of the engineer.
• Labels for the similar equipment shall be uniform appearance and size, and all labels
shall be fixed by screws.
• Each item of equipment shall be marked with its function, manufacturer’s name or
trademark and the code or type number, together with the batch or serial number.
• Danger notices have red lettering on a white background. Generally, lettering for danger
notices shall be 100mm high and all other lettering 6mm high.
• The contractor shall submit a schedule of labels for approval by the Engineer before
engraving is carried out.
• Also see elsewhere in the specification.

2 Materials

Use materials for labels and notices with a predicted life equal to or greater than the design
life of the electrical cables, plant, equipment or installation to which it refers.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 116 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

External

i. Engraved thermosetting plastic

laminate.
ii. Rigid plastic, hot press printed. iii.
Printed pressure sensitive labels
iv. Brass, materials and engraving.
v. Stainless steel engraved
vi. The contractor shall submit the sample based on the requirement as noted above and
obtain approval from the engineer prior to installation. The engineer shall reserve the
right to approve the material as noted above based on the suitability of the location and
application.

Internal

i. Engraved thermosetting plastic laminate

ii. Screen printed thermosetting rigid plastic
iii. Screen printed flexible plastic
iv. Flexible plastic with manuscript lettering.
v. Rigid plastic, hot press printed
vi. Printed pressure sensitive adhesive labels to BS 4781.
vii. Aluminium or aluminium alloy, generally lettering pressed, particular lettering engraved.
viii. Aluminium or aluminium alloy, lettering embossed.
ix. Stainless steel, engraved.T
x. The contractor shall submit the sample based on the requirement as noted above and
obtain approval from the engineer prior to installation. The engineer shall reserve the right to
approve the material as noted above based on the suitability of the location and application.

Colour

i. Background white or red

ii. Lettering red or white
iii. Provide submittal detailing the colour, material etc. iv. All materials shall be from an
approved manufacturer. No locally fabricated, printed items shall be accepted. All items shall
be given a guarantee for the life of the system and shall be included in the submittal.

3 Fixing – internal

Fix labels and notices using materials compatible with label or notice and surface to which it is
fixed by screws into tapped hole or bolted complete with washer nut and locking device.

4 Arrangement

Obtain approval prior to manufacture, with regard to style, colour, lettering, size and position of
all labels and notices.

Provide samples showing style, colour, lettering and size for approval.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 117 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

5 Lettering and Size of Labels and Notices:

Ensure that all lettering and symbols comply with the requirements laid out in BS 7671 (IEE
Wiring Regulations), paragraph 514 and BS 5378. Use Table 6 of BS 5378 for height of
lettering where not otherwise indicated. Ensure labels and notices of adequate size for the
lettering required and allow a minimum margin around all lettering of one line space vertically
and two letter spacing horizontally.

Front: Helvetica Medium or as approved by the engineer.

Size: To the approval of the engineer.

All lettering for the control equipment, including circuit breakers, fuse switches, isolators and
fuse boards, shall be provided with bevelled laminated plastic or ivorine labels suitably
engraved with indelible characters (not less than 5mm high) indicating the use of the
equipment and its reference numbers.

For all other labels viz: cable tray, service identification etc. shall have lettering not less than
50mm high depending upon the size of the tray/trunking etc. Provide sample for approval
before installation.

6 Conductor Arrangement

Arrange circuit polarity so that phases read in the phase rotation order followed by the neutral,
if any, from top to bottom in horizontal conductor layouts and left to right in vertical conductor
layouts. Ensure flat horizontal arrays have leading phase to the left and neutral to the right
from left to right when viewed from supply point. Arrange phase or live pole of two wire
apparatus at top or left hand and neutral and earth both at bottom or right hand side. In all
cases, ensure conductor arrangements defined are when viewed from front face of all the
equipment and terminating facilities. Apply identification markers in accordance with BS 7671
(IEE Wire Regulations), Clause 514 to all conductor termination points.

7 Safety Signs
Label all electrical plant and equipment using safety sign A.2.8 of BS 5378, Part 1 where
voltage above ELV exist.

Provide with each safety sigh A.2.8 supplementary or text signs complying with BS 5378, Part
3.

Label all electrical plant and equipment with the labels specified in the appropriate British
Standards for that plant or equipment. Identify each substation and main switch room with
safety sigh A.2.8 to BS 5378, Part1 with supplementary signs to BS 5378 Part 3, notices and
signs required by BS 5306 for any extinguishing system and notice giving details of,

i. The presence of Medium and Low Voltages.

ii. Administrative instructions for access.
iii. Location and method of contacting controlling authority.
iv. Actions to be taken in an emergency.
v. In all switch rooms and/or substations, a laminated notice shall be provided and hung in
a conspicuous place. The notice shall give full instructions diagrams including those for
change over switches shall be glazed and framed to the Engineers approval.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 118 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

8 Plant And Equipment Labels:

Fit labels on all items of plant, equipment, switches etc., include the following information:
service controlled, circuit reference, voltage, type of supply and phase etc., circuit protection
type and rating.

9 Maintenance Notices:

Fix notices giving warning of, and instructions on, any special maintenance procedures to
plant and equipment.

10 Colour Corrected Light Fittings

Fix a warning or identification disc to light fittings containing colour corrected fluorescent tubes
or other colour corrected light sources to ensure that maintenance staff install the correct
lamps.

11 Motors and Starters Labels

Fit identification labels to all motors, starters and starter panels. Ensure positive identification
of respective motors and starters. Provide motors with non-corrodible labels attached adjacent
to each bearing giving details of the lubricant to be used. Mark direction of normal rotation on
motor casing.

Provide labels to identify motor equipment fitted with surge suppressors and thermistors
stating that insulation test voltages must not be applied to thermistors and thermistor control
units. Ensure labelling is compatible with schematic and wiring diagrams, and complies with
BS 4999, Part 108.

Motors arranged for automatic restart shall have label of durable material permanently fixed to
them in prominent position and having, in clearly inscribed characters and in English and local
language, the legend:

“DANGER. THIS ELECTRICAL MOTOR IS AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED AND MAY

START WITHOUT WARNING. ISOLATE BEFORE INSPECTION”.

12 Switchgear:

Fit labels on switchgear as required by BS 7671 and EN 60439 to indicate duty of unit, its
voltage, phase and current rating, protective device rating, size of conductor involved and all
other necessary details.

Use an agreed serial coding system, provide at the switch a key to the coding system.
Switch panels, distribution boards and similar distribution units shall, unless specified
otherwise, be designated in accordance with the reference letters or numbers used in the
Particular Specification and/or shown on the drawings.

All distribution boards shall be provided with a type written circuit chart (which has been
approved by the local Electrical Authority) mounted on an aluminium sheet and given a
transparent Perspex coat (not less than 0.8mm thick), fixed by screws to the inside of the front
cover.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 119 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Duplicate copes of each circuit list shall be filed into separate A4 size twin ring loose leaf
binders and handed over as directed by the Engineer.

The list shall give the following particulars of each circuit:

i. Apparatus connected and location

ii. Connected load in watts
iii. Cable size
iv. MCB rating
v. Phase, if a single phase circuit from a T.P. and H. fuse board. vi. The rating and
circuit identification of each fuse shall be marked adjacent to the fuse base.
vii. All outdoor switchgear shall be clearly and permanently identified by number plates
and phase discs of appropriate colour.
viii. On AC systems the phase sequences shall be maintained throughout the installation
and all phase connections shall be in the order RED, Yellow, Blue from top to bottom
and/or left to right. Neutral connections, links and/or busbars shall always be located
above, below or to the side, not between the phase connections, links or busbars.
ix. The particular phase connected to circuit breaker banks and busbars shall be clearly
indicated by marking with appropriate colours.

13 Distribution Boards:

On each distribution board identify every outgoing way with a renewable circuit chart in a
transparent plastic envelope permanently fitted inside distribution board cover. Clearly
indicate in typed script identification number, cable size, fuse or circuit breaker rating and
description of item supplied and area supplied by circuit.

14 Schematic Diagrams:

Provide a purpose made schematic diagram permanently fixed showing the connections of
the equipment and plant.
Locations

i. At main switchgear.
ii. At sub-main switchgear
iii. At control gear
iv. Fixed to plant and equipment
v. The schematic diagram shall be located at any of the locations as noted above or at
appropriate places near to the equipment as per the site conditions.

Materials

i. Printed paper, transparent cover and framing

ii. Engraved thermosetting plastic laminate
iii. Printed paper, encapsulated
iv. All material shall be as appropriate based on the location and size. The items noted
above are for reference only.
v. In all switch rooms the Contractor shall provide and install a framed and glazed
schematic diagram indicating the distribution arrangement of the installation. The
frame shall be fabricated from standard section hard-drawn aluminium.

15 Engraved Accessory Plate

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 120 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Engrave switch plates like for cooker, dryer, washing machine, dishwasher etc., spur units,
pushes and special plated for fire alarm system etc. Use 6mm high letters with engraving
coloured red.

16 Special Purpose Earthing:

Fit labels to special purpose earthing conductors and connection points, describing their
purposes and any instructions necessary for their operation and maintenance.
i. IT equipment ‘Clean Earths’.
ii. Telecommunications functional earths.

17 Indicator Lamps And Push Buttons For Power Systems

Use indicator lamp and push button colours in accordance with BS EN 60073. Indicator
lamp: Red, danger or alarm; yellow, caution; green, safety.

Push buttons: Red, emergency action; red, stop or off; yellow, intervention; green, start or on.

Illuminated push buttons – To the approval of the engineer.

18 Conduit and Trunking Colour Coding:

In areas of mechanical plant or voids accommodating mechanical services, or where

otherwise indicated, identify electrical conduits and ducts in accordance with BS 1710. Apply
colour orange to BS 4800 by

i. Painting over whole length of the service.

ii. Applying an adhesive tape type wrap around services over a length of 150mm.
iii. The adhesive tape shall be “Bradley’ or approved equivalent and no local tape shall
be acceptable.

Place identification colours at bulkheads, wall penetrations and any other places where
identification is necessary.

The service bands shall be kept at equal interval of 6 meters for the full length of the
conduit/trunking which are at accessible areas. In the event that the intervals are occurring
after an access panel, the contractor shall provide suitable band at the access panel opening
area also in addition to the other areas as noted.

The conduit and trunking number shall also be marked besides the colour band.

19 Cable Identification

Provide all cables, other than final sub-circuit wiring enclosed in conduits or trunking, with
labels fixed at each end of cable either side of wall and floor penetrations at approximately
12m intervals at convenient inspection points by means of:

i. Galvanized wire blinder, to BS 1052 size

ii. Non-releasable plastic straps
iii. Releasable plastic straps

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 121 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Ensure labels show the following information

i. Reference number of cable.

ii. Points of termination.
iii. Size and number of conductors.
iv. Type of cable and date installed.
v. Operating voltage of cable.
vi. All cable ends shall be marked to identify the cable connection. Identification labels
for all cables shall give the cable an approved reference number.
vii. All cables shall have a label fixed to them below each cable joints, also where the
cable passes through ducts and trenches at each exit from or entry to such ducts and
trenches and where the cable enters a room or building. The label shall indicate and
trenches and where the cable enters a room building. The label shall indicate the
cable potential and destination as well as the cable number.
viii. Where required cables shall be of colour coded to differentiate between cables of
different functions, the outer sheath of such cables shall be self coloured dyed en
masse and not painted.

TERMINAL MARKING AND CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION:

Provide for switchgear and control elements whose terminals are marked in accordance with
BS 5472 (EN 50005) and BS 6272 (EN 50042). Use a unique reference to identify each
element in the switchgear or control gear. Mark on or adjacent to each element its reference.

Identify each terminal for connection to external wiring cabling using a reference system
complying with BS 5559 (EN 60445) based on the element reference and the appropriate
element terminal reference.

Adjacent to terminals.

Use lettered or numbered ferrules or sleeves to BS 3858 to mark each auxiliary conductor or
control cable core with the identity of the terminal to which it is connected and the reference
of plant or equipment to which it is connected and the identity of the terminal at the remote
end.

Ensure that main circuit conductors are identified in accordance with BS 7671 (IEE Wiring
Regulations) paragraph 514-06. Ensure that all identification of terminals and conductors is
recorded and included on record drawings and in operation and maintenance documentation.

UNDERGROUND CABLE IDENTIFICATIION:

Identify external underground cable routes by means of approved markers along their length
at distances not exceeding 50m and where a change of direction occurs on such routes.

Provide cables markers with a brass plate or impress concrete to clearly indicate the
reference of group of cables or reference number of cable and operating voltage of cable.
Provide key to any reference system used at switchgear.

Mark and protect direct buried cables with detectable warning tapes yellow printed black ‘
DANGER

ELECTRIC CABLES’ or printed to indicate other relevant other services.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 122 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

CABLE CONDUCTOR COLOUR CODING:

Identify cable conductors in accordance with BS 7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations) paragraph
514, note that a lighting sub-circuit switch wire is a phase conductor in a single phase circuit.
Single phase final sub-circuit phase wiring coded to match phase used.

On AC systems the phase sequences shall be maintained throughout the installation and all
phase connections shall be in the order Red, Yellow, Blue from top to bottom and/or left to
right. Neutral connections, links and/or busbars shall always be located above, below or to
the side, not between the phase connections, links busbars.

The particular phase connected to circuit breaker banks and busbars shall be clearly
indicated by making with the appropriate colour.

CABLE JOINTING AND TERMINATION:

Connect all cables in the installation so that the correct sequence of phase rotation is
maintained throughout. Where straight through joints are approved on low voltage cables,
whether power cables or control or auxiliary cables, joint conductors strictly in accordance with
their colour or numeric coding. Where such joints are approved on mineral insulated or other
non-coded conductor cables, identify each core at the joint and make the joint core to core.

CABLE SHEATH IDENTIFICATION – INTERNAL:

Use to identify coloured cables sheaths for various services as follows unless otherwise
required by local codes and standards and/or in accordance with engineers’ instructions:

• Fire alarm, red;

• Emergency lighting; white
• Clock circuits, brown;
• Telecommunications, grey/beige
• Data as system suppliers requirements;
• Control, black;
• LV multicore cables, black;
• LV single core cable (as per clause 514 of BS7671)
• LV protective conductors, green/yellow
• LV mineral insulated, orange; • MR red.
• Code cables for various services using alphanumeric symbols as follows:
• Code letters preceding cable reference.
• Fire alarm, FA.
• Emergency lighting, EL
• Clock, CL.
• Telecommunications, T.
• Data, D.
• Control, C.
• Low voltage, LV.
• Extra low voltage, ELV.
• LV Essential circuits, LV-E.
• Medium voltage, HV.

CABLE SHEATH IDENTIFICATION – EXTERNAL:

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 123 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Identify cable sheaths for various services, as follows:

MV Red; LV Black; telecommunications and data, Grey.

19 Additional Safety Signs:

Provide at locations shown or as appropriate safety signs to BS 5378 with dimensions as

Tables 5 and 6 of Part 2. Modular height (a), 75mm.

Application: For main switch and electrical plant room access doors. BS 5378 Appendix A,
complete with supplementary signs as shown.

Part 1, A.1.4., A.1.3 with supplementary sign ‘Authorised persons only’. Part
3, A.3.8.

Application: For use with permit to work systems, BS 5378 Appendix A, complete with
supplementary signs as shown.

Part 3, A.1.3. Printed on rigid plastic, with hanging loop, with supplementary wording ‘Do no
operatre. Work in progress’.

Application For use at each emergency stop. BS 5378 Appendix A, complete with
supplementary signs as shown.

Part 3, A.4.5. With supplementary sign ‘Emergency stop push-button’.

Comply with BS 3974 Part 1, or equivalent European/American Standards for fixings. Ensure
that fixings such as expanding anchors are tested for tensile loading in accordance with BS
5080 or equivalent.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 124 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C14 SEISMIC CONTROL AND VIBRATIONS

1 General

Materials, equipment, and associated works shall be carried out in strict accordance with
International Building Code, Class 2A.

Flexible connections within runs of containment, cables, wire ways, cable trays etc shall be
provided at crossing of seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by
different structural elements, or where they terminate with connection to equipment that is
anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach
equipment.
Electrical equipment shall be provided with restrained isolators. Where clearance between
anchor and the adjacent surface exceeds 3.2mm washers shall be installed on anchor bolts.

If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at

upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members shall be provided.

2 Materials

a) Spring Mounts

i. Helical steel spring mounts shall comprise single or multiple spring elements
fitted to a plated steel base plate. A rubber/neoprene pad shall be bonded
beneath the bottom plate.

ii. The springs shall have an outside diameter of not less than 75% of the operating
height and be selected to have at least 50% overload capacity.

iii. All mountings shall incorporate a lockable levelling device. There shall be
provision for bolting through the base plate in at least two places.

iv. Vertically restrained spring mountings shall be as above but include a

mechanism that provided an adjustable vertical limit stop to prevent spring
extension when load is decreased.

v. Turret compression mountings - shall comprise a synthetic formulated rubber

compound turret in compression between two steel plates with complete lateral
freedom for deformation. All metal surfaces must be covered to avoid corrosion
and have friction pads top and bottom. Bolt holes shall be provided in the top
and
bottom plates to facilitate fixing.

vi. The rubber turret shall be resistant to oil, sunlight, corrosion and ozone.

vii. Turret compression mountings shall not be employed where ambient or

equipment temperatures exceed the manufactures recommendations.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 125 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

b) Helical Spring Compression Hangers

Spring compression hangers shall have a helical steel spring fitted with acoustic rubber
end caps fitted incorporated within a steel hanger box

c) Vibration isolation bases

i. For vibration isolators the noise and vibration isolator types, minimum operating
static deflections, and supplemental bases shall be selected and provided to the
engineer for approval.

ii. Isolators exposed to the outdoors shall have weather-proof finish on all parts
with plated bolts, etc. Other materials used for vibration and seismic control are
detailed below:

iii. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and fabricated
by the isolation equipment manufacturer. Include equipment static loadings,
power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loadings.

iv. Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel shapes, plates,
and bars conforming to BS ISO 4997. Include support brackets to anchor base
to isolation units.

v. Include pre-located equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or
rails.

vi. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height with
not less than 25 mm clearance above the floor.

vii. Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural frame. Pour
concrete into base with relocated equipment anchor bolts.

viii. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and provide for
anchor bolts and equipment support.

ix. Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.

x. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 126 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C - STANDARD SPECIFICATION - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C15 EMERGENCY LIGHTING – ADDREESABLE CENTRAL MONITORING SYSTEM

1 General and System Requirement

(a) Design, supply, install, test and commissioning an addressable central monitoring
emergency lighting system powered by individual battery-operated emergency light
fitting during mains failure.

(b) The prime purpose of this document is to produce a technical facility of a consistent
and high installation standard.

(c) This Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design, manufacture, works test
and delivery of the equipment required to provide emergency lighting to site.

(d) To provide adequate lighting to all areas of the building, internally and externally at
final exists, to enable personnel to leave the building safely in the event of fire and/or
major power failure. The system will provide sufficient levels of illumination to
technical and plant specifications to allow basic fault-finding investigation to take
place and safely allow controlled shut downs of the system.

(e) Equipment shall comply generally with IEC950 and flammability rating shall be
appropriate for installation in a non-hazardous environment. Protection against
electro-magnetic emissions is required.

(f) All equipment shall be new and preferably manufactured under quality control
conditions certified to ISO9000.

(g) The electrical equipment supplied shall conform in design, materials and performance
with
IEC 6036
IEC 61048
IEC 60598
IEC 60364
CISPR 15-am2

(h) Emergency lighting shall be provided in all rooms, corridors, escape routes,
plantrooms and over all external exit doors. The system shall be designed to meet
the requirements of IEC60598, CISPR 15-am2 , and IEC 60364 (all sub sections).

(i) The minimum illumination levels shall be:

i) Minimum – 1 lux.
ii) Average – 10.8 lux

(j) In general areas the emergency lighting shall comprise of non-maintained luminaires
supplied from the central battery system.

(k) The luminaire layout shown on the tender drawings is indicative only. The system
provided shall be designed and installed to comply with the specified NFPA I EN I BS
and the requirements of the local approving authorities. The contractor’s obligations
include the preparation of all necessary drawings and submissions required to obtain

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 127 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

the required approvals, which is required prior to ordering of equipment. The

Contractor shall allow for all necessary provisions to comply with the latest approval
authority requirements.

2 Design Parameters

(a) The Central monitoring system equipment shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 I
9002 certified company to meet the requirements of BS 5266, EN 50171, EN 50172,
BS7671 and the local approval authority.

(b) The emergency lighting. system & all its components shall be designed & installed to
meet the local approval authority requirements & the respective EN1838, BS EN
5266, BSEN50171 and BSEN 50172 standards applicable to this project and shall
bear the CE certification for Electro-Magnetic compatibility. The entire system
including associated central monitoring panel/ Emergency distribution panels/
Emergency and Exit lights s all be manufactured by a specialist manufacturer from
one range of product. The product shall have local civil defence approval certificates.

(c) The emergency load shall be for duration of 3Hours with 100% light output from each
lamp connected to emergency operation

(d) The Central monitoring equipment shall comprise of modular units as defined in the
system philosophy.

(e) The Contractor shall ensure that the equipment manufacturer provides technical data
to demonstrate that the equipment meets the specification requirements.

(f) This data shall include the following:

i. Performance data relating to the Central monitoring equipment.

ii. Photometric data proving the design lighting levels are achieved.

(g) Protection coordination calculations.

(h) The equipment manufacturer shall ensure that the equipment supplied meets the
following minimum design standards:

− Defined escape routes shall be illuminated to provide initial illumination that is

not less than an average of 10.8 lux and at any point, not less than 1.1 Lux,
measured along the path of egress at floor level. The level shall be maintained
the same at the end of the rated duration of 180 minutes. A maximum to
minimum illumination uniformity ratio of 40:1 shall not be exceeded.

− Undefined escape routes or open areas shall be illuminated to an average of

1.1 lux anywhere in the area.

− Hazardous areas are illuminated to 10% of the normal lighting level.

− In addition, consideration shall be allowed to illuminate the following points of

emphasis:
i. Near each intersection of corridors
ii. Near each exit door

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 128 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

iii. Near each change of direction (other than on a staircase)

iv. Near each staircase so that each flight of stairs receives direct light
v. Near any other change of floor level
vi. Outside each final exit and close to it
vii. Near each fire alarm call point
viii. Near firefighting equipment
ix. Near exit and safety signs required by the enforcing authority
x. Near first aid points
xi. In toilets greater than 8m2 and in all toilets for the disabled.

Note: For the purposes of this clause 'near' is normally considered to be within
2m measured horizontally

− All emergency lights in ID areas are maintained luminaries (connected fixtures) of

suitable wattage. However, the illumination level shall be designed for an average
of 10.8 Lux and a minimum of 1.1 Lux measured along the path of egress at floor
level according to the local authority.

− Emergency illumination shall be designed in full compliance to NFPA 101 section

7.9. The performance shall comply with section 7.9.2.1. Emergency and exit
lighting shall be provided for all areas including the retail, office etc. within the
building form the central battery system. In the future fit-out areas, all the
emergency lighting shall be provided with a 2m length of cable to facilitate
reasonable relocation of emergency luminaires by the tenant to suit their bespoke
fit-out, yet not compromise the safety requirements

− Lighting Level calculations to this effect shall be submitted along with the technical
submittal for the product.

− Comply with BS EN 61000 for EMC emissions and immunity.

3 System Description

Central Monitoring System Unit

The central monitoring facility shall provide a fully addressable system, which
monitors and tests emergency fitting individually, in groups or as a complete system.
Each emergency fitting shall have its own addressable interface, which shall be
programmable and unique to that fitting.

The control module should have the following features as a minimum: -

• Monitor & control all test cycles & functions
• Indicate every status of the system & the connected luminaries
• Display & program the status of each circuit
• Conduct an Earth Leakage test on each circuit.
• Luminaries’ failure shall be displayed with text location
• Communicate and program the function of addressable electronic ballast on every
slave luminaries.
• Programming for the potential free contacts for BMS operation.
• Programming and status of the Sub circuit monitoring inputs and the associated
luminaries.
• Liquid Crystal Display

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 129 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

• Zonal/ Group L.E.D.'s

• Security Access via a 5 digit keyboard
• Its own stand by batteries

It shall also display battery voltage level, withdrawn battery current in test or emergency
modes, charge failures, interrupted battery charge circuit, luminiare failure with address
with text location, subcircuit or sub distribution board supply failure with address & text
location, function test, battery test, earth leakage failure with respect to circuit. Both tests
can be manually programmed. The control module has three LED's for status indication of
mains supply ON/OFF, luminaire or unit failure & battery supply.

The central monitoring shall be able to test each fitting and report its status via the
LCD. In addition it also indicates its group location via the zonal L.E.D's and report
back to the BMS via data link all such status reports.

The LCD shall provide the following

information: Each fitting's address
number.
An English text label of the fitting’s precise location, fault status and lamp
type. Fault analysis of the complete system.
Information completes with English text location of the operation of Addressable
sub-
circuit monitors.

Wiring for Emergency/Exit Lighting

All wiring of Emergency lighting and Exit lighting shall be carried out in fire resistant
flexible cable meeting the requirements of NFPA, BS 6387CWZ, BS7629 part1 and BS
5839 part2 (2002) and to the requirements of BS7671 and the approval authorities.

The above cable type is the minimum requirement for the system. Contractor shall as an
alternative allow in the tender separately for MICC cabling and associated accessories and
its installation requirements to meet the requirement of enhanced mechanical strength,
temperature with stand and testing requirements of BS-5839 part 2 (2002).
Contractor will have to pass the relevant savings to the Client which will be dependent on
the cable type finally used.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 130 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C - STANDARD SPECIFICATION - ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

C16 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) SYSTEM FLOOR STANDING UNITS

1 General Description and Requirements

(a) The UPS shall consist of a rectifier/battery charger, batteries, inverter, static bypass
transfer switch, synchronizing equipment, protective devices, external mechanical
bypass switch and accessories as specified herein that will automatically effect
continuity of electrical power within specified tolerances, without interruption, upon
failure or deterioration of the normal power supply. Continuity of electric power to the
load shall be maintained for an emergency period with the inverter supplied by the
batteries, up to the specified maximum time or until restoration of the normal power
supply.
(b) The UPS shall be designed in a modular way so as to enable the power of the UPS
installed to be easily increased on the Site by paralleling more than one module to
meet the new operating requirements and the desired reliability. In this connection,
transformation of a unitary module into a multi-module configuration shall be able to
be carried out directly on Site without returning the equipment to the factory for
modification and with a minimum installation down time.
(c) Single module system shall have the rectifier/charger, inverter, static bypass switch
and all the necessary monitoring and control functions contained in a single cabinet.
Multi-module system shall have separate cabinet containing the rectifier/charger,
inverter and the necessary monitoring and control functions for each module, and with
a separate dedicated cabinet to house the system control and monitoring functions
and static bypass switch.
(d) The UPS shall be designed for continuous reliable operation such that the
"MeanTime-Between-Failures" (MTBF) for individual modules of the UPS viz.
rectifier/charger unit, inverter unit and static switch etc. shall be more than 8760
hours.
(e) To ensure minimum down time, the "Mean-Time-To-Repair" (MTTR) of the UPS shall
not exceed 1 hour. The MTTR shall be the time excluding travelling time required to
diagnose the fault and restore the UPS to normal working condition by means of
module replacement at site.
(f) The ratings quoted above shall be regarded as the effective values after the
application of all appropriate derating factors. These ratings shall be adjusted to suit
local conditions, viz. maximum ambient temperature etc. Derating factor due to the
non-linearity of the load to be connected to the UPS shall be taken into account in
sizing the UPS.

2 Schedule of Standards
The whole of the UPS shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the latest
revision of the following standards.

BS 727 - Radio-interference measuring apparatus

BS 800 - Radio-interference limits
BS 4417 - Semiconductor rectifier equipment
BSCP 1013 - Earthing

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 131 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

3 Products

(a) System Operation

The UPS shall be designed to operate in the following modes:

i) Normal

The critical load shall be continuously supplied by the inverter. The

rectifier/battery charger shall derive power from the mains supply and supply
DC power to the inverter while simultaneously float charging the battery.

ii) Emergency

Upon failure of the mains supply the critical load shall be supplied by the
inverter, which without any switching, obtains its power from the storage
battery. There shall be no interruption to the critical load upon failure or
restoration of the mains supply. If the battery is exhausted before the
availability of the mains supply, the UPS shall shut down automatically.

iii) Recharge

Upon restoration of the mains supply, the rectifier/battery charger shall power
the inverter and simultaneously recharge the batter. This shall be an
automatic function and shall cause no interruption to the critical load.

iv) Static by-pass

If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair of internal
failures or in cases of heavy output overload, the static bypass transfer switch
shall transfer the load to the alternate external source without an interruption.
Retransfer to the load shall be accomplished after the UPS inverter
automatically synchronizes to the alternative bypass source. Once the
source are synchronized, the static bypass transfer switch shall transfer the
load from the bypass source to the UPS inverter output by paralleling the two
sources and allowing the inverter to ramp into the load and then
disconnecting the bypass input source.

v) Downgrade

If the battery only is to be taken out of service for maintenance, it shall be

disconnected from the rectifier/battery charger and inverter by means of a
circuit breaker. The UPS shall continue to function as specified herein,
except for power outage protection.

vi) Mechanical Bypass Mode

The UPS shall provide with an external mechanical bypass switch to manually
bypass the entire UPS for major maintenance and services purposes. Load
transfer to and from the bypass source shall be a "make-before-break" type

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 132 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

switching such that disturbances seen by the load during a bypass shall not
be greater than that specified in this Specification.
(b) Equipment Functional Requirements
Materials, Parts and Components

i) All materials and parts comprising the UPS shall be new, of current
manufacture, of a high grade and free from all defects and imperfections.

ii) All active electronic devices shall be solid state. All semiconductor devices
shall be hermetically sealed. All relays shall be dust tight.

iii) The maximum working voltage, current and di/dt of all solid-state power
components and electronic devices shall not exceed 75% of the ratings
established by their manufacturer. The operating temperature of solid-state
component cases shall not be greater than 75% of their ratings. Electrolytic
capacitors shall be computer grade and be operated at no more than 75% of
their voltage rating.

iv) The UPS shall be designed such that ringing transients, voltage spikes, and
surges etc. shall be suppressed and absent from the output of the UPS.

v) The UPS solid-state power switching circuits and control systems shall be
modular in construction for ease of maintenance and to minimize down time.
It is preferred that all solid-state power switching modules are of the draw-out
type removable from the front of the UPS.

vi) The UPS shall be designed to permit ready access to modules and
assemblies. The placement of parts, test points and terminals shall be such
that they are accessible for circuit checking, adjustment and maintenance
without the removal of any adjacent module or assembly.

(c) Self-diagnostic Aids

The UPS shall be provided with sufficient built-in diagnostic aids to facilitate
troubleshooting, maintenance and circuit calibration. Each circuit module of the UPS
shall be accompanied by suitable indicators and test points allowing the current status
of each module to be monitored as required. The UPS shall be equipped with an
event recorder so that hard copy of critical data or status can be made available for
analyzing when necessary.

(d) Construction and Mounting

i) The UPS shall be constructed in heavy duty metal enclosures, designed for
wall mounting.

ii) The individual cabinets shall be capable of being arranged butted side-byside.
Wire runs shall be protected in a manner to separate power and control
wiring. Provisions shall be made in the cabinet to permit installation of input,
output and inter-cabinet cabling, using raceway or conduit.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 133 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

iii) The UPS cabinets shall be cleaned, primed and painted to the manufacturer's
standard.

(e) Ventilation

Adequate forced air cooling by suitably rated blowers shall be installed to ensure that
all components are operated within their environmental ratings. The power supply of
blowers shall be from the UPS and treated as part of the critical load. Spare blowers
shall be provided. All blowers shall be equipped with wind vanes sensor connected to
an alarm and the control panels.

(f) Rectifier/Charger Unit

i) The rectifier/charger unit shall be provided with an input moulded case circuit
breaker. The circuit breaker shall be of the frame size and trip rating to
supply full rated current to the critical load and recharge the drained battery at
the same time.

ii) A dry type power transformer of the isolated winding type shall be used for
the rectifier unit. When operating under the full load condition and at the
maximum ambient temperature, the temperature of the transformer's hottest
spot winding shall not exceed the limit of the transformer insulation class of
material.

iii) The sub-cycle in-rush current of the rectifier/charger unit shall be less than 8
times the normal full load input current.

iv) The rectifier/charger unit shall provide for input current limiting whereby the
UPS module shall draw only sufficient power to drive the critical load. In
addition, this facility shall also provide a preset maximum power level to limit
the charging current for the battery. Preferably, the current limit can be
adjustable from 100% to 125% of the full input current rating.

v) The rectifier/charger unit shall provide features whereby when the AC power
is returned to the AC input bus after the UPS has been operating on battery
power or has been de-energized, the total initial current requirement at the
input terminals will not exceed 20% of rated load current, and the current will
gradually increase to 100% of full rating over a 15-second time interval.

vi) The rectifier/charger shall have an output filter to minimize ripple current into
the battery. Under no condition shall the RMS ripple current into battery
exceed 3% of the average charging current. Filtering shall be adequate to
ensure that the DC output of the rectifier/charger will meet the input
requirements of the inverter. When the battery is disconnected, normal
operation shall be maintained with the DC voltage derived from the rectifier.

vii) In addition to supplying power to the inverter, the rectifier/charger shall be

capable of recharging the battery as specified herein. Charging current shall
be voltage regulated and with current limiting. The charging rate shall be
sufficient to restore the battery from discharge to 95% charge within ten (10)
times the discharge time at full load. After the battery is recharged, the

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 134 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

rectifier/charger shall maintain the battery at full charge until the next
emergency operation.
(g) Inverter Unit
i) The inverter shall be a solid state device capable of accepting the output of
the rectifier/charger or battery and providing an AC output with the operating
characteristics as specified hereafter.

ii) The output of the inverter unit shall be connected to a transformer network
and a 3-phase filter to the output terminals. The transformer shall be a dry
type transformer. When operating under the full load condition and at the
maximum ambient temperature, the temperature of the transformer's hottest
spot winding shall not exceed the limit of the transformer insulation class of
material. The UPS inverter unit shall have a low output impedance to high
harmonics to keep the harmonic voltages caused by the load to a minimum.

iii) The output frequency of the inverter shall be maintained in a phase-locked

condition with the frequency of the bypass source as long as it is within the
specified limited. In the event the bypass line frequency goes out of
tolerance, the inverter shall phase lock to a built-in temperature compensated
oscillator. In such a case, the total frequency deviation including short time
fluctuations and long term drift, shall not exceed + 0.25% from the nominal
frequency.

iv) The inverter shall have fault sensing, a static interrupter and output circuit
breaker for the removal of the inverter output from the critical load, without
exceeding the limits stated in this Specification.

(h) Battery Circuit Breaker

The UPS shall be provided with a battery circuit breaker. When open, the battery
shall be completely isolated from the rectifier/charger and from the inverter. The UPS
shall automatically be disconnected from the battery by opening the circuit breaker
when the discharge limit of volts per cell is reached, or when signaled by other control
functions. The circuit breaker may also be manually operated during servicing of the
batteries.

(i) Control and Indication

The UPS shall be fitted with an integral control and indication panel. In case of a
separate system control cabinet being provided, it shall match the construction and
appearance of the UPS modules and shall contain bus bar connections for the output
and bypass switch. The control and indication panel or the system control cabinet
shall include all the necessary instrumentation, alarms and indicators showing the
operation of the UPS.

i) Instrumentation

The UPS shall be provided with, as a minimum, the meters indicated below. All
meters shall have an accuracy of at least + 2% of full scale.

• Input voltage and current with phase selection.

• DC battery charge/discharge current.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 135 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

• DC battery voltage.
• UPS output voltage and current with phase selection.
• Reserve source input voltage and current with phase selection.
• Frequency of UPS output and reserve source.
ii) Alarms and Indications

The following separate alarms shall be provided for effective monitoring of the UPS
operation, with audible and visual alarms. The UPS shall also be provided with the
appropriate interfaces required to connect to the project’s BacNet BMS:

1) Rectifier
• Input under-voltage
• Over-temperature shutdown
• Blown fuse

2) Battery
• Breakers open
• Discharging
• Battery low voltage

3) Inverter
• Output under-voltage
• Output over-voltage
• Phase lock lost
• Oscillator failure
• Over-temperature shutdown
• Blown fuse
• Overload
• Overload shutdown
• Inverter off

4) Static Transfer Switch

• Transfer to reserve inhibited
• Re-Transfer to inverter inhibited
• Load on reserve

5) Cabinet
• Ambient over temperature
• Fan failure

6) Control

The following system level control functions shall be provided:

• UPS/bypass transfer/re-transfer switch
• Emergency shutdown push button with protective cover
• Lamp test/reset pushbuttons
• Audio alarm test/reset
• AC output voltage adjustable for + 5%

7) Mimic Bus

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 136 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

A mimic bus with indicating lights shall be provided on the control and
indication panel or the system control cabinet. The mimic shall depict a
complete single line diagram of the UPS. The following circuit breakers shall
be indicated:-

• module AC input circuit breaker;

• battery circuit breaker;
• system output circuit breaker;
• system bypass circuit breaker.

8) Emergency Shutdown

Local emergency shutdown provisions shall be provided. Activation of the

local emergency shutdown switch shall cause the module input, output and
battery circuit breakers to open, completely isolating the UPS from all sources
of power. The critical load shall be automatically transferred to bypass
uninterrupted when the emergency shutdown is activated.

(j) System Bypass Switches

i) System Mechanical Bypass Switch

The UPS shall be provided with an external mechanical bypass switch to

manually bypass the entire UPS for maintenance and service purposes.
Load transfer to and from the bypass source shall be a "make-before-break"
type switching such that disturbances seen by the load during a bypass shall
not be greater than that specified in this Specification.

ii) System Static Bypass Switch

A static bypass switch shall be equipped to provide uninterrupted transfer of

the load to the bypass source automatically when a malfunction or overload
occurs in the UPS. The transfer shall be performed on "make-before-break"
basis such that the static bypass switch is closed before the static interrupter
and/or the output circuit breaker is tripped open. The static bypass switch
shall preferably be paralleled with a circuit breaker which is activated together
with the static switch and subsequently taking over from the static switch. If
the transfer of load to bypass source is the result of an overload, when the
overload is removed the load to bypass source is the result of an overload,
when the overload is removed the load shall be retransferred back to the
inverter either automatically or manually depending on the setting of a
selection switch.

(k) Storage Battery

A storage battery bank shall be furnished for the UPS with sufficient ampere-hour
rating to maintain the UPS output at the rated output capacity and for a minimum
duration of 60 minutes. It shall be of heavy-duty industrial type design for power
service. Battery cells shall be rechargeable, low maintenance, high performance
nickel-cadmium type with cell containers of high impact plastic to give a leakproof
seal. All battery cells shall be equipped with safety vent caps to prevent internal cell
explosions caused by hydrogen gas given off during the later stages of recharge

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 137 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

cycle. All terminal pillars, connectors and bolt sets of the battery bank shall be coated
with petroleum jelly.

i) The ride through capability of the battery bank shall be calculated under the
following conditions:-

- an ambient temperature of 20 deg.C.

- an end discharge voltage of 1.0V for nickel cadmium cell.
ii) Battery shall be supplied with:-

- either racks or cubicles protected with electrolyte resistant paint;

- intercell and intertier connectors protected with anti-corrosive plastic
covers;
- hydrometer and thermometer (vented batteries only);
- special tools and fittings required to assemble the battery.

(l) Power Cable

Power cable shall be provided in accordance with the requirements in the LV cable
section of the Specification.

4 Electrical Characteristics and Performance

(a) Protection

i) The UPS shall have built-in self-protection against:-

- Over and under voltage power line surges.

- Over voltage and voltage surges introduced at the output terminals by
parallel sources.
- Load switching and circuit breaker operation in the distribution
system.
- Sudden changes in output load exceeding the rating limit.
- Short circuits at the output terminals.
- Power semiconductors in the UPS shall be fused with fast acting
fuses so that the loss of any one power semiconductor will not cause
cascading failures. Each fuse shall preferably be provided with a
blown fuse indicator on the control panel.
- Thermostats shall be fitted to monitor the temperature of the power
semiconductors, such that when over-temperature is sensed, the
UPS shall automatically be shut down and the critical load transferred
to the bypass source via the static bypass switch.

i) The UPS shall have built-in protection against permanent damage to itself
and the connected load for all predictable types of failures within the UPS.
Fast acting current-limiting devices shall be used to protect against failure of
solid state devices. Internal failure of the UPS shall cause the UPS to trip off-
line and switch to bypass automatically. All failure shall generate visual and
audible indications.

ii) Information shall be generated within the UPS to maintenance personnel

regarding the reasons for tripping.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 138 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(b) Audible Noise

Noise generated by the UPS under any normal operating condition shall not exceed
the allowable sound pressure level of 75 dBA measured at 2 meter from the nearest
surface of the UPS cabinet.

(c) Electrical Characteristics

i) Input

- Voltage 400V AC + 10%

- Frequency 50 Hz + 2%
- Power walk-in 20% to 100% ofrated load in15 seconds
- Power factor Unity to 0.7 lagging
ii) Output

- Power rating as indicated on minimum drawings

- Power rating 110% for 60 minutes, overload 125% for 10 minutes,

150% for 10 seconds

- Nature of load refer to schematic wiring diagram(s) on the Drawings

- Steady state for balance load + output voltage + 5% manual

regulation loads adjustable Dynamic output voltage + 8% for 50% full
load step regulation + 5% for loss of AC input + 5% for return of AC
input + 5% for uninterrupted transfer on critical load from UPS to
bypass or vice versa, recovery time under all conditions to nominal
voltage within 100 ms.

- Phase 120 deg. + deg. for displacement balance load, 120 deg. +
deg. for 30% unbalanced loads

- Harmonic 3% maximum for any distortion single harmonics, 5%

maximum for total value

iii) Efficiency

The UPS efficiency shall be 80% minimum under the following conditions:-

- The UPS is operating at rated load.

- The battery is fully charged and floating on the system.
- The input voltage is within the specified limits.
- The load power factor is between unity and 0.80 lagging.
- Efficiency shall be defined as the ratio of output kW to the input kW.
iv) Radio Suppression

During the normal operation of the UPS, no radio interference shall be

allowed to exceed limits laid down in BS800 when measurements are made in
accordance with BS727.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 139 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

5 Installation Requirements

(a) General

i) All equipment, cabling etc. shall be installed in locations as indicated on the

Drawings or as specified.

ii) All equipment except portable equipment shall be firmly held in place.
Fastenings and supports shall be adequate to support their loads with a
safety factor of at least three.

iii) The requirements on the provisions of cables, cable trays, conduit and
trunking etc shall be in accordance with the relevant sections of the
Specification.

(b) Equipment Earthing

All cabinet(s) shall be solidly bonded to a good earth in accordance with BS-CP1013
using adequate section of cable or busbar. The earth connection at the cabinet(s)
shall be made to the frame earth terminal provided or alternatively to a substantial
part of the basic frame rather than to a bolted-on panel.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 140 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C - STANDARD SPECIFICATION – IT/ELV INSTALLATION

C17 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM & ACCESSORIES

1 General

(a) Work Description

i) This section specified the minimum requirements on the quality, performance

and standard for the structured cabling system complying with the latest
design guidelines issuance of Etisalat. /Du/TRA

ii) The Contractor shall provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and
services to supply and install the provision for Structured Cabling System as
indicated on the drawings and specified in these specifications.

iii) The overall system requirements for the installation shall comprise:

Prior to placing an order of the equipment indicated within the tender, the
work package contractor shall submit comprehensive documentation
comprising working drawings, catalogues and descriptive literature of
components, maintenance manuals etc for the engineer’s study and approval.

The structured cabling system supplier shall be an authorized structured

cabling reseller of a reputable manufacturer. The specialist shall adhere to all
manufacturers design engineering and installation procedures and utilize UL
certified and manufacturers approved components.

iv) The works package contractor / specialist supplier / contractor shall be fully
expected to liaise and develop the structured cabling system procedures with
the engineer and the client body. The works package contractor shall be
expected to highlight realistic programme milestones by which critical
software / matrix configuration information shall be required.

v) Recognition of the time required to fully test not only the structured cabling
system but all various interlinked systems as well shall be given by the work
package contractor / suppliers. A comprehensive test schedule and method
statement shall be provided within six weeks of signing the contract
documentation.

vi) The SCS supplier will quantify all outlets indicated on the drawings and allow
patching facility for all on a patch panel with 20% spare capacity within his
tender proposal.

(b) System Overview

i) The provision of a structured cabling system to support the effective

management of a network communications system. The structured cabling
system shall be required to operate 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to support
critical business application.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 141 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

ii) The structured cabling system shall provide an infrastructure, which meets the
requirements of Etisalat.

iii) The implementation of structured cabling system that supports ALL networks
services i.e. data, voice, video and broadband / wireless fidelity.

iv) All data network switches required, and as indicated on the drawings shall be
provided within this work package.

v) The implementation of a “structured cabling system” which shall be referred to

as SCS for the purpose of integrating all the voice and data and low voltage
signals (i.e. MATV, Broadband service) into a common distribution platform.

(c) Grounding and Bonding

Communication bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with international

and/or Local Regulations. Horizontal equipment includes cross connect frames, patch
panels and racks, active telecommunication equipment and test apparatus and
equipment. When required by local code, provide a Telecommunications Bonding
Backbone utilizing a #6-AWG or larger bonding conductor that provides direct bonding
between equipment rooms and telecommunications closets. This is a part of the
grounding and bonding infrastructure, and is independent of equipment or cable.

(d) Description of Required Solution

Structured Cabling System: Furnish and install, complete with all accessories, a
Structured Cabling System (SCS). The SCS shall serve as a vehicle for transport of
data, video, broadband and voice telephony signals throughout the network from
designated demarcation points to outlets located at various desks. Workstations and
other locations as indicated on the contract drawings and described herein.
Applications standards supported shall include, but not limited to IEEE 802.3,
10BASE-T, 100Base-TX, IEEE 802.6, 4 Mbbps (328ft [100m] 104 Workstations) and
TP-PMD. In addition, the backbone cabling and horizontal links / channels shall be
capable of supporting high-end applications such as Gigabit Ethernet and 52/155/622
Mbps ATM. The cabling shall include, but are not limited to IBM 3270, Baseband and
Broadband video.

(e) Contractor Qualifications

Contractor Selection: The contractor selected for this Project shall be certified by the
SCS Manufacturer, adhere to the Engineering, installation and testing procedures and
utilize the Authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels in
provisioning this project.

Contract Experience and Training: The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects
of this work and shall be required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems
of similar type and size. The Contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment
necessary for successful installation and testing of optical and Category 6 metallic
premise distribution systems and have personnel who are, adequately trained in the
use of such tools and equipment.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 142 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Contractor Resume: A Resume of qualification shall be submitted with the SCS

specialists Contractor’s proposal indicating the following:

i) A list of recently completed projects of similar type and size with contract
names and telephone numbers for each.

ii) A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the installed integrity of
metallic and fibre optic cable systems on this project.

iii) A technical resume of experience for the Contractor’s Project Manager and
on-site installation supervisor who shall be assigned to this project.

iv) Any sub-Contractor, who shall assist the SCS contractor in performance of
this work, shall have the same training and certification as the SCS
contractor.

(f) Special Requirements for Cable Routing and Installation

Cabling: All communications cabling used throughout this project shall comply with
the requirements as outlined in the appropriated local codes. All cabling shall meet
the relevant fire performance standards for the environment in which they are
installed. All cabling shall have PVC outer sheaths.

Cable Pathway: In floor trenches and raised floor areas where duct, cable trays or
conduit are not available, the Contractor shall bundle, in bundles of 50 or less, station
wiring with plastic cable ties snug, but not deforming the cable geometry. The cable
bundling shall be supported via “J” hooks attached to the existing building structure
and framework at a maximum of 1.5 meter intervals. The contractor shall adhere to
the manufacturer’s requirements for bending radius and pulling tension of all data and
voice cables. The contractor shall ensure that all sharp or burred edges are properly
protected prior to the pulling of cables. In ceiling areas, provide cable trays for groups
of more than ten cables and as indicated on the drawings.

Fire Stopping: Sealing of openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke
walls, existing or created by the contractor for cable pass through shall be the
responsibility of the contractor. Sealing material and application of this material shall
be accomplished in such a manner that is acceptable to the local fire and building
authorities having jurisdiction over this work. Creation of such openings as are
necessary for cable passage between locations as shown on the drawings shall be
the responsibility of the contractor’s work. Any openings created by or for the
contractor and left unused shall also be sealed as part of this work. The contractor
shall ensure that the fire-blocking compound is approved by the cable manufacturer to
ensure no reaction with cable sheaths.

(g) Work External to the Building

Any work external to the confines of this building as shown on the drawings shall be
governed by the provisions of this specifications, applicable drawings and Etisalat
regulation.

(h) System Performance

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 143 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

The system shall utilize a network of fibre optic, and unshielded twisted pair, riser, tie
and station cables. Cables and terminations shall be provided and located as shown
and in the quantities indicated on the drawings. Fibre cables shall terminate on Fibre
Distribution Centers (FDC’s) or modular patch panels located in all demarcation and
termination pints shown on the drawings. All cables and terminations shall be
identified at all locations. All cables shall be terminated and labelled in an
alphanumeric sequence at all termination locations. All copper cable terminations
shall comply with, and be tested to TIA/EIA 568A and TSB-67 standards for Category
6 and Proposed Category 6. Available and unused pairs between the ER and TC (s)
shall be terminated and identified as spare at each location. Station cables shall
terminate on one or two gang wall plates equipped as shown on the drawings.

Copper Cabling Performance: The cabling system proposed shall meet or exceed the
following guaranteed channel performance values when configured as a worst-case
channel. All values in the table (based on the equations below) shall be guaranteed
to apply to worst-case 100 meter channels with full cross-connects and consolidation
points.

GUARANTEED SPECIFICATIONS CHANNEL PERFORMANCE

Pr-pr PS pr-pr PS Return Prop Delay

Freq Insertion NEXT NEXT ELFEXT ELFEXT LOSS DELAY SKEW
(Mhz) Loss (dB) (Db) (db) (dB) (Db) (Db) (ns) (ns)
1.00 2.1 72.7 70.3 63.2 60.2 19.0 580 30
4.00 4.0 63.0 60.6 51.2 48.2 19.0 562 30
8.00 5.7 58.2 55.6 45.2 42.2 19.0 557 30
10.00 6.3 56.6 54.0 43.2 40.2 19.0 555 30
16.00 8.0 53.2 50.6 39.1 36.1 19.0 553 30
20.00 9.0 51.6 49.0 37.2 34.2 19.0 552 30
25.00 10.1 50.0 47.4 35.3 32.3 18.0 551 30
31.25 11.4 48.4 45.7 33.3 30.3 17.1 550 30
62.50 16.4 43.4 40.6 27.3 24.3 14.1 549 30
100.00 21.1 39.9 37.1 23.3 20.3 12.0 548 30
125.00 23.8 38.3 35.4 21.3 18.3 11.0 547 30
155.00 26.9 36.7 33.8 19.4 16.4 10.1 547 30
175.00 28.7 35.8 32.9 18.4 15.4 9.6 547 30
200.00 30.9 34.8 31.9 17.2 14.2 9.0 547 30
250.00 35.0 33.1 30.2 15.3 12.3 8.0 546 30

Minimum Guaranteed Channel Performance (100 meter, 4 Connector Channel)

Fibre Optic Cabling Performance (Multimode)

The fibre optic cable shall have a maximum loss of 3.4 dB/km. The fibre optic
connectors shall have a mean insertion loss of 0.1 dB and standard deviation of 0.1
dB. The calculated channel insertion loss for this combination with three connections
is only 1.7 dB, allowing 0.8 dB of margin.

(i) Penetrations of Walls, Floors and Ceilings

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 144 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

The Contractor shall make no penetration of floors, walls or ceiling without the prior
consent of the Engineer.

Where penetrations through acoustical walls or other walls for cableways have been
provided for the Contractor such penetrations shall be sealed by the Contractor in
compliance with applicable code requirements and as directed by the Engineer.

Where penetrations through fire-rated walls for cableways have been provided for the
Contractor, such penetrations shall be sealed by the Contractor as required by code
as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of on-
site activities, submit to Client for review by the Engineer, details of any special
systems to be used.

2 Products

(a) Incoming Service Ducts and Manholes

i) The containment system shall include all cable tray

ii) Provide containment system from the service providers point of entry
to the building to the Main telephone equipment room.
iii) For the incoming services, provide UPVC ducts as shown on the
drawings, From the service providers manhole to the point of entry, which
shall be coordinated with the service provider and allow all provisions to
comply with their external network and lead-in requirements.
iv) Where shown on the drawings and also where required to facilitate a
bend in the route telephone manholes shall be constructed with appropriate
service provider approved manhole accessories, covers etc. to ensure that
the duct route shall allow the simple and easy installation of telephone cables.
v) Nylon draw ropes (12mm dia) shall be installed in each duct for later
installation of cables.

(b) Horizontal Containment

i) Ensure that the telephone cable containment system trunking and/or

conduit are continuous between every outlet point and the patch panel, which
shall be located as shown in the drawings.
ii) The containment may be a combination of GI trunking run in the ceiling voids
and concealed 25mm dia PVC conduits from the trunking in the ceiling voids
dropping to the outlet locations outlets.

(c) Vertical Containment (Cable Tray Riser)

i) Provide cable trays in the risers as shown on the drawings to support

the backbone cables between the MDF and IDF rooms, and the horizontal
cables from the IDF rooms to the consolidation points.
ii) Riser cable trays to be galvanized steel heavy-duty deep sided (min
50mm) return flange supported on galvanized steel ‘U’ channels.
iii) Tray width dimensions to be as shown on the drawings and coordinated with
the telecommunications service provider, prior to order and installation.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 145 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

iv) Cable trays shall not be filled greater than the TIA/EIA-569-A maximum fill for
the particular tray type or 40%.

(d) Cabinets

i) As per ETISALAT/Du/TRA requirements

(e) Indoor Equipment Cabinet for ONU-Wall Mounted Types should be:

i) 12U, 19” wiring/equipment cabinet

ii) 600mmwide x 150/300mm deep
iii) Glass Front Door
iv) Main distribution Frame should be:
v) 22U, 19” wiring/equipment cabinet
vi) 600mmwide x 150/300mm deep
vii) Glass Front Door

(f) Labelling

(g) Label Elements

i) All floor outlets, patch frames and horizontal cables should be
labelled.
ii) The labelling scheme would follow a scheme to be agreed on with the
Engineer.
iii) Horizontal Cable Labels
iv) Label all horizontal cables at both ends using a self-laminating, wrap
around label.
v) User Outlet Labels
vi) Each RJ45 user outlet should be labelled with a unique identifier, typically
using the agreed scheme.

(h) Ensure that the maximum distance between any outlets and the patch panel
is not more than 90metres.

(i) Horizontal Sub-System

i) Horizontal Cabling

 The Contractor shall supply horizontal cables to connect each

information outlet to the backbone subsystem on the same floor.

 The type of horizontal cables to be used for work location shall be:

(1) Category 6 cable should be high-speed, 100-ohm high

performance cable with excellent pair-to-pair NEXT levels.
(2) Category 6 cable should provide excellent high-speed
transmission and should specified out to 250 MHz and
supports applications such as 155 Mb/s ATM, 622 ATM and
the IEEE 802.3 1000 BASE-T (Gigabit Ethernet) standard
using parallel transmission scheme technology.
(3) Category 6 rated, 4-pair Unshielded balanced Twisted Pair
(UTP), PVC.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 146 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(4) Be UL Listed.

 All UTP cables shall confirm to ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B Commercial

building Telecommunications Cabling Standard (latest amendment
and including all applicable addenda) and ISO/IEC 11801
(International) Generic Cabling for Customer Premises Standard
(latest amendment and including all applicable addenda).

ii) Faceplates (RJ45)

All faceplates shall:

 Colour of face plate to match with socket outlets to the approval of the
Engineer.

 Be applicable to copper applications

 Have write on designation labels for circuit identification together with

a clear plastic cover

 Have several color selections

 Have stainless steel option available

 Be made by an ISO 9001 and 1400 Certified Manufacturer

iii) Work Area Cords

 Modular cords: Category 6 compliant

Category 6, modular work area cords shall:

(1) Consist of eight insulated 24 AWG, stranded copper

conductors, arranged in four color-coded twisted-pairs.
(2) Be equipped with modular 8-position (RJ45 style) plugs on
both ends, wired straight through to T538B.
(3) Be backwards compatible with lower performing categories.
(4) Have color-coded insert molded strain relief boot with a latch
guard to protect against snagging.
(5) Be resistant to corrosion for humidity, extreme temperatures,
and airborne contaminants.
(6) Utilize cable that exhibits power sun NEXT performance.
(7) Be available in any custom length and standard lengths 3, 5,
7 and 10 feet.
(8) Be made by an ISO 9001 and 14001 Certified Manufacturer.
(9) Be UL listed.

(j) Copper Termination Block (Voice Riser and Cross-connection).

(k) The termination block shall support the appropriated category applications and
facilitate cross-connection and inert-connection using their cross-connection wire or
patch cords.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 147 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

(l) The termination block shall be 110-type or equivalent and shall comply with the
following:

i) Be made of flame retardant thermoplastic, with the base consisting of

horizontal index strips for terminating up to 25 pairs of conductors.

ii) Contain access openings for rear to front cable routing to the point of
termination.

iii) Have termination strips on the base to be notched and divided into 5-pair
increments.

iv) Have clear label holders with the appropriate colored inserts available for the
wiring blocks. The insert labels provided with the product shall contain
vertical lines spaced on 5-pair circuit size and shall not interfere with running,
tracing or removing patch cords. Label holders must be capable of mounting
between each row of connecting blocks.

(m) Voice Riser Interconnect Patch Plugs / Cords

These plugs or cords will interconnect or patch the voice work area horizontal cable to
the voice riser wiring blocks wired to the Voice MC and IC respectively.

The interconnection patch plug shall be:

i) Category 6 verified.

ii) In 1 and 2-pair versions.

iii) Pair(s) determination shall be dependent on telephone handsets type and

model (i.e. some models digital phones sets require 4-wire).

iv) Both ends with 110 (or equivalent) and RJ-45 modular plugs respectively.

v) UL listed and flame rated.

(n) Modular Equipment Cords: Category 6 compliant

Category 6, modular equipment cords shall:

i) Consist of eight insulated 24 AWG, stranded copper conductors, arranged in

four colour-coded twisted pairs.

ii) Be equipped with modular 8-position (RJ45 style) plugs on both ends, wired
straight through to T568B.

iii) Be backwards compatible with lower performing categories.

iv) Have color-coded insert molded strain relief boot with a latch guard to protect
against snagging.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 148 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

v) Be resistant to corrosion from humidity, extreme temperatures, and airborne

contaminants.

vi) Utilize cable that exhibits power sum NEXT performance.

vii) Be available in variety of standard lengths up to 50-feet to be able to connect

equipment placed quite far away from the switches or routers.

viii) Be made by an ISO 9001 and 14001 Certified manufacturer.

ix) UL listed.

(o) Category 6 Modular Patch Panel

i) Be made of black anodized aluminium, in 24-hour and 48-port configurations.

ii) Accommodate at least 24 ports for each rack mount unit.

iii) Have circuits boards tested in both directions as required by ANSI/TIA/EIA-

568-B and ISO/IEC 11801.

iv) Have a linear crosstalk response to address applications up to 250 MHz.

v) Have insulation displacement accomplished with a single conductor impact

tool.

vi) Be backwards compatible to allow lower performing categories of cables or

connecting hardware to operate to their full capacity.

vii) Support industry standards for T568A or T568B wiring options on each
individual outlet.

viii) Allow for a minimum of 200 re-terminations without signal degredation below
standards compliance unit.

ix) Have a rear cable management bar for cable strain relief.

x) Have port identification numbers bar for cable strain relief.

xi) Have port identification numbers on both the front the rear of the panel.

xii) Have optional adhesive circuit identification and color-coding designation

strips provided with the panel.

xiii) Provide self-adhesive, clear label holders and white designation labels with
the panel, with optional color labels available.

xiv) Be made by an ISO 9001 and 14001 Certified Manufacturer.

xv) Be UL listed.

(p) Qualifications

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 149 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Manufacture: The products specified shall be supplied and produced by a single

manufacturer, with the exception of:

Racks and other hardware that are not defined as part of the channel test
configuration by TIA/EIA TSB67, Transmission Performance Specifications for Field
testing of unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling System.

The manufacturer shall have a minimum of seven (10) years’ experience and shall be
ISO 9001 Certified.

Contractor: The contractor selected to provide the installation of this system shall be
certified by the SCS Manufacturer in all aspects of design, installation and testing of
the products described herein, and have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience on
similar SCS cabling system.

3 Execution
(a) WORKMANSHIP: Components of the SCS system shall be installed in a neat,
workmanlike manner. Wiring colour codes shall be strictly observed and terminations
shall be uniform throughout the system. Identification markings and systems shall be
uniform. TIA/EIA 606 administration guidelines shall be used as standard for all SCS
wiring.
(b) Installation: All installations shall be made in conformance with EIA/TIA 568A,
IS11801 and EN 50173 standards and meet requirements of EIA/TIA 569, prEN
50174 and DIS 14763 installation guidelines. Special attention shall be made to
ensuring that the twists of the cable pairs are maintained tight up to the connection
point. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified
distribution cables are not exceed and cable bends maintain the proper radius during
the placement of the facilities.
(c) Bonding and Grounding: The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring an
approved ground at all newly installed distribution frames, and/or ensuring proper
bonding to any existing facilities. The Contractor shall also be responsible for
ensuring ground continuity by properly bonding all appropriate cabling, closures,
cabinets, service boxes, and framework. All grounds shall consist of appropriately
sized copper wire and shall be supplied from an approved building ground and
bonded to the main electrical ground. Grounding shall be in accordance with all local
codes and practices.

(d) Power Separation: The Contractor shall not place any distribution cabling alongside
power lines, or share the same conduit, channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus.
Power separation guidelines already stated shall be adhered to. It shall be the
responsibility of the contractor to highlight areas where these guidelines cannot be
met, prior to installation.
(e) Miscellaneous Equipment: The Contractor shall provide any necessary screws,
anchors, clamps, tie wraps, distribution rings, wire moulding (MC/MDF and TC/IDF
locations), miscellaneous grounding and support hardware, etc., necessary to
facilitate the installation of the System.
(f) Special Equipment and Tools: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish
any specials installation equipment or tools necessary to properly complete the
systems. This may include, but is not limited to, tools for terminating cables, testing

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 150 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

and splicing equipment for copper / fibre cables, communication devices, jack stands
for cable reels, or cable winches.
(g) Labelling: The Contractor shall be responsible for printed labels for all cables and
cords, distribution frames, and outlet locations. No labels are to be written by hand.
Label formats are to be agreed with the client.
(h) Cable Storage: The Contractor shall not roll or store cable reels without an
appropriated underlay and the prior approval of the Engineer.
(i) Cable Records: The Contractor shall maintain conductor polarity (tip and ring)
identification at the main equipment room (switch room), risers, and station connecting
blocks in accordance with industry practices.

4 Testing Warranty

(a) Copper Cable Testing: Testing of all copper wiring shall be performed prior to system
cutover. 100 percent of the horizontal and riser wiring pairs shall be tested. Voice
and data horizontal wiring pairs shall be tested from the telecommunications outlets to
the TC. The cable runs shall be tested for conformance to the specifications for
EIA/TIA 568A Category 6. Testing shall be made with a TIA/EIA TSB-67 UL Certified
Level 3 test set. Test shall include length, mutual capacitance, characteristic
impedance, attenuation, and near-end crosstalk. Near end crosstalk measurements
shall be made at both the information outlet and the cross connect. Both ends shall
pass TSB-67 Basic Link requirements. Any pairs not meeting the requirements of the
standard shall be brought into compliance by the contractor, at no charge to the
Client. Complete, end-to-end test results shall be submitted and included within the O
and M manuals.

(b) Optical Fibre Cable Testing w/ OTDR: All fibre testing shall be performed on all fibres
in the completed end to end system. There shall be no splices unless clearly defined.
Testing shall consist of a bi-directional end to end OTDR trace performed. The
system loss measurements shall be provided 850 and 1310 nanometres for
Multimode fibres and 1310 and 1550 for single mode fibres.

(c) Pre-installation Cable Testing: The Contractor shall test all light guide cable prior to
the installation of the cable. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the
replacement of the cable shall it be found defective at a later date.

In compliance with TIA/EIA-526-14A “Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed

Multimode Fibre Cable Plant” and TIA/EAI-526-7 “Measurement of Optical Power
Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fibre Cable Plant”, the following information shall be
recorded during the test procedure:

Name of personnel conducting the test

Type of test equipment used (manufacturer, model, serial number)
Date test is being performed
Optical source wavelength, spectral width, and for Multimode, the coupled power ratio
(CPR)
Fibre identification
End point locations Test
direction
Reference power measurement (when not using a power meter with a Relative Power

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 151 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Measurement Mode)
Measured attenuation of the link segment
Acceptable link attenuation. Note: Horizontal Link Segments are limited to 9 meters,
therefore, the acceptable link attenuation can be based on the longest installed link
without introducing a significant error

Manufacturer Warranty: Provide a 20 year SCS Extended Product Warranty and

System Assurance Warranty for this cabling system.

5 Inspection

(a) On-going inspections shall be performed during construction by the Engineer and/or
the SCS System Manager. All work shall be performed in a high quality manner and
the overall appearance shall be clean, neat and orderly. The following points shall be
examined and shall be satisfactory complied with:
(b) Is the design documentation complete? Are all cables properly labelled, from end-to-
end?
(c) Have all terminated cables been properly tested in accordance with the specifications
for the specific category as well as tested for opens, shorts, polarity reversals,
transposition and presence of AC and/or DC voltage?
(d) Is the cable type suitable for its pathway? Are the cables bundled in parallel?
(e) Have the pathway manufacturer’s guidelines been followed? Are all cable
penetrations installed properly and fire stopped according to code.
(f) Has excessive cabling been avoided?
(g) Have potential EMI and RFI sources been considered?
(h) Is Cable Fill Correct?
(i) Are hanging supports within 1.5 meters (5 feet)?
(j) Does hanging cable exhibit some sag?
(k) Are telecommunications closet terminations compatible with applications equipment?
(l) Have Patch Panel instructions been followed?
(m) Jacket removal point
(n) Termination positions
(o) All pair terminations tight with minimal pair distortions
(p) Twists maintained up to Index Strip
(q) Have Modular Panel instructions been followed?
(r) Cable dress first
(s) Jackets remain up to the Connecting Block All pair terminations tight and undistorted
(t) Twists maintained up to the Connecting Block
(u) Are the correct outlet connectors used (T568B)?
(v) Is the jacket maintained right up to the connector?
(w) Are identification markings uniform, permanent and readable?

6 Warranty

A twenty (20) year Extended Product Warranty and Applications Assurance for this wiring
system shall be provided.

Extended Product Warranty: The Extended Product Warranty shall cover product defects for
all passive-cabling components (excluding termination tools). Passive components are
defined as those exhibiting no gain or contributing no energy. The manufacturer shall warrant,
from the date of installation and after a Registration Certificate is issued, the following:

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 152 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

That the SCS manufacturer’s passive components that comprise of the registered cabling
installation shall be free from manufactured defects in material or workmanship under normal
and proper use.

That all approved passive cabling products that comprise the registered SCS installation meet
or exceed the NEXT (near end cross talk) PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return loss,
bandwidth and attenuation / loss specifications of the ISO/IEC IS 11801 (1995), CENELEC EN
50173 (1995) and TIA/EIA 568-A (or any national equivalent) standards and their approved
amendments.

That the installation shall meet or exceed the PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return loss,
attenuation and NEXT requirements of the ISO/IEC IS 11801 (1995), CENELEC EN 50173
(1995) and TIA/EIA 568-A (or any national equivalent) standards and their approved
amendments for copper cabling.

That the installation shall meet or exceed the attenuation / loss and bandwidth requirements of
the ISO / IEC IS 11801 (1995), CENELEC EN 50173 (1995) and TIA/EIA 568-A (or any
national equivalent) standards and their approved amendments for fibre cabling.

Applications Assurance: The application assurance shall cover failures of the SCS installation
to operate the application(s) the system was designed to support, as well as additional
application(s) define below. The manufacturer shall warrant that the registered SCS
installation shall be free from failures which prevent operations of the specific application(s) for
which the original SCS system was designed not including failures due to electronic hardware
and/or software problems.

The Application Assurance shall also cover the following additional applications:

Those as specified in the current (at the time of installation) and future versions of the
manufacturers SCS performance specification; and

Any applications introduced in the future by recognized standards or user forums that use the
ISO/IEC IS 11 801 or TIA/EIA 568-A UTP or fibre components and UTP or fibre link / channel
specification for cabling.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 153 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C - STANDARD SPECIFICATION – IT/ELV INSTALLATION

C18 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

IP CAMERAS

PART 1 GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Section includes:
1. IP Cameras fixed with suitable housing

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The contractor shall supply install test and commission and integrate IP CCTV system
including all cabling and terminations complying with the following requirements.

B. The system shall consist of a number of pan tilt and zoom and fixed cameras provided
with housings, mountings, etc. The cameras shall be of the dome type recessed into the
false ceiling wherever possible otherwise the cameras/housing shall be the smallest
possible size and shall be fully integrated with the surrounding architectural. The camera
shall be located as shown on the drawings. The exact location shall be selected to provide
a view of the maximum viewing angle/space.

C. The FCC/CCTV monitoring room at the ground floor of the building shall be provided with
a custom-built control desk to accommodate the following equipment’s:
1. Workstation

2. 32” Monitors – 3 no’s in CCTV room

3. 32” Monitor – 1 no In reception

4. Central monitoring control equipment.

D. The CCTV Equipment room at the ground floor of the building shall be provided with a
custom-built control desk to accommodate the following equipment’s:
1. System Core switch and servers.
2. NAS/SAN storage
3. All other related equipment and accessories

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 154 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

E. The contractor shall be responsible to provide any required video distribution amplifiers,
line amplifiers, equalizing amplifiers and ground isolation transformers to ensure a clear
video picture without any distortion, noise and video signal attenuation problems.

F. The video image displayed on each monitor shall be stable, free of roll, jitter and tearing,
even when the system operates through the video multiplexing system.

G. The system shall be designed for continuous, 24 hours per day 365 days per year
operations.

H. Storage capacity and resolution of cameras (at different locations) shall be as per MCC
guidelines.

I. Cameras shall be connected to the central unit using single cables. The system shall
comply with all requirements of this specification over the following environmental ranges:
1. Temperature -10 to 50 degree C
2. Humidity 30 % to 99%

J. All cameras shall be fed from PoE enabled switches. The cameras installed at more than
90 meters length shall be fed through long-span PoE devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. BS EN 50132. Alarm Systems. CCTV Surveillance Systems for use in Security

applications.

B. BS EN 62676-4:2015. Video surveillance systems for use in security applications.

Application guidelines

C. SIRA Dubai

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: In compliance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1, Section 01 33 00

Submittal Procedures

B. Product and technical data:

1. Manufacturers technical data sheets and bulletins

2. Manufacturer’s installation and operation manuals

3. Manufacturer Maintenance data

4. Spare parts list and recommended hardware

5. Recommended maintenance contract

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 155 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Point-to-Point Wiring diagrams

2. Equipment placement locations

3. Schedules and tables: Product quantity and placement

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The system shall be manufactured for the intended purpose in a commercial / industrial,
24 hour day, 7 days per week, and 365 days per year operating environment

B. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Obtain from a manufacturer experienced in the engineering, production and

support of digital closed circuit television systems, and, with sufficient
production capability to meet the required project schedule.

2. Manufacturer capable of providing field representation during design,

installation and commissioning of systems.

C. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Emission / Immunity:

a) FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A Digital Device

2. Video Compression:

a) JPEG
b) Motion JPEG
c) MPEG-4
3. Sustainability:

a) RoHS Directive Compliant

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1, Section 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements and

the manufacturers recommended procedures for receiving and protection of the
equipment

B. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to extreme or harmful
environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity levels recommended by the
manufacturer:

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 156 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

1. Deliver individual components in the manufacturers original packaging and

labeling

2. Prevent physical damage, soiling or wetting

3. Provide secure storage prior to and during installation

1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Site should be substantially enclosed and secure prior to installation of

hardware

2. Environmental systems should be in place and operational

3. Deliver materials onsite at least 24 hours prior to installation to allow materials

to reach temperature and humidity equilibrium

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Provide original equipment manufacturers warranty documentation for acceptance by the

Owner

B. Warranty Period: at least three year commencing with the Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

All the cameras must be supported by single windows-based software which shall be used to
perform the following functions:
1. IP Address Conflict Resolution
2. Batch Configuration
3. Batch Firmware Upgrade

2.02 MANUFACTURE

A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, provide products
from the manufacturers approved by the client/consultant only.

2.03. FIXED INDOOR IP DOME CAMERA

A. Fixed Dome Network Camera indoor/outdoor. With reliable Day & Night surveillance and
Focus Adjust mechanism

1. Built in encoder modules with audio capabilities

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 157 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

2. Built-in 100BASE-TX network interface

3. Capable of being configured using a web browser
4. Capable of being configured is batch mode using windows based software provided by
the manufacturer
5. SD card support for edge storage
6. Digital I/O interface for Alarms and sensors
7. Power over Ethernet (PoE) - IEEE 802.3af compliant
8. H.265, H.264, MJPEG or equivalent compression
9. Minimum 4MP video resolution at 15 fps and 3MP video at 30 fps
10. Dual Simultaneous Streams of 2MP at 30fps
11. Minimum 0.5 lux colour, 0.05 lux monochrome
12. Updatable firmware
13. Day/Night with IR filter
14. Indoor cameras will typically be fitted with a lens of focal length of 2.8-10m or 6-22mm
lens depending on the scene requirement
15. Built in Array IR LED
16. Back Light Compensation: On/Off
17. Camera shall support protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTSP, PPPOE,
RTP/UDP, RTP/TCP, SNTP, UPnP, SMTP, DHCP, FTP, DDNS, SSL v2/v3, IEEE
802.1X (EAPOL V1 and V2)
18. IP65 Rating

2.04 FIXED OUTDOOR BOX IP CAMERA

1. Built in encoder modules with audio capabilities

2. Built-in 100BASE-TX network interface.
3. Capable of being configured using a web browser.
4. Capable of being configured is batch mode using a windows based software provided by
the manufacturer
5. SD card support for edge storage
6. 140dB True WDR
7. Digital I/O interface for Alarms and sensors
8. Power over Ethernet (PoE) - IEEE 802.3af compliant
9. H.265, H.264, MJPEG or equivalent compression
10. Minimum 4MP video resolution at 15 fps and 3MP video at 30 fps
11. Dual Simultaneous Streams of 2MP at 30fps
12. Minimum 0.5 lux colour, 0.05 lux monochrome
13. Updatable firmware

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 158 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

14. Outdoor cameras will typically be fitted with a lens of focal length of 6-22mm or 5-50mm
lens depending on the scene requirement
15. Built in Array IR LED
16. Back Light Compensation: On/Off
17. Camera shall support protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTSP, PPPOE,
RTP/UDP, RTP/TCP, SNTP, UPnP, SMTP, DHCP, FTP, DDNS, SSL v2/v3, IEEE
802.1X (EAPOL V1 and V2)
18. Aluminum Alloy Housing
19. Wall, Surface, Corner or Pole Mount (brackets shall be included)
20. IP67 Water and Dust proof housing
21. IK10 Vandal Resistant
2.05. IP CCTV Cabling

1. Category 6A 23 AWG UTP Solid Copper Cables which are UL Listed and ETL Verified
should be used for connecting the IP Cameras to the PoE Switches.
2. The cable link shall be crimped with a RJ45 Plug at the camera end and should be
terminated on a Category 6A 24 Port Patch Panels at the IDF end.
3. Category 6A UTP Patch Cords which are ETL Verified should be used to patch the patch
panels to the edge switches.
4. The maximum distance of the camera shall be limited to 90m from the network
consolidation point in the IDF. All connections should be terminated, tested and labeled
properly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WIRING

A. Wiring Method: Install cables concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where
possible.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and
use lacing bars and distribution spools.

C. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal
strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.

3.02 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install cameras level and plumb.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 159 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

B. Set unit to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of view required for camera.
Connect all controls and alarms, and adjust.

C. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations, unless otherwise
indicated.

D. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26

Section "Identification of Electrical Systems."

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 160 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – IT/ELV INSTALLATION

C19 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section includes video surveillance system consisting of cameras, IP based video
recording and management with its associated equipment. The video surveillance system
shall have the following:

1. Distributed Network Video Recorder Video Servers

2. Distributed SAN Storage

3. Security and Control Systems

4. Operator Stations

5. Network connected cameras

6. Network connected camera streamers with analogue cameras (where

Structured Cabling is not available) are subject to Engineer’s special approval.

7. Network infrastructure

B. Related Sections include the following (To be read in strict conjunction with):

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. BS EN 50132 Alarm Systems – CCTV Surveillance Systems for use in Security

applications.

B. SIRA Dubai

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. CIF – Common Intermediate Format: a video format originally designed for video
conferencing, widely used for viewing video clips via computer

B. DDNS – Dynamic Domain Name System: a method of keeping a domain name linked to a
changing IP Address

C. DHCP – Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol: a protocol for assigning dynamic IP

addresses to devices on a network

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 161 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

D. IP -Internet Protocol: specifies the packet format and the addressing scheme. When
combined with TCP it establishes a virtual connection between a destination and a source.

E. NTP -Network Time Protocol: an Internet standard protocol (built on top of TCP/IP) that
assures accurate synchronization to the millisecond of computer clock times in a network
of computers. NTP synchronizes client workstation clocks to the U.S. Naval Observatory
Master Clocks in Washington, DC and Colorado Springs CO.

F. NAS – Network Attached Storage: a server dedicated to file storage. Can be located
anywhere in LAN

G. PPPoE – Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet: a specification for connecting the users on
an Ethernet to the Internet through a common broadband medium, such as a single DSL
line, wireless device or cable modem.

H. TCP/IP -Transmission Control Protocol: one of the main protocols in TCP/IP networks.
Whereas IP protocol deals only with packets, TCP enables two hosts to establish a
connection and exchange streams of data.

1.05 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The scope of work comprises installation of a complete Security Management System –

Video Surveillance.

2. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including dimensions and
data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

3. Equipment List: Include every piece of equipment by model number,

manufacturer, serial number, location, and date of original installation. Add
pretesting record of each piece of equipment, listing name of person testing,
date of test, set points of adjustments, name and description of the view of
preset positions, description of alarms, and description of unit output
responses to an alarm.

4. Field quality-control test reports.

5. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cameras, power supplies, monitors,

digital video recorders, video streamers, and control-station components to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to
items specified in Division 01

6. Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" include the following:

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 162 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

a) Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended

to be stored at the site for ready access.

1.06 SITE CONDITION

A. Environmental Conditions: System shall be capable of withstanding the following

environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of
operating capability:

1. Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 16 to

50 deg C and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, non-condensing.

2. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central-station

control unit, installed in air-conditioned interior environments shall be rated for
continuous operation in ambient conditions of 2 to 50 deg C dry bulb and 20
to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

3. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non-air-

conditioned interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in
ambient conditions of minus 18 to plus 50 deg C dry bulb and 20 to 90
percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

4. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to

weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of minus
34 to plus 50 deg C dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity,
condensing. Rate for continuous operation where exposed to rain shall be in
IP rated enclosures.

5. Hazardous Environment: System components located in areas where fire or

explosion hazards may exist because of flammable gases or vapors,
flammable liquids, combustible dust, or ignitable fibers shall be rated, listed,
and installed according to IEC.

6. Corrosive Environment: For system components subjected to corrosive

fumes, vapors, and wind-driven salt spray in coastal zones shall be rated,
listed, and installed according to IEC.

1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The system consists of IP cameras weatherproof cameras at different selected locations

like entrance gates and indoor PoE cameras near main corridors.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 163 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

B. Fibre optic transmitters and receivers shall be provided to send and receive signals where
the camera distance to nearest BD/FD is above 90 meters.

C. The Head End room shall have NVR to record the cameras. The NVR shall support to
record the cameras for at least 90 days / as per MCC guidelines for different premises
with the advised resolution and frame rate.

D. All other CCTV equipment shall be placed in the CCTV equipment room

E. Operator Interface: The Video Surveillance System shall allow viewing and digital
recording of video from network connected cameras through the IBMS/SMS user
interface.

1. Operators using the standard Workstations of the system can also view live
video from cameras, initiate recording of cameras and configure different
camera settings. All operator security criteria as described shall also apply to
cameras and camera settings.

2. All operations to manage digital video shall be performed through the

standard operator interface. Systems with a different operator interface for
managing video shall not be acceptable. Systems requiring login of a different
application for video management shall not be acceptable.

F. Event Based recording: Recording shall be able to be triggered by any alarm in the
system. For any alarm that may occur, it shall be possible to specify which camera shall
record, the frame rate for digital recording and the duration of the recording. This may be
in addition to other recording schedules that are already assigned to the camera.

G. Distributed System Storage: Redundant storage solution shall be employed. The system
storage shall be sized to record all cameras continuously at a rate equivalent 25 FPS and
in full resolution for a period as mentioned in MCC. Provide supporting calculations for the
Storage offered.

H. Database integration: All recorder images shall be fully integrated to the system database.
It shall be possible to recall recordings connected to an event or a controlled point using
standard displays.

1.08 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The Video Surveillance System shall have scalable architecture based on network
connected cameras and transmission of video information across LAN Network recording.

B. The Video Surveillance System shall utilize PoE network connected cameras.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 164 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

C. It shall easily be possible to move cameras to other locations in the facility by just
disconnecting the camera from the network and reconnecting it to the network elsewhere.

D. Systems requiring the cabling of cameras installed more than 90 meters from the switch
shall be fed through long-span PoE device (for gate house and vehicle store).

E. The Video Management System (VMS) shall provide open architecture enterprise class
video management software suitable for medium to large installations.

F. The VMS shall offer a scalable multi-server and multi-site solution with support for
unlimited number of servers or network video recorders.

G. The VMS shall be ONVIF compliant and provides a true open architecture platform that
ensures support for a large number of IP cameras brands.

H. The VMS shall be compatible with different video compression formats such as H.265,
H.264, MJPEG, MPEG4 or equivalent.

I. The VMS shall support third party integration through SDK (Software Development Kit).

J. The VMS shall provide support for centralized storage through iSCSI SAN.

K. The VMS shall support all the ONVIF enabled cameras.

L. The VMS shall offer remote monitoring via a desktop application or a Web browser.

M. The VMS shall offer failover support in N+1 and N+N configurations.

N. The VMS shall allow the backup of the system log and the configuration of the VMS to an
external storage device.

O. The VMS shall support free software and firmware upgrades.

1.09 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. The Video surveillance system shall consists of External cameras at selected locations.

B. User operation: User operation of the Video Surveillance System shall be simple,
straightforward and fully integrated in the operation scheme of the IBMS / SMS human
interface.

C. Camera Control: Selection of cameras shall be via the Operator Interface workstation.

1.10 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (SMS) DATABASE SERVER

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 165 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

A. The Database Server contains a database of all network-connected cameras and their
configuration. The Database Server shall manage the system database, containing details
including:

1. System configuration

2. Camera configuration and settings

3. Recording configuration and settings

4. Configuration of Quad Views and Sequences

5. Details of recordings

6. Schedules

7. Operator security details

8. Configuration of Surveillance and Alarm Monitors

9. Configuration of Video Analytics

B. Manage communication between the Operator Stations and the Camera Servers

C. Allow alarms/events in the Security System or Control System to initiate recordings

D. Report any camera failures or recording failures to the integrated Control system or
Security system

E. Provide a full audit log of all system status (camera, streamer, server availability) and
operator actions.

F. The Database Server shall be able to be used in a redundant configuration, using two
separate Database Servers (being executed on separate computers). The backup
Database Server shall be continuously synchronized with the master Database Server to
ensure that it is always up-to-date and ready for a fail-over, when required.

1.11 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER (NVR) VIDEO SERVER

A. The Network Video Recorder Video Server (NVR) must be capable of supporting a large
amount of disk space for online video storage and access to high capacity archiving
mechanisms for the removal of stored video to off-line media.

B. The NVR Server shall:

1. Manage live video from multiple cameras / streamers

2. Transmit live video to multiple Operator Stations

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 166 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

3. Receive camera control commands from Operator Stations and then send the
commands to cameras

4. Store live video to the SAN

5. Transmit previously stored video to Operator Stations

6. Archive previously stored video to off-line storage media

7. Retrieve archived video from off-line storage media

8. Provide Video Analytics

9. Export the recordings into MPEG format so that it can be viewed using
standard tools including Microsoft’s Video Player.

10. Systems using DVR shall not be accepted.

C. The NVR Servers shall rely on the Database Server for all camera database information.

D. The system shall support multiple NVR Servers, with no limit to the number of NVR
Servers used in the system.

E. It shall be possible to automatically associate and record any Video Recorder Video
Server (NVR) to any SAN storage device to provide resilience and healing capabilities in
case of any failure of any NVR Server.

1.12 SYSTEM SIZING

A. The Video Surveillance System for the site/complex requires that operators be able to
view, record and replay video, as detailed in this specification, for an unlimited number of
cameras throughout the site/complex. The vendor must size the Network Video Recorder
Video Server (NVR) and the redundant system storage to accommodate the requirements
of the cameras and specified resolution / recording frame rates.

1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. The software supplied, as part of this system shall be developed in the following compliant
environment:

1. ISO 9001 (2000), ISO/IEC 15504 Level 3 or higher (SPICE 2.0 Software
Process Improvement and Capability Determination)

2. SEI CMM Level 3 or higher (American Software Engineering Institute –

Capability Maturity Model)

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 167 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Complete itemized list of different spare parts/tools for the Video Surveillance System to
be included and priced by the contactors. The list shall be furnished by the Video
Surveillance System proposed vendor to ensure proper maintenance for two years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURE

B. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, provide products
from the manufacturers approved by client/consultant only.

2.02 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER VIDEO SERVER (NVR)

A. The Network Video Recorder Video Server (NVR) shall be able to operate with no
performance degradation using the following hardware and shall have a minimum
operating system configuration:

1. Intel Core i5 processor or equivalent

2. 8 GB RAM

3. Hard Disk storage to meet the requirements of this Specification and should
support RAID

4. Network Interface Card configured as follows:

5. 100/1000 Mbps NIC for video transmission to Operator Stations

6. 1000 Mbps NIC for video transmission from camera streamers (if used)

7. Graphics card supporting 24-bit color and with 4GB video RAM if the Camera
Server is also used as a client station

8. Windows Server 32-bit edition or Windows 7 Professional 64-bit edition

9. The latest Microsoft Internet Explorer

10. Application software with functionality as detailed later in this specification.

11. Servers shall be provided as rack-mounted industrial computers

B. If equivalent hardware is proposed then the supplier must demonstrate compatibility of

software described in this specification. Proprietary hardware platforms are not
acceptable.

C. It shall be possible to install the NVR software for all NVRs on the Video Surveillance
System from a central location

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 168 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

2.03 MULTIPROCESSOR SUPPORT

A. Network Video Recorder Video Server (NVR) shall be able to run on both multiple and
single processor computers. Where a multiple processor system is used the Video
Surveillance System software shall be able to make optimal use of that configuration.

2.04 SYSTEM FAULT TOLERANCE

A. A failure of any one of the Network Video Recorder Video Server (NVR) shall NOT cause
the Video Surveillance System to cease operation. As a worst case, only the cameras
controlled by the NVR will be momentarily unavailable until automatically reallocated to
other NVR using the Video Surveillance System software. No physical changes to
hardware, cabling or connections shall be required.

2.05 OPERATOR STATION HARDWARE

A. The Operator Station shall be able to host the user interface for the Video Surveillance
System with dedicated user interface. The floor plans shall include camera icons so that it
is easy for the operator to pick up the video feed from the right camera.

B. The Video Surveillance System shall also provide web services such as ASP and provide
a simple thin client from Internet Explorer while using the same user name and password
as configured in the integrated system.

2.06 OPERATOR KEYBOARD

A. The Video Surveillance System shall support a professional type CCTV keyboard with IP
connectivity. The Operator Keyboard shall be integrated to the system via an Ethernet
connection to a NVR. The Operator Keyboard shall allow operators to view and control
live video without the need for an Operator Station.

B. The Operator Keyboard shall provide the operator with a means to:

1. Log on to the system

2. Select and display cameras on surveillance monitors

3. Select and display multiple camera views on surveillance monitors

4. Start and stop recordings (only authorized personnel)

5. Log off from the system

2.07 NETWORK AND VIDEO CABLING

A. Wide and Local Area Network shall utilize IP/Ethernet and POE infrastructure.
Communications between system elements shall be provided by a common converged

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 169 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

infrastructure capable of providing appropriate domain separation and transport

requirements. All interfaces to the WAN/ LAN shall be a minimum of 100BaseTX Ethernet.
The system shall be able to use the specified / available infrastructure and structured
cabling. For Structured Cabling System specification - refer Division 27.

B. Refer to relevant drawings for LAN architecture.

2.09 VIDEO CABLING

A. It is not acceptable for video cables to be run back to the NVR. All communications with
the NVR shall be via the dedicated LAN.

2.10 SYSTEM SOFTWARE - GENERAL

A. Provide software as per the manufacturer’s recommendation.

2.11 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER SERVER.

A. Refer to the description earlier on in the Specification

2.12 NETWORK

A. Each Ethernet Switch shall support:

1. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

2. IEEE 802.1D bridging capability and loop detection

3. IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLANs

4. IEEE 802.1p traffic prioritization for multiple Quality of Service levels

5. IEEE 802.1w rapid spanning tree with fast link support

6. IEEE 802.3ad link aggregation support

7. IGMP snooping for IP Multicast support

8. Multicast network traffic

9. Non-blocking configuration capable of simultaneous wire-speed switching

across all ports.

2.13 APPLICATION SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS

1. The Central Monitoring Software shall work on any windows based PC with specified
hardware configuration.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 170 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

2. The Central Monitoring Software shall be capable of connecting over a local area
network or wide area network to a large number of servers and network video
recorders on which the VMS is installed.
3. The Central Monitoring Software shall be capable of monitoring up to 4096 cameras
simultaneously with each single window supporting 32x32(1024) grid.
4. The Central Monitoring Software shall support remote search, replay and backup of
the recorded video.
5. The Central Monitoring Software shall support saving of live video / audio streams to
the local disks.
6. The Central Monitoring Software shall support search and replay of the video
recorded in the local disks.
7. The Central Monitoring Software shall support batch configuration of multiple remote
servers and IP cameras.
A. Live Video
1. The live output from cameras shall be viewed through a series of displays.
These shall support:

a) Single camera view

b) Multi view / layouts
c) Sequence view of camera preset positions
d) Modifying settings for a camera
e) Modify recording settings for a camera
f) Adding and deleting cameras
g) Creating schedules for recordings and video motion detection
h) Modifying Video Analytics settings and tuning.
2. Users shall be able to select a camera from a tree control listing the cameras
available to the user.

3. The system shall also support multiple monitors in the following way:

a) Alarm monitor: When an alarm occurs in the Security or Control

System Server, the live video output of the camera associated
with that alarm shall be switched directly to an alarm monitor. The
user shall be able to acknowledge the alarm to clear the monitor
using the numeric keypad. Cameras that are directed to alarm
monitors will not be removed from the queue unless explicitly
cleared by the operator. It shall be possible to create a queue of
alarm monitors to manage multiple alarm views simultaneously.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 171 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

b) Cyclic Alarm Monitors: An alarm monitor shall be available at the

end of a alarm monitor queue to cycle the camera views from
unacknowledged alarms if the number of cameras to view
exceeds the number of alarm monitors. Once the alarm monitor
queue is filled, any new alarm will be placed in the queue relative
to its priority and time of occurrence. Existing activated alarm
camera views shall reshuffle to accommodate the new alarm. In
the event that all the available alarm monitors are used, the oldest
active alarm camera shall be added to the cycling alarm monitor.
The alarm views shall cycle on this final alarm monitor until
acknowledged and cleared by an operator in the event of multiple
alarms added to this monitor.
c) Surveillance monitor: Operators shall be able to send any Quad
View, Sequence View or Single Camera View to a surveillance
monitor. User shall be able to clear the monitor using the numeric
keypad.
d) Monitors shall be able to be configured to act as both Alarm and
Surveillance monitors. In this case, the monitor behaves as a
Surveillance monitor until an alarm occurs, in which case it shall
show the alarm video. Once the alarm is acknowledged, the video
previously shown (as a surveillance monitor) is displayed again.
e) In each of these cases, these additional monitors shall be either
connected to an Operator Station using a multi-monitor PC card
or to other PCs.
f) Systems that do not offer this functionality are not acceptable.
B. Video Loss Alarm

1. The Video Surveillance System shall support the video streamer Video Loss
Alarm feature. The Video Loss Alarm feature shall provide Video Surveillance
System operators with a notification when the video signal from the camera to
the video streamer is lost.

C. Camera Tamper Detection

1. The Video Surveillance System shall provide the ability to detect attempts to
tamper with connected cameras. The system will at minimum detect the
following:

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 172 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

a) Changed field of view: repositioning the camera to a reference

position shall trigger an alarm
b) Camera blur: any attempt to defocus the camera or blur the scene
shall trigger an alarm
c) Camera blind: any attempt to cover the camera lens or blind the
scene through abnormally high light levels shall trigger an alarm
2. Each of the above options shall be individually selectable as required per
camera. It shall thus be possible to enable any combination of the above three
detection options on each camera connected to the Video Surveillance
System.

3. The detection algorithms for tampering shall be run on one or more of the
Video Surveillance System NVRs. It shall be possible to configure and tune
the algorithms individually per camera. The configuration screen shall provide:

a) The ability to enable any combination of the tamper detection

algorithms
b) Real time feedback of the percentage of tampering detected
c) The ability to set the threshold at which a tamper alarm will be
generated
d) Real time feedback of when a tamper threshold has been crossed
e) How often the detection algorithm should check for a tamper
condition
4. System response to a tamper alarm including:

a) Starting a recording with the possibility of also configuring the

system to record video prior to the event accruing
b) Generating alarms with configurable alarm levels
c) Sending video to an Operator Station
5. Once a tamper condition is detected, the system shall provide visual
indication to the operator through both a text overlay on the live video and
indication on the camera tree. The text overlay shall be for viewing purposes
only and shall not be recorded.

6. Systems that provide the same camera tamper settings for all cameras shall
not be acceptable.

D. Single Camera

1. From this display, the user shall be able to:

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 173 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

a) View the live output from the selected camera

b) Pan, tilt, zoom and focus the camera using a joystick attached to
the Operator Station PC
c) Pan, tilt, zoom and focus the camera using a pointing device
attached to the Operator Station PC. Standard Microsoft XP
Professional pointing devices such as a mouse or touch-screen
shall be supported.
d) Manually record live video. Recording will continue for the
configured period of time. Once recording has begun, a stop
button shall be provided as well as a counter showing the
recording time remaining.
e) Manually store the current frame of video (snapshot) as a bitmap
image file. The file name shall be automatically generated by the
Video Surveillance System software and include the camera
name, date and time of the recording (to millisecond precision).
f) Indicate whether video motion detection is currently enabled for
the selected camera.
E. Multi View

1. The Video Surveillance System shall support multiple camera views. A

multiple camera view consists of up to sixteen related cameras viewed
simultaneously on a single display.

2. The layout for a view shall be configurable from a selection of different layouts
templates. There shall be a set of templates for standard aspect ratio (4:3)
monitors and another set of templates for wide aspect ratio (16:9) monitors to
properly utilize the entire monitor screen real estate without distorting the
original video aspect ratio.

3. It shall be possible to configure and save individual views for re-use. It shall
be possible for the view to be created by dragging and dropping cameras and
presets if applicable directly into the view ports from the camera tree.

4. Multiple camera views shall be configured to cycle between any of the

cameras accessible to the user on a configurable time basis.

5. It shall be possible to show the camera names of each camera and preset (if
applicable) configured in a view on either the operator station and on
surveillance monitors. Hovering the mouse pointer over a view port shall
trigger a pop-up showing the camera name and preset (if applicable).

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 174 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

6. There shall be no limit to the number of cameras that can be assigned to a

single multiple camera view. There shall also be no limit to the number of
available multiple camera views.

F. Sequence View

1. The Video Surveillance System shall support sequence views. A sequence

view consists of a single camera view, which can be cycled on a time basis.

2. There shall be no limit to the number of cameras that can be assigned to a

single Sequence View. There shall also be no limit to the number of available
Sequence Views.

G. Camera Settings

1. Users shall be able to change important settings for an individual camera. The
details are grouped into several sections:

b) Camera Details
c) Camera Connection
d) Security
e) Camera Deletion
2. The parameters listed in the sub-sections below are configurable on a per
camera basis and their specific selection on a particular camera(s) will not
limit the ability to freely select other options on other cameras as required. It
will be easy to change any of these parameters for each camera individually
as and when required. Systems that do not allow changes to each camera’s
parameters on an individual basis will not be acceptable.

3. Only users with the highest level of security are permitted to modify camera
connection details, or delete cameras.

4. Camera Details

a) The user shall be able to configure the following parameters for

each camera:
i. Name

ii. Location

iii. Description

iv. Camera Number (for fast numeric keypad call-up)

5. Camera Control

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 175 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

a) Dome camera ranges, the following additional functionality shall

be provided:
i. Configuration of Privacy Zones. The Video
Surveillance System software shall allow the user to
select the regions for privacy zones and automatically
download the configuration to the camera.

ii. Configuration of Camera Tours. The DVRMS

software shall allow the user to fully configure all
required camera tours, automatically downloading the
configuration to the camera. The user shall be able to
select the required camera tour in a similar way as
presets are selected. A camera tour may be
configured to be a “home” camera tour, similar to a
home preset.

iii. Support for the Special Presets options such as:

a. Run tour

b. Program tour

c. Return to manual camera control

d. Run vectorscan

e. Setup menu

f. Toggle error display

g. Toggle iris

h. Toggle backlight control

i. Toggle night shot

j. Freeze

k. Flashback

l. Camera reset

6. Security

a) The following parameters shall be configurable for each camera:

i. Area / Facility: Allows the system to be configured to
only allow users to view specified cameras. These

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 176 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

areas shall be the defined by the Security and access

Control System / the IBMS.

ii. Control Reservation Period: Once a particular user

has controlled the camera no other user can control
the camera until this reservation period has expired. If
this user controls the camera again within the period,
the reservation period is reset. Users with higher
security permissions shall be able to take control of
the camera at any time.

7. Camera Deletion

a) The “Delete” function shall allow a user with the highest-level

security to delete the camera from the system. Deleting a camera
should delete all the records relating to the camera from the
database. The name of the camera will no longer appear in the
list of cameras. All camera settings will be deleted.
i. The user shall also be asked if they also wish to
delete video clips captured for the camera. If the
video clips are not deleted they will stay on the
Camera Server and archive media unless they are
later individually deleted. The camera name will also
continue to appear in the list of cameras used for
searching the video clip database.

ii. If the user chooses to delete video clips captured for

the deleted camera, all video clips related to the
deleted camera will be deleted. The camera name
will be removed from the list of cameras used for
searching the video clip database.

8. Video Loss Alarm

a) The Video Surveillance System shall support the Video Loss

Alarm feature available on cameras and video streamers. The
Video Loss Alarm feature shall provide Video Surveillance
System operators with a notification when the video signal from
the camera to the video streamer is lost.
H. Recording

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 177 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

1. The following methods of recording live video shall be supported:

a) User activated
b) Event activated
c) Scheduled
d) Continuous background recording
e) Video motion detection
f) Snapshot
I. Viewing Recordings

1. The recorded video shall be available to all users which have adequate
security. Each user shall only be able to view recordings from cameras they
have security access to view.

2. A display shall be provided to view recordings from any Operator Station.

From this display, the operator can select the recording he/she wishes to
view, which shall be immediately shown in an embedded video player.

3. The following information and controls shall be provided on this display:

a) A navigation panel to allow the user to select the required camera

b) A calendar control (similar to Microsoft Outlook) to select the
desired date. All days which have recordings for the chosen
camera shall be displayed in bold font.
c) A table listing all the recordings on the chosen camera for the
chosen day. The user shall be able to select the required
recording from this table. Each column shall be able to be sorted
by selecting the column heading. This table shall display the
following information as a minimum:
i. The time each recording was activated

ii. The duration of each recording

iii. The type of recording (operator activated,

alarm/event activated, video motion detected, or
scheduled)

iv. The Operator or user that activated the recording (for

operator activated recordings)

v. The Name, Description and Value of the Security

System Server or Control System Server which

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 178 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

activated the recording (for alarm/event activated

recordings)

vi. An embedded video player with controls (buttons)

similar to a VCR (video cassette recorder). The
information displayed on the video player and the
controls provided shall include:

a. The time and date of the frame being

displayed

b. A slider control which is used to move

backwards and forwards through the
recording

c. Play, pause and stop buttons

d. Step forward and step backward buttons, to

move through the recording frame by frame

e. Fast forward and rewind buttons, to play the

recording at speeds of x2, x4, x8, x16, etc (to
a minimum of x1024).

f. A snapshot button, to allow for the frame

being displayed to be stored as a bitmap file
(in a similar way to the snapshot button for
live video).

d) Information about the chosen recording. The following information

as a minimum shall be displayed with the chosen recording
i. The type of recording (operator activated,
alarm/event activated, video motion detection or
scheduled)

ii. The Operator or user that activated the recording (for

operator activated recordings)

iii. The Name, Description and Value of the Security

System, Building Control System or Industrial Control
System which activated the recording (for
alarm/event activated recordings)

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 179 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

iv. The sub-priority of the recording (for alarm/event

activated recordings)

v. The frame rate that the recording was recorded at

vi. The resolution of the recording

vii. The compression used

viii. The recording start time and date (including pre-

record)

ix. The recording end time and date

x. The date and time that the recording will be deleted

by default (which can be changed as required)

xi. Operator comments and notes about the recording

(made by the scheduled recording configuration
automatically or by an operator)

e) When a recording is displayed, the exact frame of video when the

recording was activated shall be shown. The slider shall be
positioned accordingly along with the frame time. It is not
appropriate to show the first frame in the recording, as the
recording may have pre-record.
f) Buttons to allow the operator to archive, delete or export the
chosen recording
g) A button is provided to playback the recording at the recorded
resolution. This shall be done using a display that pops up
containing the embedded video control with full playback
functionality as described above.
J. System And User Audit Trail

1. It is a requirement that all user actions on the Video Surveillance System

Operator Station be recorded in a log file along with the Security System or
Control System’s actions. User actions include:

2. Interventions such as manual recording and configuration setting changes

a) Cameras viewed
b) Video replayed
c) Video exported
d) Cameras pan/tilt/zoomed and preset switching

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 180 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

3. This log must also contain a history of the status of the Video Surveillance
System components. It shall list the status of all cameras, streamers, servers
and other system components including when they were disabled or failed.

4. The log of user and system actions shall be available in text format and
automatically included with any video recordings that are exported.

K. Digitally Signed Recordings And Audit Logs

1. It is a requirement for all exported recordings and exported audit logs to be

digitally signed. This is required to prove authentication (origin of the
recording and audit log) and integrity (exported recording and audit log have
not been altered or tampered with).

2. The Video Surveillance System shall provide a default digital certificate for
signing the exported recordings and audit logs. Customization shall also be
provided to allow for the user to supply his/her own digital certificate.

3. A utility shall be provided to display the exported recording, view the audit log
and verify the digital signatures. A visual indication shall be provided to
whether the exported recording and audit log have been altered or tampered
with.

4. Watermarking of recordings is not an acceptable method to prove

authentication and integrity as it alters the recording and audit log.

L. Storage

1. Online Storage

a) The system shall hold a configurable amount of video in online

storage. The amount of video stored on-line shall only be limited
by the NVR Server’s disk capacity. External and variety of
storages shall be supported. Use of SAN, NAS, Attached Storage
(Fibre Channel) shall be possible. Storage shall not be a
proprietary technology. SAN shall be made available for storage.
b) For each NVR Server a limit on available storage space for on-
line video shall be configurable.
c) The contractor must provide detailed storage calculations.
2. Storage & Disk Administration

a) The Video Surveillance System shall provide a flexible means to

configure storage behavior within the system administration

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 181 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

displays. The system will provide an automated and configurable

means to delete those remaining clips closest to their deletion
criteria in order to increase available system storage. The disk
space configuration will be separately configurable for each drive
volume on each NVR.
b) Deletions will commence once the amount of available disk space
decreases to below a configurable limit. Alarms will be generated
by the system to warn operators of this action. It shall be possible
to configure the following parameters for this purpose:
i. The NVR Server and volume being configured

ii. Threshold values for alarm generation (2 alarms: low

and very low)

iii. Enable or disable automatic deletion of clips based

on available disk space

iv. The threshold value used to initiate the automatic

deletion of clips

v. Inclusion or exclusion of clips marked for archiving in

automatic deletions

vi. Threshold value to stop recordings when available

storage is critically low

vii. Threshold value to restart recordings when more disk

space becomes available

a. The Video Surveillance System shall provide

a summary showing the available disk space,
total disk space and number of recordings for
directories used for this purpose on camera
servers.

viii. The contractor must provide a detail calculation sheet

for the video storage and justify the total storage
offered to meet the requirements of local authorities.
As a minimum all cameras shall be recorded on event
and alarm basis and recordings shall be available
online for 30 days. All cameras that are provided as

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 182 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

per requirements of local authorities must be

recorded to meet the needs of local authorities.

3. Automatic Archiving

a) The Video Surveillance System shall provide the ability to

automatically archive all recordings. It shall be possible to
automatically archive any type of recording at a preconfigured
period after the recording has completed.
M. Operator Station
1. Video Integration User Tasks
a) The following system tasks shall be performed from the Operator
Station
i. View live video

ii. Live video is automatically displayed on a monitor

when an event occurs

iii. Search through the stored video clips of a camera

iv. An operator records an incident

v. An operator records a snapshot of the current viewed

video

vi. Add a new camera to the system

vii. Change the configuration settings for a camera

viii. Provide alarm/event activated recording from the

integrated Security Management System / the IBMS

ix. Search for video clips from different cameras

x. Create a sequence (camera tour)

xi. Conduct a sequence (camera tour)

xii. Create a quad view

xiii. View a quad view

xiv. View live video from a custom schematic

xv. Add live video to a custom schematic

xvi. Configure, schedule and tune Video Analytics (video

motion detection, object tracking & recognition and
non-motion detection)

xvii. View the audit log

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 183 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

b) The following tasks shall also be performed from the Operator

Station
i. View the organization’s Intranet from within the
Operator Station window.

2. Security, Intelligent Building Management System Integration User Tasks

a) It shall be possible to perform the following tasks in the Security

or Control System from the Video Surveillance System Operator
Station:
i. Acknowledge an alarm

ii. Reset an acknowledged alarm

iii. Control a security or control system point

iv. Run a report containing security information

v. Run a report containing process control information

vi. Respond to a security alarm

vii. View security and control system information on a

process control schematic

viii. Configure a security report

ix. Configure a point control schedule

x. Change an access level and download it to all

affected access controllers

xi. View Access Controller details

b) All alarms and events from the Video Surveillance System,

security and control systems shall appear and be able to be
managed from the same display on the Operator Station.
c) All alarms passed from the Video Surveillance System to the
SMS, / the IBMS shall have configurable priorities.
d) The system shall support the display of live video within custom
display screens of the SMS, / the IBMS. The system shall support
the simultaneous display of dynamic data from the SMS, / the
IBMS and live video.
e) The system shall support the display of dynamic Intranet
information on Video Surveillance System displays
N. Network
1. The Network Management Station shall perform the following functions:

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 184 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

a) Provide a graphical display of the network topology

b) Provide network traffic statistics for each LAN port
c) Configuration of network equipment
d) Support standard Management Information Bases (MIBs)
O. Application Development Interface

1. The Video Surveillance System shall provide for the ability of custom
developed applications to access and control the Video Surveillance System
using a complete application development interface. These applications shall
be able to be developed without the need to contact the Video Surveillance
System manufacturer. Complete documentation of this application
development interface shall also be provided.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WIRING

D. Wiring Method: Install cables concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where
possible.

E. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and
use lacing bars and distribution spools.

F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal
strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.

3.02 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

E. Install cameras level and plumb.

F. Set unit to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of view required for camera.
Connect all controls and alarms and adjust.

G. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations, unless otherwise
indicated.

H. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26

Section "Identification of Electrical Systems."

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 185 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation and supervise pretesting,
testing, and adjusting of video surveillance equipment.

B. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled,
and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

C. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to
verify that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting
levels, including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video surveillance
equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows:

1. Prepare equipment list described in Part 1 "Submittals" Article.

2. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses.

3. Set back-focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate
nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that
produces a clear image. Adjust until image is in focus with and without the
filter.

4. Set back-focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime

lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a
clear image. Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle and aim camera at an
object 17 to 23 m away. Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to
full telephoto, with the filter in place.

5. Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel.

6. Set sensitivity of motion detection.

7. Connect and verify responses to alarms.

8. Verify operation of control-station equipment.

D. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and
system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of
10 days' notice of test schedule.

E. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with
Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper
operation in all functional modes.

F. Remove and replace malfunctioning items and retest as specified above.

G. Record test results for each piece of equipment.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 186 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

H. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions and to optimize performance of the installed equipment. Tasks shall include,
but are not limited to, the following:

1. Check cable connections.

2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto-iris

lenses and adjust back-focus as needed.

3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel.

4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to

improve Owner' utilization of video surveillance system.

5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer.

B. Clean video surveillance system components, including camera-housing windows, lenses,

and monitor screens.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain video surveillance equipment.

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for

troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.

2. Demonstrate methods of determining optimum alignment and adjustment of

components and settings for system controls.

3. Review equipment list and data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 01

Section "Operation and Maintenance Data"

3.07 CONFIGURATION SERVICES

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 187 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

A. The vendor should be able to supply all necessary configuration services if required
including controller configuration, database configuration, etc.

3.08 INSTALLATION SERVICES

A. The vendor should be able to provide installation services for the system including
validation services if necessary.

3.09 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE

A. The vendor should be able to provide hardware maintenance and spare parts support if
required.

3.10 SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENT & SOFTWARE SUPPORT

A. The vendor should be able to provide a comprehensive software maintenance and

enhancement program for on-going support of the system

3.11 COMPLETION OF WORK

A. Upon completion of the installation work the Contractor shall notify and request a
time and date for a “Job Completion Walk-Through”.

B. All deficiencies noted during the walk-through shall be corrected acceptance of the
system.

C. Contractor shall provide complete functional CCTV (IP) system as per latest
authority regulation without any cost and time implications.

3.12 PROJECTS CLOSEOUT

A. The Contractor shall conduct a comprehensive training program for four (4) Company
staff.
The training program shall include a presentation at the building by the
installer’s personnel, a review of the design, operation and maintenance of all
equipment indicated on the system schematics and a tour of the facility to view
every device installed. Training shall be 40 hours.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. A Page No. Page 188 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – IT/ELV INSTALLATION

C20 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

1.1 SCOPE

This specification calls for the basic design, supply, installation and commissioning of a
complete, integrated Access Control and Alarms Management system, in line with the
technical and performance criteria set out in this document.

The system shall be designed for ultimate reliability and maximum operating efficiency using
only the highest quality, fully field proven products. Proposed system shall be capable of
operating with multi-technology readers with smart cards and biometrics integrated.

Engineers that are factory trained and resident in the theatre must provide design, installation
and maintenance of the system.

The system must be able to operate over LAN/WAN for multi-site operation and control. In the
event of smart card applications, biometrics and other required applications shall reside in the
chip of the card. The system must be able to integrate with CCTV.

1.2 SYSTEM FUNCTION

1. The system shall be at the time of bid, if required, listed by Underwriters Laboratories listed
for UL 294 Access Control Systems, and UL 1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Systems.

2. The system shall be modular in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity and
functionality through the addition of control panels, card readers, and sensors.

3. The system shall incorporate the necessary hardware, software, and firmware to collect,
transmits, and process alarm, tamper and trouble conditions, access requests, and advisories
in accordance with the security procedures of the facility. The system shall control the flow of
authorized personnel traffic through the secured areas of the facility.

4. The user interface at the host computer (server) and at the OWT (Operator Workstation
Terminal computers) shall be a mouse driven graphical user interface (GUI) allowing the user
to open and work on multiple windows simultaneously.

PART - 2 – PRODUCT

2.1 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1.1 DATABASE MANAGEMENT

The system shall create and maintain a master database of all cardholder records and all
system activity for all connected points.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 189 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

2.1.2 AUDIT TRAIL

The system shall maintain an audit trail file of operator activity, and provide the ability to

generate a report by operator, time and date, and type of activity (audit code). The system

shall allow the operator to direct the audit trail report to screen, printer, or file. The audit trail

feature shall record the following system events at a minimum.

a. Site parameters modified.

b. System login or logout.

c. System restart.

d. Cardholder added, deleted, or changed.

e. Event added, deleted, changed, or executed

f. Alarm message added, deleted, or changed

g. Communication initiated or terminated

h. Field device/points added, deleted, or changed

i. Access privileges added, deleted, or changed.

2.2 INPUT POINT MONITORING

Collect and process status information from all monitored points including gate barriers

2.3 ALARM ANNUANCIATION

Audibly and visually annunciate all alarm, tamper and trouble conditions, and advisories.

2.4 INPUT POINT SUPERVISION

The system shall electrically supervise all 2-state and 4-state input point circuits as specified
or shown on the drawings.

2.5 REPORT

Dynamic report writer module that shall have access to the SMS database fields to allow
users to create custom reports. The dynamic report writer shall be Seagate Crystal Report
Writer professional version and shall have the following features at a minimum:

a. Mouse driven graphical user interface with the ability to select database fields from a list of
the fields

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 190 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

b. User definable reports that can be saved and re-run as required without redefining the
report fields and format each time the report is run.

2.6 OPERATOR MENU ACCESS

The operator password shall control which menu items that the individual operator may
access. It shall also be possible to restrict operators such that certain specified menu
commands do not appear on the screen or are grayed-out (disabled) for a given operator. All
user passwords are fully encrypted, even while being stored and transmitted across the
network.

2.7 ALARM INPUT POINT SUPPRESSION

The system shall provide an alarm input point suppression facility such that the operator may
define a time-zone suppression period for each individual input point. Alarm conditions for
suppressed input points shall not be recorded or archived by the system however trouble
conditions will be recorded.

2.8 ALARM GRAPHIC

The alarm-graphics portion of the system shall provide dynamic color alarm graphic maps
with the following functions:

a. User definable graphic maps to depict input point conditions

b. The system shall support the importing of most bitmap file format graphics produced with
any graphic drawing program such as .TIF, .BMP or .JPG file format. Vector file formats are
not acceptable.

c. Shall support the importing of most bitmap file format graphics produced with any graphic

drawing program such as .TIF, .BMP or .JPG file format. Vector file formats are not
acceptable.

d. The software shall be capable of storing a number of graphic maps. The quantity shall be
limited by available hard disk storage space only.

e. The system shall provide a palette that includes six categories of pre-defined alarm map
icons for Input, Output, Map Layer, Reader Terminals, Panels, I/O Terminals.

2.9 ALARM HANDLING

The alarm-handling portion of the system shall provide the following functions:

a. User definable alarm message/instructions name.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 191 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

b. User definable alarm message/instructions description. The system shall provide the ability
to assign an alarm message/instruction to each state of an input point (‘Open’, ‘Short’,
‘Alarm/Active’, and ‘Secure.’)

c. Alarm message “pick list”: all alarm message names, and associated descriptions shall
appear in the form of a pick list from which the operator may select an appropriate alarm
name and message from all alarm messages defined in the database by the operator.

d. Alarm input points: the system shall support up to 17,000 alarm-input points.

e. Alarm input point maintenance: the system shall provide the option for the operator to ‘Add’,
‘Edit’, or ‘Delete’ an alarm input point. The ‘Delete’ option shall require the user to confirm
deletion of input point(s). All maintenance functions shall be logged to the audit trail and
archived to hard disk of the host PC.

f. The system shall support both 2-state and 4-state alarm input point monitoring as called for
in this specification or as shown on the drawings.

g. Alarm priority: the system shall provide an alarm priority queue from 0-9.

h. Alarm popup: alarm inputs that are designated, as “pop-up” by the operator shall take
priority over any active “non-alarm” window. If the operator is viewing a non-alarm window
when a popup alarm occurs, the alarm queue window shall be automatically placed on top all
other windows to allow the operator to respond to the alarm condition.

i. Alarm instruction display: the SMS shall provide a window with up to ten lines of user
defined instructions, which shall tell the operator how to respond to a selected alarm.

j. Alarm condition history display: the SMS shall provide a window displaying the previous
states of the alarm point with a time and date stamp of each condition.

k. Alarm response entry: the SMS shall provide a window in which the operator may enter free
form text describing how he/she responded to a given alarm or select from a user defined list
of pre-defined response descriptions.

i. The alarm instruction display, alarm condition history display, and the alarm response entry
box shall all be a part of one summary window. Separate windows or applications to support
any of these three functions are unacceptable.

2.10 EVENT PROCESSING

a. Host event triggers: the system shall provide the operator with a scrolling list of the event
sequence

triggers as minimum that may be combined with the event sequence logical operators to

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 192 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

program a custom sequence of events.

b. Host event actions: shall be provide a scrolling list of the event sequence actions as a
minimum,

and allow the user to attach one or more actions to one or more of the event sequence
triggers to

program a custom sequence of events.

c. Logical operators for trigger conditions: the SMS shall provide a scrolling list of the
following

logical operators for event trigger conditions

1. = (Equal to)

2.! = (not equal to)

3. > (Greater than)

4. < (Less than)

5. >= (Greater than or equal to)

6. <= (Less than or equal to)

d. Logical operators for triggers: shall provide the following event trigger logical operators to
allow

the user to attach one or more of the logical operators with one or more of the event triggers

and card actions listed above to program a custom sequence of events.

1. And

2. Or

2.11 TIME ZONE

The system shall provide the capability for the user to define time zones.

2.12 COMMUNICATIONS

a. Communications between the server (Host) and the sub-controllers’ panels can optionally
support redundant paths. Thus, the loss of communications on one path automatically causes
communications to be established via the other path without operator intervention

b. Should the sub-controller(s) lose communications with the Host, the sub-controllers shall
continue to control access and monitor inputs for all connected points. Local history of all

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 193 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

transactions shall be buffered at the sub-controller and automatically uploaded to the Host for
alarm reporting and long-term historical storage once communications is re-established.

c. The contractor shall be responsible for the design of a system that will compensate for all
signal level losses in the trunk wiring. This shall include any power supplies for the field
devices and any signal level converters or repeaters for the proper amplification of electrical
signals.

2.13 USER DEFINED CARDHOLDER DATABASE FIELD

The system shall support up to 128 user defined data fields, which may be used to store
information for each cardholder. Each field may be of a type: alphanumeric text, numeric,
date, toggle (Yes/No). The system shall provide standard menu items, which shall allow the
operator to define these cardholder database fields at any time. The system shall remain on-
line while user defined cardholder database fields are added or edited. It shall be possible,
using standard SMS system menu commands to search and report on all user defined
cardholder fields.

2.14 EVENT AND TRANSACTION HISTORY

The system shall maintain a record of all alarm, card transaction, and system exceptions
which take place, and provide a means for a user to access this information. It shall be
possible to print information in the log in real-time or by a report.

2.15 ANTI-PASS BACK CONTROL

The System shall provide the capability to prevent more than one person from gaining access
to a controlled area by recognizing when a cardholder who is granted access is passing back
the card to another person to use the same card to gain access. If so programmed, an alarm
may be generated if the cardholder violates the anti-pass back rules. It shall be possible to
define on a reader-by-reader basis, which readers are subject to anti-pass back rules.

2.16 ANTI-TAILGATE CONTROL

The system shall provide the capability to prevent more than one person accessing a
controlled area because of a single card transaction.

2.17 IN-X-IT (ENTRY/EXIT)

The SMS shall support the capability to control a card’s entry into or exit from an area based
on the previous transaction status of the card. An alarm may be generated if the cardholder
violates the In-X-It conditions.

2.18 DURESS PROCESSING

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 194 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

The system shall permit cardholders to indicate that they are requesting access to an area
under some forced or duress situation. An alarm may be generated if a duress condition
occurs, and the cardholder will be granted access.

2.19 CARDHOLDER DEFINTION

The System shall provide the capability for the user to define Cardholders with the following
identification

and operating parameters.

a. Cardholder name (first, middle, last)

b. Cardholder address.

c. Cardholder phone number and extension number.

d. Validation period using start and void dates.

e. Department and Company fields from selection list of user defined departments and
companies.

f. 128 user defined cardholder fields. The system shall provide the capability to use these
fields in filtering reports

2.20 REAL-TIME SYSTEM ACTIVITY WINDOW

A real time system activity monitor window shall be available for display on any OWT screen.
The real time window shall have the following capability:

a. Be able to selectively display the following items at the operator’s discretion:

1. Input point alarms

2. System Exception messages

3. Access Grant

4. Access Deny

5. Access Trace

6. Entry/Exit Central Mode of operation

7. Audit Trail

b. Be able to toggle the display on and off

2.21 SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 195 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

The system shall provide a dynamic system status summary display that graphically indicates
the following status information, filtered by panel or terminal. All status display information
shall be summarized in a single window.

a. Terminal up/down

b. Panel up/down.

c. State of input points (alarm, secure, short, open).

d. Indication of whether each sub-controller, terminal, reader is disabled or not reporting

2.22 ALARM ROTING

The system shall provide the ability for the user to define which input points or groups of input
points are displayed Operator Workstation Terminal (OWT) computer. The system shall
provide a report showing which input points are routed to each OWT. The system shall also
provide a window that shows the routing of alarms to a Workstation and whether the
Workstation is on or offline.

2.23 CONTROL POINTS

The System shall provide the ability to define input points as control points to be used in
input/output linking and event processing sequences of operation. Control points shall not
enter the alarm queue and shall not require that an operator acknowledge them when they
change state. The control point activity will however, be automatically logged to the history
file.

2.24 WORKSTATION CONTROL

Workstations shall have the ability to be assigned a Name and have an IP address for
network

TCP/IP connections. The Workstation will have the following capabilities:

a. Be identified as a Workstation only, or Workstation.

b. Have an enable/disable toggle button to allow or disallow operator login at the workstation.

2.25 REAL TIME PRINTER

The System shall be capable of printing to a network accessible printer as well as printing
from an LPT port. The System shall be capable of printing with the following parameters:

a. Be able to specify printing of the following items, independent from each other:

1. Input Point Alarms.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 196 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

2. System Exception and Event Messages

3. Access Trace.

4. Access Deny.

5. Access Grant

6. Entry/Exit Central.

7. Audit Trail.

b. Have a toggle button to enable or disable Real Time Printing.

2.3 SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

2.3.1 CAPACITY

The software shall have an installed capacity to accommodate the following at a minimum:

1. A central database on the host server able to support up to 200,000 Badges

maximum.

2. Unlimited number of access groups.

3. Unlimited number of password groups each with an unlimited number of operator

passwords.

4. Up to 17,000 2-state alarm input points, or up to 8,000 4-state alarm input points
(or any combination in-between).

5. Central on-line data storage of 500,000 historical transactions, expandable as

system resources allow, with a local panel storage capability of up to 200,000
cardholders and 75,000 events.

6. Ten (10) levels of alarm priority.

7. A minimum of ten (10) individual badge numbers per cardholder. Each badge shall
be tracked separately.

8. Eight (8) issue levels per card, only one of which shall be active at any given time.

9. One Hundred (100) user-defined cardholder fields. The system shall be capable of
reporting on any or all of the user-defined fields. Each user-defined field may be
defined by the user as alphanumeric, numeric, date, or logical (yes/no).

2.3.2 SYSTEM SOFTWARE

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 197 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

1. The server operating system shall be Microsoft Windows® NT Server version 4.0.
It shall have multi-tasking and multi-user capability and support workstations with
Windows NT Workstation, Windows 98 or Windows 95 operating systems.

2. The system database shall be SQL Server, Version 7.0.

3. The software features shall be fully documented in the form of a complete user’s
manual including operation and installation sections, and a detailed description of the
major system functions.

4. In addition to the pre-loaded software, there shall be a high-level report generator

such as Seagate Crystal Reports, Version 4.0.

2.3.3 PARTIONNING

The system shall be capable of partitioning (segmenting) the database, which must include at
least not limited to the following items:

1. Cardholders

2. Badges

3. Time-zones

4. Access Groups.

5. Panels.

6. Readers/Terminals.

7. Workstations

2.4 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

2.4.1 SYSTEM SERVER REQUIREMENTS

The minimum System Server requirements shall be a standard name brand personal
computer with proper capacity for the intended purpose. The computer shall ship factory
configured with all software pre-loaded and tested. All computer hardware replacement
components shall be available from multiple third-party sources. Minimum configuration for
the host PC shall be:

a. Pentium CPU with a clock speed of 266+MHz or greater.

b. 128 MB of RAM.

c. 3.5” floppy disk drive.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 198 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

d. SCSI tape drive.

e. 8X speed CD-ROM.

f. 20 GB SCSI hard disk.

g. 1024 x 768 resolution 64K color, video card with 2MB RAM.

h. 17” SVGA color monitor.

i. Standard 101- type keyboard and mouse.

j. 2 network interface controllers (10Base-T Network Controller port) or equivalent.

2.4.2 SYSTEM PRINTER

Shall be provided in the quantities specified or as shown on the drawings. Printers shall be
dot matrix, 180 characters per second, bi-directional printers.

2.4.3 SUB-CONTROLLER

Shall comply to the following functionality:

a. The sub-controller shall be a fully stand-alone processor capable of making all access
control decisions.

b. The sub-controller shall support up to sixteen (16) card readers in addition to either 256
input points or 128 input points and 128 output points. It shall further support up to 12 facility
codes per reader, 40 unique holidays, 8 access group and time zone pairs.

c. Memory Requirements:

1. Minimum number of cards: 15,000 expandable to 200,000.

2. Minimum number of historical transactions: 5,000 expandable to Minimum number

of historical transactions: 5,000 expandable to 75,000 at full card capacity.

d. The controller shall require no firmware changes and shall use flash memory modules to
provide

non-volatile storage of both data and operational code.

e. Each controller shall be provided with built-in hardware to support hard-wired

communications

between the controller(s) and readers of up to 4000 feet per.

f. Communications between the controller(s) and the host server shall be Communications
between the controller(s) and the host server shall be via Ethernet TCIP at 10Mbps. There

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 199 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

shall be an alternate communications path to the host via a secondary IP address such that in
the unlikely even the primary IP address / network is down an alternate communications path
may be established.

g. An alarm summary relay shall be built-in to the controller motherboard. If so programmed,

the alarm relay shall be activated whenever a connected alarm point transfers to the alarm
state and whenever soft alarms become active.

h. A SPDT tamper switch shall be attached to the inner surface of the controller enclosure.
The tamper switch shall change state whenever the enclosure door is opened to signal the
SMS of the condition. The tamper switch input shall be user programmable to be suppressed,
to be recognized as an input point to be process by the alarm queue at the host computer, to
printout at an optional printer connected directly to the controller, and to activate the alarm
summary relay described above.

i. The standard AC linear power supply version of the controller shall include a battery module
to back-up the controller’s applications programs and database for 30 days after the failure of
the primary AC power service. The controller database, the time clock, the transaction history,
and all operator entered parameters shall be backed-up by the battery.

j. If required elsewhere in the drawings or Specification, the controller(s) shall be furnished

with an UPS battery configuration instead of a standard AC liner power supply configuration.
The battery shall power the controller upon failure of the primary AC service for a minimum of
three hours.

k. While on UPS service, the controller shall continue to process event activity, card
transactions, and record history transactions.

l. The controller shall provide built-in LED to indicate whether the controller is properly
communicating with the host computer.

2.4.4 ALARM MONITORING AND OUTPUT CONTROL TERMINAL BOARDS

Intelligent alarm monitoring and output control terminal boards shall support the following
functionality:

a. Sixteen two-state alarm input points.

b. Eight four-state supervised alarm input points.

c. Eight two-state alarm input points and eight SPDT output relays.

2.5 CARDS AND CARDS READERS

2.5.1 GENERAL

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 200 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

All readers shall be configured with the reader electronics mounted separately, on the
“secure” side of the door such that only the reader head and pilot lights are mounted in the
reader housing on the “entry” side of the door.

2.5.2 WIEGAND TECHNOLOGY

1. The reader housings shall be made of cast aluminum

2. The reader shall contain one green and one red built-in pilot light or LED to indicate
valid and invalid card badging. A single LED that changes color from red to green is
also acceptable.

3. The reader shall be available in card only and card plus PIN pad versions. Furnish
and install in the style and quantities as shown on the drawings.

4. The readers shall be manufacturer certified for an ambient operating environment

of 32 to 115 degrees F (0 to 46 degrees C) and 10 to 90 % RH, non-condensing. For
installations in environments below 32 degrees F, a cold weather kit shall be installed
in the reader to ensure normal operation. The kit shall consist of a heating element
mounted inside the reader and a moisture seal gasket set to prevent moisture from
entering the reader housing.

5. The cards shall be constructed of top quality, highly durable and resilient PVC
plastic or a PVC/Polyester composite material for use with Wiegand readers.

6. The manufacturer using the Wiegand pulse generating effect with a highly secure
encryption algorithm shall encode cards. Each card shall be encoded with a facility
code unique to the security system, and individual card number, and one of eight
issue level numbers.

7. The encoded information shall be highly secure from alteration by external

magnetic fields.

8. Standard cards shall be available with hot stamped facility code and card number.
The cards shall be available from the manufacturer without hot stamping if requested
by the owner.

9. Cards shall be ISO standard credit card size.

10. Cards shall have the capability to be slot-punched at the top and equipped with a
strap clip to attach the card to the user’s clothing. NOTE: If using video badging,
badges should be printed before punching slots.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 201 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

11. System capacity shall not be less than 120% of total parking slots available in the
premises.

2.5.3 PROXIMITY READER

A. READER:

a. The reader shall be integrated and contain all reader electronics inside a single
polycarbonate enclosure.

b. The reader shall operate when mounted on a variety of surfaces including metal. Maximum
read range degradation when mounted on a metal surface shall be 50-percent.

c. The reader shall contain an integral bi-color LED and audio tone to indicate if the card has
been successfully read.

d. The reader shall operate when mounted on a variety of surfaces including metal. Maximum
read range degradation when mounted on a metal surface shall be 50-percent.

e. The reader shall be 1.7” x 6” maximum

f. Read range shall be up to 5”.

g. The reader shall be rated for normal operation from -5 to 150 deg. F.

B. CARDS:
 The same user proximity cards shall be utilized for both gate barriers and access control
system.
 The proximity card shall be encased in high impact sealed plastic with a surface suitable
to receive an adhesive backed photo ID.

PART - 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

a. All consoles, terminals, and controllers shall be factory wired before shipment to the job
site.

b. Cabinet doors shall open a minimum of 170 degrees to avoid blocking personnel
movement. Each door shall be equipped with a cylinder lock, a tamper switch and a piano-
type hinge with welded tamperproof pins.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 202 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

c. Provisions shall be made for field wiring to enter the cabinet via standard knockouts at the
top, bottom and sides of controller cabinets.

d. Each wire shall be identified at both ends with the wire designation corresponding to the
wire numbers shown on the wiring diagrams.

e. All exposed wiring within the cabinets, consoles, and terminals shall be formed neatly with
wires grouped in bundles using non-metallic, flame-resistant wiring cleats or wire ties.

f. All ferrous metal work shall be painted, in accordance with the manufacturer’s standards.

3.2 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

The Contractor shall be responsible for testing and commissioning of the installation in
accordance

with all applicable documents in the Contract set.

1. Testing shall be comprehensive and sufficient to demonstrate compliance with each

requirement.

2. A proposed test plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before
commencement of final test.

3. Final tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 203 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – IT/ELV INSTALLATION

C24 GATE BARRIER

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1. RELATED SECTIONS

A. Conform to relevant sections of specification for this and other Divisions.

1.2. SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section for Submittals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. This section includes supply and installation of all materials and equipment associated with
the gate barrier installation including gate barrier column, barrier foundations, sleeves, control

cables, intercom units and supply of transponders.

B. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install vehicle

barrier as indicated on the drawings and specified in these specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The barrier system enclosure should be constructed from hairline finish stainless steel.
Each barrier should be monitored from the control room for motor fault, arm breakage,
proximity sensor failure etc. The barrier will also be controlled from the control room upon the
security personnel ascertaining that the visitor is authorized to enter. The control system will
also notify the control room of gate position at any given time. Radio controllers will be
identifiable automatically upon their operation of the gate barrier. This information will be
logged onto an MS Access style database to record which user accessed the gate at which
time. The database will record gate actions throughout.

B. Barrier should have self-locking gears that should lock the arm both in the open and closed

position. During power failure the arm is to have facility to be raised or lowered manually,

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 204 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

without opening the cabinet. Should have a locking mechanism outside the cabinet.

C. A radio transmitter is to be provided on all access gates.

D. A separate video intercom connected access gates will be provided. The intercom will be

mounted on a wall position exactly two meters prior to the gate. The contractor is to detail

accordingly. The video intercom will be suitable for external mounting and be of stainless-
steel construction. An indoor unit will be placed within the security control room in an agreed

location.

E. Exit gates are to be operated automatically by induction loops buried within the road
surface. The induction loops are to be supplied and installed within this work package.

G. The central PC controller will have facility to :

1. Adjust speed of arm opening

2. Count number of arm openings

3. Monitor status of arm

4. Monitor if arm has been detached

5. Allow for remote operation of arm

6. Allow for override from the PC of other systems to access the gate.

C. The same user proximity cards shall be utilized for both gate barriers and access control
system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES

A. Gate column to be stainless steel, hairline finished with suitable lacquer finish to suit
external environment.

B. The barrier arm shall be internally lit to provide a uniform lighting affect along its length.
The arm will be of hollow UV stabilized semi-opaque polycarbonate construction primarily

coloured white with red chevrons.

C. Opening time of the barrier should be equal to or less than 2 seconds.

D. Arm size shall be 2.5m unless noted otherwise.

E. Protection level shall be IP 54(NEMA3)

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 205 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

3.2 OPERATING FEATURES

A. A small red flashing becon is to be provided on top of the gate column to operate when the
arm is raising or lowering.

B. A photocell will be provided to ensure that the lighting within the arm is only switched on

during darkness.

C. Provide remote monitoring and control facility as described above.

D. Provide Radio control and Radio control handsets as required for operation of the gate
barriers described above.

E. Radio control (transponder) handsets – provide 1.5 for every car parking space.

3.3 SAFETY FUNCTIONS

A. Preflashing function during closure

B. Reopening during closure

C. Total stop

3.4 COMMAND OPERATIONS

A. Provide for local manual controls to be provided for each entrance gate.

B. Provide the pushbutton open/close unit and allow terminals within column for same to be

installed as and when required. Co-ordinate with the engineer prior to commencement of

concrete works to install necessary conduits to final local control positions.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 206 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – IT/ELV INSTALLATION

C24 VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION - ELEVATORS

ELECTRIC ELEVATORS

INSTALLATION

REQUIREMENTS:

The elevator shall be DESIGNED, supplied and installed by an approved manufacturer to

consultant approval.

The work will be carried out concurrently with the work of the Building Contract and the Main
Contractor will be required to carry out certain work in connection with the Specialist Sub-
contractor.

BUILDER'S WORK AND ATTENDANCE

The main contractor is to allow for all builders work as per requirements of the Elevator Sub-
contractor listed elsewhere in connection with the elevator installation.

The Main Contractor shall also provide normal attendance including all usual facilities for the
execution of the Specialist Sub-contract.

AS-FITTED DRAWINGS AND SERVICE MANUALS

On completion of the elevator installation and at least one week prior to the date of inspection,
the contractor shall hand over to the Engineer as-fitted elevator installation drawings. Four
sets (1 original + 3 copies) of instruction manuals for general running and maintenance and
repair are to be provided.

GENERAL

The contractor shall supply, install., test and commission and hand over the complete elevator
installation as specified.

The general requirements of the elevators and particular specifications are given in the
Schedules at the end of the specification.

The Contractor shall commence the electrical installation from the circuit breakers provided in
the machine room for this purpose. All the works shall be co-ordinated with the other
Contractors prior to installation, so that there will be no areas of incompatibility.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 207 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

The elevator system shall be equipped with traction machinery and associated traction
equipment, elevator cars, solid state control systems and all other equipment and accessories
required to provide a complete, modern, durable and efficient vertical transport system.

All the components shall be selected to provide satisfactory operation under prevailing
environmental conditions at site.
The contractor shall be responsible for the complete maintenance of the elevator for a period
of 12 months from the date of acceptance by the Engineer of the complete elevator
installation and shall include for cleaning, oiling and inspection of the elevator and all the
associated equipment at periods of one week and to include for all emergency calls
throughout the 24 hours of the day.

A weekly inspection sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer immediately after each weekly
inspection and cleaning and greasing.

The Contractor shall also give notice that any fault notified will receive immediate attention on
the day of the notification.

Energy Saving

Machines with 90% efficiency shall be utilized, and losses shall be reduced,
compared to conventional machines. which results in electricity savings, Escalators
must be fitted with control to reduced speed or to stop when no traffic is detected.
Escalators shall shout down when no activity has been detected for a period of 15
minuts and the air conditioning load shall also be reduced.

Contractor to follow all green building regulation related to the Escalators.

Minimizing the carbon footprint

The carbon footprint shall be lowered by reducing the energy consumption of an

elevator over its life cycle.

OPERATING PANELS AND INDICATORS

a) Car Operating Panel

The car operating panel of each elevator shall contain the following:

1. Operating buttons numbered to correspond to the landing served with

acknowledge light for each button.

2. Emergency call button.

3. Door Open and Door Close Buttons.

4. Intercom Station.

5. Overload indicating lamp with buzzer.

b) Landing Position Indicator

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 208 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Car position indicator shall be provided for each car, in the car and at every entrance
of each elevator. As the elevator travels through the hoistway, its position shall be
indicated by the illumination of the numeral/letter corresponding to the landing at
which the elevator is stopped or passing. Indicators shall be properly designed for
better recognition with colour filters to provide good contrast. Travel direction
indicators shall also be included in this indicator.

c) Push Buttons and Indicator for Landing

1. Up and Down call buttons with indicator lights to show that the call has been
registered.

2. Hall Indicators/Call Buttons to be provided as specified in the schedule.

3. Fire Alarm call button in a break-glass fixture at the main landing.

CAR AND LANDING SILLS

Sills manufactured as specified in the schedules shall be fitted at every landing entrance and
on the car platform for the entire width of the door opening.

These sills shall be with integral grooves to act as guide for the bottom of the door panels.
The car sill shall be securely fitted to the car platform and the landing sills securely fitted to
the entrance threshold. These sills shall be flushed with the finished floor level.

The sills shall be designed to provide adequate strength to support the loads excerting on
them, in addition to the safety and decorative entrance plate appearance.

ELEVATOR SCHEDULE

Schedule No. 1 (Passenger Lift)

Summary of Elevator Particulars

Elevator No. (or Nos.) : As per drawing

Number of passengers : As per drawing and Traffic Study

Rated Speed; m/sec : 90 meters / minute (1.5 meter/second)

Position of machine room : ROOF MACHINE ROOM

Control : V3F, AC inverter control with Data
Network systeM
Operation : Two car group control (OPTIONAL)

Total travel; m : AS PER DRAWING

Floors served : AS PER DRAWING

Entrance door type:

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 209 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Car : Central, Auto - Sliding

Landing : Central, Auto - Sliding

Main parking floor : Ground

Summary of Lift Particulars Schedule 1 (Cont’d)

Hoist way: : AS PER DRAWING

Width; mm : AS PER DRAWING

Depth; mm : AS PER DRAWING

Lift shaft Construction : Concrete

Pit depth; mm : AS PER DRAWING

Electric power supply : 400 V, 50 Hz

Buffer type:
Car : Spring

Counter - weight : Spring

Guide shoes:

Car : Roller

Counter - weight : Roller

Safety gear : Gradual

Intercom/ telephone station : Needed

BMS interface : (1) Optional (As per Client

requirements)

Elevator Finishes (To be approved by Client /Consultant)

LIFTS:

Contractor to provide all required scaffolding, services and stores for the Contractor which will be

appointed by the owner to execute the work.

All related electrical and civil works are to be done by the main Contractor

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 210 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Cost of the above works and services are to be included in the Contractor’s price.

END OF SECTION

PART C – STANDARD SPECIFICATION – FIRE SERVICES INSTALLATION

C25 INTEGRATED FIRE ALARM AND VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section includes the requirements for the installation, programming and configuration
of a complete addressable intelligent network-based fire detection and alarm systems.
The system shall include but is not limited to: fire alarm control panel(s), automatic and
manually activated voice evacuation alarm subsystem, firefighter telephone
communications, automatic and manually activated alarm initiating and notification
devices and appliances, remote annunciator, conduit, wire and accessories required to
furnish a complete and operational life safety system. All conduit, wiring and accessories
required to provide power to, and interconnect, devices supplied through other divisions,
including electric and magnetic door holders, suppression system flow switches,
suppression system supervisory switches, elevator status and control panel and damper
related to smoke control. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein or on the
plans, but which are required to meet the functional intent, shall be provided without
additional cost to the Owner. Refer to the tender drawings for the specific details.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”

B. “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems”

C. “Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems”

D. “Cable Trays for Electrical Systems”

E. “Identification for Electrical Systems”

F. “Structured Cabling”

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 211 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes
and ordinances of the local, state, and federal authorities having jurisdiction. Such codes,
when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and specifications. The
specifications and standards listed below form part of this specification. The system shall
fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if applicable.:

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

b) NFPA72—National Fire Alarm Code

c) NFPA101—Life Safety Code
d) NFPA13—Sprinkler Systems
e) NFPA70 & 71
2. BS 5839 Part 1 and Part 8

3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

a) UL 864—UOJZ Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling

Systems
b) UL 268—Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
c) UL 268A—Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
d) UL 217—Smoke Detectors Single Station
e) UL 521—Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
f) UL 228—Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
g) UL 464—Audible Signaling Appliances
h) UL 1638—Visual Signaling Appliances
i) UL 38—Manually Activated Signaling Boxes
j) UL 346—Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems
k) UL1480—Speakers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
l) UL 1481—Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
m) UL 1711—Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
4. FM - Factory Mutual

5. FOC – Fire Officers Committee

6. LPCB – Loss Prevention Certification Board

7. UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of Practice 2018.

B. System shall be listed by the national agencies as suitable for extinguishing release
applications. The system shall support release of high- and low-pressure CO2.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 212 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NFPA 72

B. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.

3. Flame detectors.

4. Smoke detectors.

5. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.

6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

7. Fire extinguishing system operation.

8. Fire standpipe system.

C. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.

2. Identify alarm at the FACP and remote annunciators (repeaters).

3. De-energize electromagnetic door holders.

4. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

5. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.

6. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.

7. Activate voice/alarm communication system.

8. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire

alarm mode.

9. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was
initiated.

10. Record events in the system memory.

11. Record events by the system printer.

D. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

1. Operation of a fire-protection system valve tampers.

E. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 213 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

1. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line,
and notification-appliance circuits.

2. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal

initiating devices.

3. Loss of primary power at the FACP.

4. Ground or a single break in FACP internal circuits.

5. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP.

6. A break in standby battery circuitry.

7. Failure of battery charging.

8. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP or annunciator (repeater).

9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.

10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or pre-action sprinkler

system.

F. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the
FACP and remote annunciator (repeater). Record the event on system printer.

1.05 SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of work comprises installation of a Fire Detection and Alarm system complete with
required devices, equipment for its best operation.

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a) Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system

design.
2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including
method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of
operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs.
Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

3. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.

4. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and
wire types and sizes.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 214 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for
equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified.
Show wiring color code.

6. Batteries: Size calculations.

7. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for

each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of
air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is
operating.

8. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each

addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A,
recommendations for Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for
mounting at the FACP.

F. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for

submittals specified in Division 01 Section "Submittals," make during the period of
construction an identical submittal to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review,
include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations.
Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of
comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review. Upon
completion of construction work make a submittal of the final as-built drawings to the
Authorities Having Jurisdiction for their approval for purposes of their inspection and
testing of the fire alarm system installations.

G. Documentation:

1. Record of Completion Documents: Submit the "Permanent Records"

according to NFPA 72

a) Electronic media may be provided to the Architect and concerned

local fire authority.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for

installation of units required for this Project.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 215 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100 to the Architect, and acceptable to authorities of the local fire Authority.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, provide products
from the approved list of manufacturers only.

2.02 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)

A. The control panel shall be a U.L. listed Fire Alarm Control Panel with multiplex signaling
service and voice evacuation. All components shall be provided by one manufacturer. As the
central control unit for the entire system, the control panel shall provide power, supervision,
control, and logic, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged
for easy access. Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz,
normal building power supply.

B. Cabinet: Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all
components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of all panels as well as
all field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin
nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall say Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall not be
less than 1-inch high. If multiple panels are provided, additional identification shall be
provided on each nameplate to distinguish the panels. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal
identification plates for all lamps, circuits, meters, fuses and switches. The cabinet shall be
provided in sturdy steel housing, complete with backbox, hinged steel door with cylinder lock,
and surface mounting provisions.

C. Control/Display Modules: Provide power and control modules in the FACP to perform all
functions described in this specification.

1. Provide communication between the FACP and remote circuit interface panels,
annunciators, and displays.

2. Non-volatile memory for system data base, logic, and operating system and event
history. The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the event of a
complete power down condition.

3. Visual indication of alarm, supervisory or trouble initiation on the fire alarm control
panel shall be by liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80
characters of which at least 32 are field changeable.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 216 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

4. LED display for "ALARM", "AUDIBLE SILENCED", "SUPERVISORY", "TROUBLE",

and "POWER ON".

5. Switches or buttons for "ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE", "AUDIBLE SILENCE",

"SUPERVISORY ACKNOWLEDGE", "TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE", and "RESET"

6. Programmable buttons or switches to perform custom functions such as drill,

disable, bypass automatic control commands or other special functions as required
by design.

7. Programmable panel mounted relays to be software programmed to perform

control functions required for system operation.

8. Notification appliance circuits as required to supervise and operate all connected

notification appliances. Operation of NACs shall be fully integrated with the FACP.
Switches shall be used to activate or deactivate speaker and strobe circuits. Through
the use of multi-colored LEDs, a clear indication shall be provided showing which
circuits are active and to which strobe and audio channel. The audio circuit shall
activate a slow whoop tone for three cycles followed by a voice message which is
repeated until the control panel is reset. A live voice message shall override the
automatic output through use of a microphone input at the control panel. The system
shall be capable of operating all strobes and speakers at the same time. The
digitalized voice message shall consist of a non-volatile (EPROM) microprocessor
based input to the amplifiers. The microprocessor shall actively interrogate all
circuitry, field wiring and digital coding necessary for the immediate and accurate
rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the appropriate amplifier input. Loss of
operating power, supervisory power or any other malfunction which could render the
digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically cause the slow whoop tone to
take over all functions assigned to the failed unit.

9. Locate diodes and relays, if any, on screw terminals in the FACP.

10. Additional Requirements: The FACP shall have the following additional features:

a. System shall be UL 864 listed.

b. Field programmable.

c. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each
detection zone to provide accessory functions as required.

d. Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE, DRILL, and ALARM SILENCE

switch.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 217 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

e. Control panel shall have minimum 25% capacity for addition of future
signaling line circuits and notification appliance circuits. Each installed circuit
shall have 2% spare capacity.

f. Analog Loop Driver to allow for continuous interrogation of each

addressable device in the building.

g. Communication with auxiliary devices, including water flow switches, valve

supervisory switches, door controls, etc. through the use of appropriate
interface modules as indicated on the riser diagram and interface schematics.

h. The FACP shall be listed for releasing service and shall be listed for
connection to a Central Station Signaling System service.

i. The FACP shall have drift compensation technology and shall be UL listed
as a calibrated smoke test instrument.

j. Device history shall be stored at the FACP. At a minimum, the following

information for each sensor shall be maintained: device history, sensitivity
levels, alarm verification status, drift compensation data.

k. The FACP shall provide a minimum 500 event history log.

l. The FACP shall indicate which communication zones have been silenced
and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by
building communication zone.

m. Flow test shall be programmed as a software zone to permit de-activation

of the audible alarms, and to activate and de-activate the flow test through
the use of function keys at the panel.

n. All keys switches and panel buttons shall be programmed in accordance

with the using agency’s specific requirements.

2.03 MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS

A. Manual fire alarm stations shall be non-code, non-break glass type, equipped with key
lock so that they may be tested without operating the handle.

B. Stations must be designed such that after an actual activation, they cannot be restored to
normal except by key reset.

C. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected, as

operated, at a minimum distance of 100 feet (30.5 m) front or side.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 218 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

D. Manual stations shall be constructed of high impact Lexan, with operating instructions
provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the manual station in letters one
half inch (12.7 mm) in size or larger.

2.04 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Description:

1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status

(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

3. Multipurpose type, containing the following:

a) Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector

status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
b) Piezoelectric sounder rated at 88 dBA at 3 m according to UL
464.
c) Heat sensor, combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature.
4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall
be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide
terminals in the fixed base for connection of building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after

actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated

and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog

addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration,
sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from
the FACP.

a) Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at the

FACP for 8 or 11 deg C per minute.
b) Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise
sensing and shall be settable at the FACP to operate at 57 or 68
deg C.
c) Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 219 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm smoke

obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

a) Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell

receiver.
b) Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm
smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
2. UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status

(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall

be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base
shall be designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in
the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

a) Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the

supplied detector. The enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250
requirements for Type 4X.
5. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after
actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated

and power-on status. Provide remote status and alarm indicator and test
station where indicated.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog

addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration,
sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from
the FACP.

8. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.

9. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer

for the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where
applied.

10. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 220 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

D. Intelligent Multi Criteria Self-Acclimating Detector

1. Intelligent multi criteria Acclimate detector shall be an addressable device

that is designed to monitor a minimum of photoelectric and thermal
technologies in a single sensing device. Design shall include the ability to
adapt by utilizing a built in microprocessor to determine its environment and
choose the appropriate sensing settings. Detector design shall permit a
sensitivity window, no less than 1 to 4% per foot obscuration.

2. Microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate

sensitivity levels based on the environment type it is in and then have the
ability to automatically change the setting as the environment changes (as
walls are moved or as the occupancy changes).

3. Intelligent multi criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine
the signal of the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric signal in
an effort to react quickly in the event of a fire situation. It shall also include
the inherent ability to distinguish between a fire condition and a false alarm
condition by examining the characteristics of the thermal and smoke
sensing chambers and comparing them to a database of actual fire and
deceptive phenomena.

E. Photoelectric Beam Detector:

1. Photoelectric beam smoke detection shall be used to protect large areas,

where spot type smoke detection is impractical.

2. The unit shall be a sophisticated microprocessor based long range beam

smoke detector consisting of a separate transmitter and matching receiver
providing accurate and repeatable monitoring of smoke passing through
the light beam.

3. The transmitter produces a crystal controlled, infrared beam which is

monitored by the receiver to determine smoke obscuration. When the
receiver measures beam intensity below a preset, selectable threshold, an
alarm output is generated.

4. Complete beam blockage and dust accumulation that reduces signal level
to 50% will initiate a trouble output. Intermittent beam blockage, such as
cleaning, shall be ignored. Tamper switches monitor the access covers and
cause a circuit trouble if activated. Installation is simplified due to
convenient beam alignment adjustments and easy receiver calibration. The

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 221 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

transmitter beam shall have a format signature that allows the receiver to
minimize interference from external light sources.

2.05 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General: UL 521 listed.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 57 deg C or

rate-of-rise of temperature that exceeds 8 deg C per minute, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status

(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature of 88 deg C.

1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status

(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

3. or trouble) to the FACP.

2.06 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a

single mounting assembly.

B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the
operating mechanism behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94
dBA, measured 3 m from the bell. 254-mm size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are
weatherproof where indicated.

C. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.

D. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.

E. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA,
measured 3 m from the horn.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 222 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

F. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal
white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is
ngraved in minimum 25-mm high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output: 110candela.

2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals

2.07 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REMOTE INDICATORS

A. Remote status and alarm indicator and test stations, with LED indicating lights. Light is
connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is
flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification
plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal
and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the
identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water flow
switch.

2.08 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete
with matching door plate.

1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 111-N holding force.

2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.

4. Rating: 120-V ac.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.09 REMOTE LCD ANNUNCIATOR

A. Provide Remote LCD Annunciator with the same “look and feel” as the FACP operator
interface. The Remote LCD Annunciator shall use the same Primary Acknowledge,
Silence, and Reset Keys, Status LEDs and LCD Display as the FACP.

B. Annunciator shall have super-twist LCD display with two lines of 40 characters each.
Annunciator shall be provided with four (4) programmable control switches and
associated LEDs.

C. Under normal conditions the LCD shall display a “SYSTEM IS NORMAL” message and
the current time and date.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 223 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

D. Should an abnormal condition be detected the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory or

Trouble) shall flash. The unit audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound
steady for trouble and supervisory conditions.

E. The LCD shall display the following information relative to the abnormal condition of a
point in the system:

1. 40-character custom location label.

2. Type of device (e.g., smoke, pull station, waterflow).

3. Point status (e.g., alarm, trouble).

F. Operator keys shall be key switch enabled to prevent unauthorized use. The key shall
only be removable in the disabled position. Acknowledge, Silence and Reset operation
shall be the same as the FACP.

2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a system address
for listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate
elevator recall for designated level and to a circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.

C. Furnish intelligent analog signaling circuit interface modules for the monitoring of contact
type initiation devices, the control of electrical devices, fire pump controllers, load control
relays (controlling elevators and HVAC equipment), and each independent smoke
detection, kitchen, and gaseous fire suppression systems. The modules shall be capable
of monitoring three separate functions: alarm, trouble and supervisory conditions.
D. The module shall be addressed, tested and programmed prior to installation using a U.L.
listed programmer/ tester.
E. The module shall display a steady LED for each circuit, in the normal power or standby
power condition, when in the alarm state or during control circuit is activation.

2.11 SYSTEM PRINTER

A. Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.

2.12 SMOKE CONTROL ANNUNCIATOR

A. On/Auto/Off switches and status indicators (LEDS) shall be provided for monitoring and
manual control of each fan, damper, HVAC control unit, stairwell pressurization fan, and
smoke exhaust fan. To ensure compliance the units supplied shall meet the following UL
categories: UUKL, PAZX, UDTZ, QVAX as well as the requirements of NFPA 90A, HVAC,

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 224 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

and NFPA 92A & 92B, Smoke Control. The control System shall be field programmable
for either 90A operation or 92A/B operation to allow for future use and system expansion.

B. The OFF LED shall be Yellow, the ON LED shall be green, the Trouble/Fault LED shall be
Amber/Orange for each switch. The Trouble/Fault indicator shall indicate a trouble in the
control and/or monitor points associated with that switch. In addition, each group of eight
switches shall have two LEDS and one momentary switch which allow the following
functions: An Amber LED to indicate an OFF-NORMAL switch position, in the ON or OFF
position; A Green LED to indicate ALL AUTO switch position; A Local Acknowledge/Lamp
Test momentary switch.

C. Each switch shall have the capability to monitor and control two addressable inputs and
two addressable outputs. In all modes, the ON and OFF indicators shall continuously
follow the device status not the switch position. Positive feedback shall be employed to
verify correct operation of the device being controlled. Systems that indicate on/off/auto
by physical switch position only are not acceptable.

D. All HVAC switches (i.e., limit switches, vane switches, etc.) shall be provided and installed
by the HVAC contractor.

E. It shall be possible to meet the requirements mentioned above utilizing wall mounted
custom graphic.

2.13 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with
NFPA 70, Article 760.

B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system

manufacturer but not less than No. 18 AWG. 1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded
pair, NFPA 70 Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service. UL
listed as Type FPL, and complying with requirements in UL 1424 and in UL 2196 for a 2-
hour rating.

C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-

coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.

2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.

3. Multi conductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70 Type MC, copper conductors,

TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with
outer jacket with red identifier stripe, UL listed for fire alarm and cable tray

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 225 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for

a 2-hour rating.

2.14 INTEGRATED VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM

A. The FACP with integrated voice evacuation system shall be supplied complete with built in
Audio DSP controller and Power amplifier

1. FACP WITH BUILTIN AUDIO DSP CONTROLLER

a. All audio input signals, and pre-recorded messages shall be processed and
routed in the digital domain. The DSP Audio processor unit shall monitor all
the units and devices in the Voice evacuation system. The following facilities
shall be available within the routing equipment:

1. Total Harmonic Distortion: ˂ 0.01% at 1 kHz.

2. Audio format: 48Khz/24-Bit

3. Frequency Response: within plus or minus ± 0.5dB from 20 to 20,000 Hz

4. Minimum of 6 audio inputs per frame.

5. Audio input sensitivity: -60/-40/-20/0dBu.

6. Network method between the controllers shall be one of three:

a. High speed Digital Expansion Bus.

b. GB inbuilt Fiber Glass (2x SPF Slot)

c. Dante ports (Dual RJ45 Port) considering an approved EN54

Industrial switch.

7. Minimum of 6 audio outputs per frame and up to 24 audio outputs.

8. Cascadable units are accepted

9. Minimum of 6 x combined digital and analogue inputs for fire detection

10. interface per frame

11. Minimum of four band parametric equalizer for input audio and 10 band

12. parametric for audio output.

13. Inbuilt limiter, Automatic Gain Control, Compressor and limiter.

14. Inbuilt Digital Message player- minimum of 30 minutes.

15. Inbuilt delay feature: 1-200ms (1dB steps).

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 226 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

16. Hardware bypass Microphone ports.

17. Internal timer.

18. Integral LCD

19. UL listed or LPCB or Vds or Kite Mark.

20. EN54 part 2

B. Voice Alarm Notification Appliances: Speaker/ Speaker with strobe notification shall be UL
1480.

Ceiling mounted speaker

 6W Rated power
 6W, 3W, 1.5W, 0.5W Transformer tapping’s
 Speaker shall be tapped at 3. watts
 100V Line operation
 100Hz – 17.5 kHz Effective frequency range.
 83dB Sensitivity (1W/1m) 100Hz – 10kHz bandwidth
 SPL rated power shall be 91dB
 Material shall be Plastic baffle ABS with UV inhibitor
 Mounting shall rotary compression clamps.

C. Power Amplifier

A. General: Amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators, digitalized voice drives and all
other hardware necessary for a complete, operational voice/alarm signaling service
conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a remote fire alarm control unit, terminal
cabinet, or in the fire alarm control panel. Each amplifier shall have two channels;
one to broadcast a message and the other for paging.
B. Construction: Amplifiers shall utilize solid state components and shall be provided
with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any
transient up to ten (10) times the highest rated voltage in the system.
C. Inputs: Each system shall be equipped with separate inputs from the tone
generator, digitalized voice driver and panel mounted microphone. Microphone
inputs shall be of the low impedance, balanced line type. Both microphone and tone
generator input shall be operational on any amplifier.
D. Tone Generator: The tone generator shall be of the modular, plug-in type with
securely attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 227 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

identify the specific tone it produces. The tone generator shall produce a slow
whoop tone, which shall slowly ascend from low (500 hertz) to high (1200 hertz)
and be constantly repeated until interrupted by either the digitalized voice message,
the microphone input or the alarm silence mode as specified. Each slow whoop
cycle shall last approximately four (4) seconds. The tone generator shall be single
channel with an automatic backup generator per channel such that failure of the
primary tone generator causes the backup generator to automatically take over the
functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the common trouble relay.
E. Protection Circuits: Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition
which could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any
component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier,
illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control panel, appropriate
logging of the condition on the system printer and other actions for trouble
conditions as specified.

2.15 FIREFIGHTER TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

A. Provide a firefighter telephone communication system with complete, common talk,

closed circuits. The system shall include, but not be limited to, a master control
station mounted in the fire alarm control panel, a power supply and standby battery
system, and remote telephone stations.
B. Provide a master control station which shall provide all power, supervision and
control for all wiring, components, and circuits. The act of lifting any remote
telephone handset from its cradle shall cause both a visual and audible signal to
annunciate at the master control station. Removing the handset at the master
control station and depressing a button at the remote telephone handset shall
cause the automatic silencing of the audible signal.
C. Communication between the master control station handset and any/or all remote
handsets shall require the depressing of a push-to-talk switch located on any/all
remote handsets. During the time that the master control handset is removed from
its cradle it shall be possible to communicate between 5 remote handsets and the
master control station.
D. Handsets shall be able to monitor any conversation in progress and join the
conversation by pressing the push-to-talk button. It shall not be possible to
communicate between two or more remote handsets with the master control station
handset in its cradle. The master control station handset shall be red in color and

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 228 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

equipped with a 5 foot (1524 mm) long strain-relieved coiled cord. All wiring
connections shall be made to terminal strips.
E. The master control station shall monitor all wire and connections for any opens,
shorts or grounds which would render the system inoperable or unintelligible. The
master control station shall be equipped with a silencing switch and ring-back
feature such that any audible trouble signal can be silenced and will be so indicated
by the lighting of an amber LED. Once any trouble condition has been corrected,
the amber LED will be extinguished, and the silence switch will sound again until
the switch is restored to its original position.
F. The master control station shall be equipped with a separate, LED annunciated
switch for each telephone circuit. In addition, LEDs shall provide for the
annunciation of operating and supervisory

2.16 REMOTE MONITORING SYSTEM

A. All equipment device wiring shall be provided for remote monitoring.

B. FACP shall be compatible with remote monitoring station.
C. Communication between FACP and remote monitoring station shall be via digital
dialer.

2.17 POWER SUPPLIES

A. Primary power for the FACP shall be 120VAC service obtained from the emergency
power panel board. Red colored breaker locks shall be provided for all fire alarm
circuit breakers.
B. Secondary power for the FACP shall be provided by sealed gelled electrolyte
batteries. Batteries shall be housed in the control cabinet or a separate cabinet with
adequate cell separation to prevent accidental discharge.
C. Battery Capacity: Battery supply shall be calculated to operate its load in a
supervisory mode for twenty-four hours with no primary power applied, and after
that time, operate its alarm mode for five minutes. (In addition, an alarm reserve
correction of 1.3 shall be included.)
D. Battery Charger: Secondary power battery chargers shall be obtained from the
emergency power panel board. Provide battery charging circuitry for each standby
battery bank in the system low voltage power supply or as a separate circuit. The
charger shall be automatic in design, adjusting the charge rate to the condition of
the batteries. Battery charge rate and terminal voltage shall be read using the fire
alarm control panel LCD display in the service mode, indicating directly in volts and

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 229 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

amps. Charger shall be housed in the main fire alarm control panel or the battery
cabinet.

2.18 LOAD CONTROL RELAYS:

A. Relays for the control of air handler contactors and elevator recall circuits shall be
rated for use with circuits up to 240VAC at 7A inductive. Relays shall be of the
sealed pluggable type, and terminations shall be made to pressure type screw
terminals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:

1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 9 m

2. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling

construction, and for high ceiling areas, shall be determined based on
guidelines and recommendations in NFPA 72.

B. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than one meter from air-supply diffuser or return-air
opening.

C. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with
sprinkler rating and location.

D. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a
dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm
causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.

E. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler
water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing
position.

F. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 150 mm below the ceiling.

G. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating
mechanism concealed behind a grille.

H. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

I. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 1800 mm above the finished
floor.

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 230 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

J. Annunciator (Repeater): Install with top of panel not more than 1800 mm above the
finished floor

3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method:

1. Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed

parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box or cabinet.

2. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire
alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This
system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

B. Conductor Type and size:

Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems. Wire type and sizing of
conductors shall be in accordance with the manufacturers wiring specifications for the
system, except for minimum wire size shall be as follows:

1. Signaling Line Circuits: 16AWG, Type FPLR, solid copper, shielded

2. Notification Appliance Circuits: 14AWG, Type FPLR, solid copper, twisted

pair, shielded

3. 120VAC Circuits: 12AWG, Type THHN, solid copper

4. Interfaced Circuits: 16AWG, Type FPLR, solid copper, shielded

5. Speaker Circuits: 16 AWG, Type FPLR, solid copper, twisted pair,

unshielded

6. Firefighter Telephone Circuits: 18 AWG, solid copper, twisted pair

7. Battery Cable: 14 AWG, stranded

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides
and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure
associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to
the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp on terminal
spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

D. Signaling Line and Notification Appliance Circuits

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 231 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

1. Signaling Line, notification appliance, and power circuits shall each be in

separate conduit.

2. Strobes are to be connected to circuits separate from speakers. This

includes strobes and speakers that are mounted as a unit.

3. Provisions for tying-in signaling line and notification appliance circuits

directly to the FACP mother board (board containing CPU) shall not be
used. Initiation and indicating circuits shall be tied to a separate electronic
board before connection to the mother board.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power
wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for
supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm
initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm
system junction boxes and covers red.

G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate
risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum 1-hour-rated wall, so the loss of
one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or
zones.

H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 25-mm conduit between the FACP and the
transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring
as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26

Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.

C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."

3.04 GROUNDING

A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire
from main service ground to the FACP.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 232 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written

statement using the form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in
NFPA 72. Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be
conducted under the direct supervision of a NICET technician certified
under the Fire Alarm Systems program at Level III.

3. Include the existing system in tests and inspections.

4. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-
built drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify
improperly located, damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct
before beginning tests.

5. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements

in NFPA 72.

a) Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be

replaced.
6. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including
demonstration of sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in
Appendix A in NFPA 70.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this
purpose.

B. Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm
system complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform
tests and inspections listed for three monthly, and one quarterly, periods.

C. Semiannual Test and Inspection: Six months after date of Substantial Completion, test
the fire alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 233 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, and semiannual
periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

D. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test the fire
alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72.
Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual
periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices.
Refer to "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 234 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

PART D – MEP APPROVED MANUFACTURERS’ LIST

D1 ELECTRICAL & IT/ELV VENDOR LIST

S. No MATERIAL DESCRIPTION BRAND COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

POWER SYSTEM
Hateen switchgears and remote UAE
Federal Transformer & Switchgear UAE
1. Electrical Panel Builders
SIEMENS UAE
Gama Engineering UAE
ABB ITALY
LV PANEL (SWITCHGEAR SCHNEIDER FRA
2. & ENCLOSURE)
Eaton EU
SIEMENS EU
MDB’s / SMDB’s / DB’s / ABB
MCC’s / Isolator SCHNEIDER FRA
3. (Switchgear)
Eaton EU
SIEMENS EU
Al Fanar KSA
4. Enclosures for MDB’s / ABB ITALY
SMDB’s / DB’s / MCC’s
SCHNEIDER FRA
SIEMENS EU
ABB Finland
SCHNEIDER FRA
5. Automatic Transfer Switch
Eaton GER.
SIEMENS EU
Schneider FRA
6. PFC/Capacitor Banks
ABB Belgium
Eaton EU

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 235 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

SOCOMEC FRA
ABB Belgium
7. Active Filter / Harmonic
Filter ESTS LLC UAE
Schneider FRA
ITALY / BRAZIL /
Power Monitoring meter / ABB ROMANIA
8. MFM
NOKIAN CAPACITOR EU
SIEMENS EU

S. No MATERIAL DESCRIPTION BRAND COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

VFD - Finland/Estonia ,
ABB Starters - Sweden/China
Variable Frequency Drives / SIEMENS EU
9. Starters
SCHNEIDER France
Eaton EU
ABB GER
SIEMENS EU
10. Contactors
SCHNEIDER FRA
Eaton EU
ABB GER
SIEMENS EU
11. Relays
SCHNEIDER FRA
Eaton EU
G.E.C USA
MK UK
12. HRC Fuse Links
MERLIN GERIN UK
CAT USA
CUMMINS USA
13. Standby Diesel Generator
FG WILSON USA
PERKINS USA
SCHNEIDER (APC) FRA
Legrand FRA
14. UPS SYSTEM
VERTIV USA
Eaton EU
POWER DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM (BUS DUCT,
WIRES & CABLES AND
ACCESSORIES

15. Bus Duct SIEMENS EU

Schneider France

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 236 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Eaton EU
Powerbar UAE
DUCAB UAE
Single / Multi Core Cables Abudhabi cable UAE
(XLPE) - PVC/LSZH/Fire Al Fanar KSA
rated
16.
Oman Cables / ADMMI Oman

S. No MATERIAL DESCRIPTION BRAND COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

DUCAB UAE
Single Core Wires - Abudhabi cable UAE
17. PVC/LSZH/Fire rated
Al Fanar KSA
Oman Cables / ADMMI Oman
DUCAB UAE
Flexible / Heat Resistant Abudhabi cable UAE
18. cables (> 105ºC)
Tekab UAE
Oman Cables / ADMMI Oman
DUCAB UAE
Abudhabi cable UAE
19. Fire Resistant Cables
Tekab UAE
Oman Cables / ADMMI Oman

CRITCHLEY UK
Cable Markers, Labels & BICC UK
20. Warning tapes
LEGRAND FRA
3M USA
Cable Gland /Lug/Wire BICC UK
Connectors/PVC Cable HAWK UK
21. Ties/SS Cable Ties
CMP UK
Simplex India
CONTAINMENTS

Electrical & Telecom Cable N.P.P. UAE

Sleeves & Ducts (uPVC) & COSMOPLAST UAE
22. Accessories
HEPWORTH UAE
Crown Plastic UAE
DECODUCT UAE
PVC Conduits & Caparo UK
23. Accessories
UNIVOLT AUSTRIA
EGATUBE/ MK UK
24. LSZH PVC Conduits & COMAT UAE

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 237 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Accessories UNIVOLT AUSTRIA

KALISTER UAE
MK-Ega Tube UK
Marshall Tufflex UK
25. PVC Flexible Conduit
Schneider FRA
Univolt Austria

S. No MATERIAL DESCRIPTION BRAND COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

KOPEX UK
Flexible GI Conduits / PVC Univolt Austria
26. Coated Flexible GI Conduit
Barton UK
Caparo UK
OBO Betterman GER
EGA Tube UK
27. PVC Cable Trunking
Decoduct UAE
Marshall Tufflex UK
3 M Scotch UK
Jonson tapes UK
28. PVC Insulation Tape
TLC UK
BICC UK
Caparo UK
BARTON UK
29. G.I Conduits & Accessories
Horizon IND
Simplex UK
G.I. Back Boxes & Caparo UK
30. Adaptable Box BARTON UK
Horizon IND
Simplex UK
GI Cable Tray / ladders / OBO Betterman GER
Cable Trunking, Fittings & Walsall UK
31. Support system
Starwell UAE
Issam Kabbani (Unitech) UAE
Cold Galvanising 'Touch Up' Galvafroid UK
32. Paint
Zinga Belgium
Under Floor Trunking, CABLEDUCT UK
Service Outlet Box and OBO Betterman GER
33. Junction Box
Legrand MAL/ IND
MK UK
34. Fire Barriers and Fire Cable Obo Betterman UK

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 238 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Transits 3M USA
Hilti UK
Stanton & Stavely UK
35. Manhole Cover Brick House UK
Boards
UK
35A. LS0H Fire resistant
Conduits Univolt Autria

S. No MATERIAL DESCRIPTION BRAND COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

Luceco UK
LuxeLED Gamma Australia
Lanzini Italy
Light Fittings (LED) Unolumen Italy
36. (internal, external & Karizma luce Netherlands
Façade)
DW Windsor U. K
Lyte Master GER
Lumo UAE
Zumtobel Eur
Pulsar UK
Philip Holland
37. LED Bulbs/Lamps Osram Germany
Tridonic EUR
Phillips EUR
38. LED Control Gears
Vossloh schwabe FRA
OSRAM Germany
1. Braga Illuminazone
38A. Decorative Light Fittings 2. Morovski

1) Martin Professional
2) Stellar
38B. Stage Light Fittings 3) ETC
4) Briteq

Wiring Accessories
MK UK
BG International UK
Light switch, Power sockets,
39. shaver socket and Bell Legrand Eur
Panasonic Asia Pacific

BOTON EU
40. Equipment - Isolators (W/P)/ Craig & Derricott UK

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 239 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Isolator panel ABB Finland/Bulgaria

Legrand France
Gewiss Italy
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
& EARTHING

Earthing system, Lightning OBO Betterman GER

41. Protection System A.N WALLIS UK
ABB - FURSE UK
Kingsmill UK
S. No MATERIAL DESCRIPTION BRAND COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

Electronic Systems OBO Betterman GER

Protection, Surge Arrestors
42. & Surge Protective Devices A.N WALLIS UK
ABB – FURSE UK

Kingsmill UK
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
SYSTEM
AWEX POL
43. Emergency Lighting System CEAG GER
EMERGI-LITE (ABB) UK
Sheild GER

CEAG GER
Addressable Central EMERGI-LITE (ABB) UK
44. monitoring System
AWEX POL
Sheild GER
FIRE ALARM & VOICE
EVACUATION PANELS,
DETECTORS AND
ACCESSORIES
Gent USA
45. Fire Alarm System Shield UK
Simplex USA
Panasonic EU/Japan
Firecel ITA
Prysmian UK
Flamsil (BICC) UK
46. Fire Alarm cables
Draka Fire Tuf UK

47. MICC Cable Wrexham UK

Pyrotenax UK

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 240 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

A.E.I. UK

TOA JAP
48 PA / BGM system / Audio PHILIPS HOL
Speakers / Loudspeakers
Bosch GER
.
BOSE EU
PANASONIC JAP

S. No MATERIAL DESCRIPTION BRAND COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEM
ABB GER
Photocell / Sensors / Timer SIEMENS GER
49. Controller Legrand FRA
Panasonic TUR
LOYTEC Austria
Belden USA
B3 UK
49. Control Cables
Siemens GER
Infinique CAN
IT/ELV SYSTEMS
Al Zubair Elect UAE
Gama Engineering UAE
50. ELV System Integrators
Me & Mine
Gadgeon
Cisco USA
51. Structured cabling – Active RUCKUS USA
components
ARUBA USA

Infinique CAN
Datwyler International
52. Fiber Optic, CAT 6A Cable Televes International
& Passive comp.
RitchField EU

Datacom
Al Fanar
Telecom Racks and ACS
53. Cabinets
Televes International
MK UK
54. Telecom RJ45 Telecom Clipsal AUS

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 241 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

Sockets Scame
Panasonic
RitchField EU
HP
EMC
55. Server/Workstation
Dell

S. No MATERIAL DESCRIPTION BRAND COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

Infinique CAN
PELCO USA
Samsung KOREA
56. CCTV System (IP based) BOSCH EUR

KANTECH CAN
JOHNSON CONTROLS UK
57. Access Control System HONEYWELL USA
Kabba
Schneider FRA
VingCard
Locks, Power Supplies & ELOCK
58. Accessories

59. AUTOMATIC SYSTEM BEL.

Car Park Barrier / Gate CAME ITA
Barrier System
BFT ITA
1) RCF
59A. Sound System 2) B&B
3) Boss

COMELIT Italy
Audio and Video Intercom ALCAD SPN
60. System AIPHONE THAILAND/VIETNAM
bticino Italy
BPT Germany
TELEVES SPN
61. T.V. system (SMATV) Alcad SPN
TRIAX GER
FUEBA GER
62. TELEVES SPN
Co-axial cable FUBA GER

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 242 of 243
 PROPOSED SIKA UAE FACILITY (Showroom + Production Warehouse Extension + External
PROJECT:
shaded Storage Area)
CLIENT : SIKA
DOCUMENT: Tender Stage

BELDON USA
Infinique CAN
TEKAB UAE

Extract Fans with Automatic X-PELAIR UK

63. Shutter S&P SPAIN
O.ERRE ITALY
VECTAIRE UK

D2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The specific product or equivalent material manufactured by any of the following listed
manufacturers is “acceptable” only if the specific product or material can evidence exact
compliance with the contract documents, project specification and authorities’ codes.

B. The overall purpose of a specification is to provide a basis for obtaining a good or service
that will satisfy a particular need at an economical cost and to invite maximum reasonable
competition.

C. Lighting equipment and lighting fixtures and said equipment shall embody the highest
standards of electrical and mechanical design with maximum efficiency obtainable and all
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The right to select other fixtures of the
same quality, without additional cost to the Employer/Owner.

D. The void above the false shall be considered same as exposed area hence PVC
containment shall not be used unless the containment is LS0H/Fire resistant type and
subject to engineer’s approval.

END OF SECTION

Document MEP SPECIFICATION Rev. No. 00 Page No. Page 243 of 243